**mmmm^m t 



1 



*#£* 



\C\t-- £*\{** 



TTIk 



Ww 



A 





%y^W 




wmmemmmmmmm 









M? 









LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 

Chap Copyright 1Y0 



Shelf l/lcf 

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



NEW CENTURY SERIES 

OP 

ANATOMY PHYSIOLOGY AND HYGIENE 



BY 

"WINFIELD S. HALL, PH.D., M.D. (Leipsic) 

Professor of Physiology, 
Northwestern University Medical School, Chicago. 

HENRY F. HEWES, A.B., M.D. (Harvard) 

'readier in Physiological and Clinical Chemistry, 
Harvard University Medical School, Boston. 



NEW CENTURY SERIES 
OF ANATOMY PHYSIOLOGY AND HYGIENE 



1. Oral Lesson Book in Hygiene. 

For Primary Teachers. 

2. The New Century Primer of Hygiene, 

First Book for Pupils' Use. 

3. Intermediate Physiology and Hygiene. 

For Fifth- and Sixth-Year Pupils, or Corresponding Classes in 
Ungraded Schools. 

4. Elementary Anatomy Physiology and Hygiene 

For Higher Grammar Grades. 

5. Anatomy Physiology and Hygiene. 

For High Schools. 



NEW CENTURY SERIES 

OF ANATOMY PHYSIOLOGY AND HYGIENE 



ORAL LESSON BOOK 



HYGIENE 



FOE USE IN PRIMARY GRADES 



PREPARED UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF 

AYINFIELD S. HALL, Ph.D., M.D. (leipsic) 

Professor of Physiology , Northivestem University Medical School, Chicago 

AND 

HENRY F. HEWES, A.B., M.D. (harvard) 

Teacher in Physiological and Clinical Chemistry , Harvard University 
Medical School, Boston 




NEW YORK •:• CINCINNATI •:• CHICAGO 

AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 






g: 



INDORSEMENT 




We, the undersigned, have carefully examined the school text-book 
entitled 

ORAL LESSON BOOK IN HYGIENE, 

prepared under the supervision of Dr. Winfield S. Hall and Dr. Henry 
F. He wes, with reference to the following points : — 

1. Fullness and accuracy of subject-matter relating to the nature and 
effects of alcoholic drinks and other narcotics upon the human system. 

2. Amount of matter on general hygiene. 

3. Presentation of matter with regard to its adaptability to the class 
of students for which it is designed. 

We are satisfied that on all these points, as well as in physiology, 
the treatment is as complete as is required for the teacher's assistance 
in giving oral instruction to primary pupils, while both in statement and 
method it is fully in harmony with the results of the latest investigations. 
We therefore heartily indorse the book for the use of teachers in primary 
classes, and are especially happy to commend its successful presentation 
as being the first work of the kind to which our attention has been called. 



A. H. Plumb, D.D. 

Rev. Joseph Cook, LL.D. 

Daniel Dorchester, D.D. 

William A. Mowry. Ph.D. 

L. D. Mason, M.D. 

T. D. Crotiiers, M.D. 

Chas. H. Shepard, M.D. 

Text-book Committee of the Ad- 
visory Board. 



Mrs. Mary H. Hunt, 

World's and National Superin- 
tendent of Scientific Temperance 
Instruction of the Woman's 
Christian Temperance Union. 



Library of Congress 

Two Copies Received ; 
FEB 19 m\ 

^ Copyright entry 

SECOND COPY 



Copyright, 1901, by 
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY. 

Entered at Stationers' Hall. London. 



or. LESS. IN II Y. 

W. p. i 



PREFACE 



The teachers in the public schools of nearly all the United States, 
and in some other countries, are required by law to teach all pupils 
under their instruction the laws of health, including those which 
relate to the nature and effects of alcoholic drinks and other nar- 
cotics, with physiology enough to make such laws intelligible. 

A subject like this carried through all grades is manifestly designed 
to be a progressive study, adapted to the varying capacities of each 
class from the primary to those more advanced. The words physi- 
ology and hygiene, from previous association, suggest to the minds of 
many primary teachers a dry study, wholly beyond the capacities 
of their pupils. 

The object of this volume is to correct this prejudice, and to show 
by its suggested oral lessons for the first three years of school life 
that as much knowledge of the body and the laws of its health as 
primary pupils are able to comprehend can be made interesting to 
them, and is of educational and practical value. 

A school superintendent asked : — 

" How can we teach this study so that it will stick and influence 
future life ? " 

Teach it just as you do anything else which you wish to have stick 
and influence life, just as you teach mathematics, for instance. In 
that case, when the pupil first enters school you bring to his attention 
a few facts which he can understand. You do this with repeated 
drills, which insure that he comprehends and remembers. Each year 
you add more facts from the same science, with an enlarged develop- 
ment, as your pupil passes from grade to grade, until the truths he 
has been taught become a part of his stock of intelligence, and as 
time goes on he scarcely remembers when or how he learned them; 
he seems always to have known and acted on them. Teach physio- 
logical temperance in the same way and you will get the same results. 

For the benefit of the teacher who recognizes her opportunity 
and duty to teach this subject, but who may not have access to ex- 
tended authorities, quotations from eminent physiological writers are 
appended at the close of each subject. 

At no period is the human being more amenable to reasons that 
can be understood than in early childhood. The question "Why?" 
so sure to follow a statement made to a child, is the reaching out of 
his intellect after " the reasons for things." 



6 PREFACE 

A study of the simplest facts about his body and the laws that 
govern it's health, will give him the reasons for many prohibitions 
which are a marked feature of his daily experience. This study will 
change these prohibitions from arbitrary commands, to which he must 
yield whether he wishes or not, to appeals to his understanding. 

Because health and strength of maturity are largely dependent 
upon the early formation of right habits and consequent early growth, 
no study can be of more practical value than one which clearly points 
the way to such habits. A study which will help a child to act 
intelligently has real educational value. 

An able writer on child nature says : — 

"The child bears within himself instincts which may be trained 
upward or downward." 

Many of these instincts are closely connected with bodily habits. 
That such training as will lead to the formation of right habits 
should be a part of early instruction is now conceded by all advocates 
of education. 

The true teacher seeks to develop character. The best character is 
that in which the will is controlled by an enlightened conscience. 
The study of the laws of health as written in the child's own body 
furnishes worthy motives for the guidance of his will, while that will 
is strengthened by acting on the promptings of such motives. 

There comes to you, teacher, with this study, a rare opportunity to 
help your pupils to the development of the best of which they are 
capable. To this end we offer you the lessons on the following pages, 
with the hope that their hints and outlines will help in your God- 
given mission. These lessons and suggestions have been successfully 
tested in actual schoolroom work. If you bring to their application 
a burning desire to guide the little ones under your care "upward" 
and not "downward," you will help them a thousand times more than 
cold, spiritless words can do. By so doing you will more than save 
a child, for hope to-day looks to the school to prevent the evils of 
intemperance from being projected into the future. 

If all the school officers in our land will do their utmost duty for 
this study, if they will arrange adequate time and place in the cur- 
riculum for its pursuit, if school boards will prescribe good, well- 
graded text-books for pupils above the primary, and needed helps for 
teachers of all grades, and if teachers with these helps will do their 
part, a nation redeemed from the thraldom of strong drink will rise 
up to call them blessed. 



CONTENTS 





FIRST YEAR TOPICS 












PAGE 


Introduction 9 


I. 


First Days in School . 










13 


II. 


Water 










21 


III. 


Cigarettes .... 










28 


IV. 


Growth, Height, and Weight 










31 


V. 


Food and Rest 










38 


VI. 


The Apple .... 










43 


VII. 


The Body as a Whole 










50 


VIII. 


The Head . . . 










54 


IX. 


The Face 












61 


X. 


The Arms 












67 


XI. 


The Hands 


. 










74 


XII. 


Grains 












81 


XIII. 


The Trunk 












89 


XIV. 


The Legs 












96 


XV. 


The Feet 












. 102 


XVI. 


The Five Sens 


ES . 










109 



SECOND YEAR TOPICS 

I. The Body as a Whole 117 

II. Food 129 

III. The Sense of Taste 134 

IV. The Grape and Wine 141 

7 



CONTEXTS 



V. 


The Eye . 


. 


VI. 


The Voice 


. 


VII. 


The Ear . 




VIII. 


The Xose 




IX. 


The Sense oe 


Touch 


X. 


Tobacco . 




XL 


Beer . 


. 



PAGE 

146 
157 
1G0 
168 
172 
178 
184 



THIRD YEAR TOPICS 



I. 


Pure Air and Breathing 










195 


II. 


Drinks which Hurt 










204 


III. 


Food . . . . . 










209 


IV. 


The Stomach . 










214 


V. 


The Blood 










220 


VI. 


Brain and Nerves 










230 


VII. 


The Bones 










245 


VIII. 


The Muscles ... 










252 


IX. 


Beer 










261 


X. 


Cigarettes 










266 


XI. 


The Skin and Cleanliness 










274 


XII. 


The Special Senses 










281 


Index 


• 










291 




INTRODUCTION 



The September clay has come when 
closed doors swing open and small foot- 
steps echo in late empty halls, while a babble 
of childish voices arises from long-deserted 
playgrounds. 

Nine o'clock strikes, and yon look down upon a sea of won- 
dering little faces, — wondering because it is their first school 
day, and all is new. 

The yellow butterflies flitting in the sunshine, the birds as 
they track the stainless blue, the brook, and that free careless 
rover, South Wind, have been the outdoor companions of the 
happy country child. But bird, wind, and butterfly are subject 
to certain laws ; they do not roam utterly at will, neither 
should the child. 

9 



10 



FIRST YEAR 



Nature bids her young things grow. Every day should 
mean increase of life and consequent power, wrought through 
free and constant activity. 

The healthy, normal child is never still during waking hours, 
unless attracted by some object of surpassing interest. 

Does the primary school continue this free happy life of 
investigation and steady growth, when the time has come for 
the child's faculties to have a more systematic training ? 




Four bare walls replace the universe. Enforced quiet takes 
the place of former freedom. Tasks are imposed, apparently 
as remote from the child's real realm as the poles are far 
asunder. 

Bear these facts in mind, and try to make the contrast 
between the school and the child's former freedom less sharp, 
that he may enjoy the school and reap its fruits. 

Essentials to the Child's Comfort. — Every child should 
have a seat adapted carefully to his body. The sole of the 
foot should come down squarely and rest upon the floor. 



INTRODUCTION 11 

If the lowest seat in school is too high for the smallest pupil, 
a board firmly fitted over the floor between the desk irons will 
give needed support. 

The desk should be low enough to allow the arms to rest 
upon it without straining the body from the waist up. If 
the desk is too low, the upper part of the body will naturally 
droop to rest the arms; thus rounded shoulders will be encour- 
aged. 

The desk should be broad enough to allow the child to write 
and draw facing directly forward, rather than turning and 
facing the aisle. 



FIRST YEAR TOPICS 







PAGE 


I. 


First Days in School 


13 


II. 


Water . ■ . 


21 


III. 


Cigarettes ..... 


. 28 


IV. 


Growth, Height, and Weight 


. 31 


V. 


Food and Eest .... 


. 38 


YI. 


The Apple ..... 


, 43 


VII. 


The Body as a Whole 


. 50 


VIII. 


The Head ..... 


. 51 


IX. 


The Face 


. 61 


X. 


The Arms . 


.'■ . 67 


XI. 


The Hands .... 


. 74 


XII. 


Grains ^ . 


. 81 


XIII. 


The Trunk . - . 


. 89 


XIV. 


The Legs ...... 


. 96 


XV. 


The Feet ..... 


. 102 


XVI. 


The Five Senses . 


. 109 



•12 



FIRST YEAR 



FIKST DAYS IK SCHOOL 



LESSON 1.— POSITION 



Show the children how to sit erect, feet squarely on the floor, 
weight of body on posterior parts and on the balls of the feet, 
hands lying loosely in the lap. 

The lower part of the back should 
be against the chair, even if the 
rest of the spine does not touch. 
Never allow the child to slide 
forward so that his weight rests 



the 



spine 



and 



on the end of 
on the heels. 

Do not require the atten- 
tion of the class more than 
five or ten minutes at a time, 
but strive to secure correct 
position during that time. 

Show the children that the 
chest held high, as when we 
straighten up, is the active 
chest, and the position we must 
have for exercise, or anything done 
in a standing position ; the chest drooped 
or relaxed is the passive chest. Encourage the active chest. 

At the close of a lesson that has been taken sitting, give 

13 




U FIRST YEAR 

some exercise that will require standing, some little gymnastic 
movement, or a march around the room ending in a light run- 
ning jump. 

Exercise that implies entire change of position and motion, 
and surroundings that include fresh air should take place at 
the end of every hour for primary children. Be sure to keep 
them, meanwhile, protected from draughts. 

Every period of seat work should be followed by occupation 
in standing position, as at the board. When this is impossible, 
give some form of hand work which permits freedom of move- 
ment. 

If your pupils loll or fidget, the air in your schoolroom is 
not fresh, or your period has been unduly lengthened and the 
children need change, or you are working unskillfully and 
failing to hold their attention. 

Bessie 

Bessie was a little girl just five years old. She was anxious 
to go to school, but her mother said, " When you are older, and 
can sit as Miss Gray wishes, and listen to what she says, then 
you can go." 

One clay mamma's club met at the house. A club is a com- 
pany of people who meet to study, talk, or have just a pleasant 
time. 

Mamma's club was a study club, and Mrs. Tyron was com- 
ing to tell about birds. 

Bessie was very anxious to go into the parlor and hear the 
talk. 

" You will get tired, dear/' said her mamma. 

" Oh no, I won't," said Bessie, " I love birdies, and Aunt 
Isabel is going to show me how to sit and listen. Please let 
me." 

"Very well, then, you may try it this afternoon, if you can 
remember to sit as Aunt Isabel tells you." 



FIRST DAYS IX SCHOOL 



15 




Sitting 

After the ladies had come, Bessie walked quietly in and 
sat down in her little chair. 

She sat up straight, with the back of her body against the 
back of the seat. She dropped her hands in her lap, and 
looked into Mrs. Tyron's face. 

Aunt Isabel had told Bessie 
that a child's bones are not very 
hard, and might grow in a bent 
and crooked way if she should 
twist her legs around her chair 
instead of putting them straight 
down with her feet before her. 
So the good little feet in their tan 
shoes stayed quietly in place. 

Mrs. Tyron told pretty stories 
about the birds. 

She said the color of a robin's 
feathers makes him look as if he 
had on a reddish brown bib. 

The little chickadee looks as if 
he were wearing a gray feather 
overcoat. 

How many of you have ever 
seen a robin ? Those who have 
may lift up their hands. 

How many have seen a chickadee ? 
What time of the year did he come ? 

What birds have you. seen in winter ? When do the birds 
sing most ? 

Mrs. Tyron said she had been watching some robins whose 
nest was just outside her window. She had taken pictures of 
Mr. Robin and his little wife and babies with her kodak. 




What did he say f 



16 



FIRST YEAR 



Standing 

Mrs. Tyron asked Bessie to stand and hold up a picture 
for her. 

She stood as straight as a little Christmas tree. She remem- 
bered why she should stand straight, and now I'll tell you 

why you should. 

This part of my body over which I 
place my hands is the chest. (Teacher 
illustrates.) 

How many of you feel some- 
thing swell out ? All who do 
may lift their hands. The lungs 
are the parts of our ' bodies with 
which we breathe. They are in 
the chest under where our hands 
rest. When they fill with air, they 
swell the chest out. When the air 
goes out of the lungs, the chest 
falls back. 

How many feel it ? Breathe 
again and, see. 

Aunt Isabel told Bessie that 
if she did not stand straight, 
but rounded her shoulders, her 
back would grow crooked and 
her lungs would be so crowded 
that she could not take enough air 
into them. 
Bessie was as quiet as a little mouse. 

She did not knock against her chair or the table. See if 
you can sit down as she did. 

Mrs. Tyron told about a bluebird that came in March when 
the sky was gray and the earth bare and brown. 





FIRST DAYS IX SCHOOL 17 

He looked as if he had on a little blue eoat — blue as the 
sky on a pleasant day, and a brown vest — brown as the 
earth. 

You may play that you are bluebirds and that your arms 
are wings. Show me how the bluebird made his wings go as 
he flew to the sky. 

You may stand as Bessie did. Xow be a flying bluebird. He 
sang but one sweet note. It was something like this — listen! 
(The teacher makes a gentle whistle. Children imitate.) 

Ask the class repeatedly to sit and stand as Bessie did, until 
the little ones naturally take the right position. 

" Xo one has listened better than Bessie/' said Mrs. Tyron. 

She sat nicely in her chair. 

She did not loll or fidget. 

When she stood she did not lean. 

She looked at Mrs. Tyron and listened. 



LESSON 2. —A NOISY SCHOOL 

There was once a school with thirty children in it. When 
the bell rang, they would start and run just as fast as their 
feet could carry them. Each child wanted to be first inside 
the door. They crowded together in the porch and pushed 
and tugged. 

The larger ones trod on the smaller ones ; heads got bumped, 
aprons and dresses torn. Sometimes a child would be pushed 
against the wall or door and really hurt. When these chil- 
dren were excused from school, each child wanted to be the 
first one out. It was a noisy school. 

We should not be rough and rude with our mates any more 
than with older people. Ladies and gentlemen are thought- 
ful of every one. Every child should try to be kind and 
polite. 

OR. LESS. IX HY. 2 



18 FIRST YEAR 

I will tell you how we can leave the room without any noise 
or confusion. 

Show me your right hand, the hand that holds the spoon and 
throws the ball. Stretch out your right arms as far as you 
can without moving your bodies. It points toward your 
right. 

Turn your heads toward the right. Wave your right hands 
toward the right. Point to a picture on the wall at your 
right. Point to a window at the right of your seats. 

Turn softly in your seats to the right. Turn back facing 
me. Stand facing the right. 

I will name each row, or file, from the child in front. 

Daisy's file may come first — the rest watch until your turn 
comes. Her file may walk quietly out in a line in front of me. 

Now let us see how we get to our seats. Turn and face the 
left. Willie will be the leader now. File back to your seats. 
Stand in the middle of the aisle opposite your chairs. Take 
your seats. 

Let us do this again, and then I'll try another file. 

In this manner the teacher, with a kind face and sweet 
loving voice, drills her pupils day after day, until any file can 
come out for recitation, return, and go to any part of the room 
at the word of command. 

Marching 

How many of you have marched in a procession ? 

Horace may tell how he did it. 

Horace: "The band played, and we all kept time with our 
feet." > 

Show us, Horace. Which foot comes first ? Yes, the left 
foot. Left, right ; left, right. We like to march because it 
is such fun to keep time. 

Who will march with Horace ? Ben and George may try. 

We keep time with our feet — left, right; left, right — as if 



FIRST DAYS IX SCHOOL 



19 



we were marching, only without leaving our place. Let us all 
try it. Roy's rile may march to the front, across to the left, 
up the side aisle, across the back of the room to their places 
again ; the school keep on marking time. 

Other files should be drilled in the same way. 

A Fourth of July Story 

Philip was Bessie's cousin. He was seven years old, and 
had been to school a whole year. 




Summer vacation had come, and the Fourth of July, on 
which Miss Gray had promised them a picnic. 

Philip and Bessie got up very early and ran out of doors to 
blow their tin horns, snap their torpedoes, and fire off their 
firecrackers. 

After breakfast Philip put on his white linen suit and a red, 



20 FIRST YEAR 

white, and blue tie. Bessie wore a white dress and a sash of 
red, white, and blue. 

They ran to the schoolhouse, where the rest of the children 
had gathered. Every one had a flag. 

Philip's school marched to a grove, and played there all day. 
They took just the same signals that you do. 

They carried their flags in their right hands and marched 
on the ball of the foot — the part that comes next to the toes. 

Once in a while, as they marched, they waved their flags 
and shouted, " Hurrah for the Fourth of July ! " 

When Philip and his friends got to the grove, they put up 
the flags and began to play. They swung, played seesaw, 
rode on donkeys and flying horses, and went out on the water 
in boats. They had a royally good time. At dinner they 
had sandwiches, cake, lemonade, strawberries, and ice cream. 

They played all the afternoon, and at sundown marched 
home, waving their flags and shouting, " Hurrah for the Fourth 
of July ! " 

Would you like to play that you are carrying flags, and 
would you like to say, " Hurrah for the Fourth of July " ? 

We will march around the room and play Ave are going to 
the picnic. Dick's file may lead. 

Perhaps we can have a real picnic some day, and every child 
who has learned to march well may have a flag to carry. 

MEMORY POINTS i 

We must stand up straight, so that we can breathe enough air 
into our lungs. 

We must not twist our legs about the chair. Our bones will 
not grow straight and strong if we do. 

We should not push and rush when we enter or leave school 
and when we go to and from our seats. 

1 The memory points throughout the book should be put on the board by 
the teacher as each is developed. 



WAT K 11 



21 



WATER 







LESSON 3. —WHY WE NEED WATER TO DRINK 



A little girl whose name is Maud has a doll. She lent it 
to me. Here it is. Maud is very fond of the doll ; she dresses 
and undresses it ; she puts it into her doll's carriage and takes 
it to visit Dora, who lives on the same street, and who also 
has a pretty doll. Maud and Dora play together for hours 
with their dolls. When Maud wakes in the night she often 
asks her mamma for a drink of water, but the doll never 
does. 

Why does Maud want water to drink, and why do you 
want it ? 

I will tell you. It is because we are alive and growing. 

Maud had a lovely little rosebush given her on her birth- 
day. It had roots and bright green leaves and one beautiful 
red rose. 

"It will blossom every month if you take good care of it/ 5 
her mother said. 



22 



FrEST YEAR 



.■ 



"JftiX 



The first week Maud watered it every day. The little rose 
put out two new leaves and a bud, and grew an inch taller. 

One day 
Maud and 
her mother 
were invited 
to spend a 
week in the 
country. 
When they 
got back, 
Maud ran 
out to see 
her rose. 
There were 
no new buds 
this time. 
The pretty 
blossom 

hung its head, and all its red 
petals had fallen to the ground. 
The green leaves were withered 
and yellow. How sad Maud felt! 

She brought it fresh water, 
and cut away the dead leaves. 
By and by it raised its head and 
began to grow again. 

Plants get thirsty just as we do. 
They want water to keep them alive. 
Nothing can live without water. 

One day, as Maud was playing with 
her doll, she said, " My dress doesn't feel good, mamma. It 
pinches me, and my shoes are tight." 




WATER 23 

"That is because my little girl is growing," her mother said. 

The next day Maud had a new dress and a new pair of shoes 
that did not pinch, because they were larger. Then Maud 
wanted a larger dress for her doll. Her mother said, "No; 
the doll does not grow. She does not need a larger dress." 

" Poor dolly ! " said Maud ; " I am sorry you will never grow 
to be a big doll." 

The doll is not alive; it does not eat; it never asks for a 
drink of water as a child does ; it will not grow. 

All healthy boys and girls are growing, and that is what 
makes them thirsty so often. 

A well child wants to drink very often because he is 
growing. 

Water is Better than Tea or Coffee 

" Why, Maud ! " said mamma, one morning, as she saw 
Maud washing her doll's dress in dark-looking water, "what 
are you doing ? " 

" I am washing dolly's dress in tea to make it black, so that 
she can go to the grasshopper's funeral. Wasn't it too bad 
the grasshopper we took away 
from kitty had to die ? We put 
him in a box with green leaves 
around him to make him think of 
the fields, and gave him fresh 
water, too. We were going to 
be real doctors to him until his leg was mended. But this 
morning he was dead, and we are going to have a funeral 
for him. The dolls must go in black dresses." 

" How came you to think that tea would change the color of 
dolly's dress ? " 

" Dora's mamma told her that if she drank tea her skin 
would be darker than if she drank water; so I thought tea 




24 FIRST YEAR 

would make my doll's dress black, and cook gave me some tea 
to wash it in." 

Mamma laughed, and said, " I will find some pieces to make 
a prettier black dress for your doll than the tea will make." 
As mamma was helping Maud to make the dresses, Maud 
asked : — 

" Mamma, will tea truly make a little girl's face dark ? " 
" It is true," said mamma. " A child that drinks tea and 
coffee will have a darker face than one who drinks only water 
or milk. And what is worse, the child who drinks tea and 
coffee is not likely to be strong, and may be cross and fretful, 
not pleasant and happy." 

Tea and coffee are bad for children. 

The Kind of Water to Drink 

We have all learned that water is the best drink, but if any 
dead or dirty things get into the water, they make it bad and 
unfit to drink. 

We must not drink bad, dirty water. 

What made Tom Sick 

One day Tom was sick. The merry old doctor, whom Tom's 
mother had sent for, came in laughing. " Hello, Tom, been 
eating green apples ? " 

"No, sir," said Tom; "I knew those would make me sick, 
so I did not touch them." 

The doctor felt of Tom's pulse, looked at his tongue, and 
sat thinking for a moment. Then he went to the well and 
drew a glass of water. He held it up and looked at it, then 
smelled of it. 

"Ah, that's the trouble," exclaimed the doctor; "this water 
is impure ; better have your well cleaned out, or you will 



WATER 25 

all be sick. Pure water is the best drink in the world, but 
when water lias a bad smell you may be sure it is not fit to 
drink." 

The well was cleaned out at once, and they found dirty 
things which had dropped into it spoiling a well full of 
water. 

The water which comes from rivers through pipes to differ- 
ent houses, towns, and cities sometimes gets impure and makes 
people sick. 

We must drink clean, pure water. 

Tell me about something else you have seen drinking 
water. 

I saw a chicken drinking from a basin. 

I saw a dog drink from a pail. 

My rabbit drinks water from a saucer. 

All animals like to drink water. We must remember to 
place dishes of water where the chickens, birds, cats, and dogs 
can drink. Their bodies need the water just as much as ours. 

Every tree and plant needs water to make it grow. Rain 
keeps the grass green. 

LESSON 4. — OTHER USES OF WATER 

What else is water good for ? 

Water is good to bathe in. 

Water is good to wash clothes in. 

We wash our hands and faces in water. 

It is good to scrub the kitchen floor with. 

I wash my mamma's dishes in water. 

People sometimes get sick from being dirty or living in 
dirty places. No one likes to see dirty people. Let us all 
look at our hands and see if they are just as clean as soap 
and water can make them. 

Stimulate the child's thought by asking how things would 



26 FIRST YEAR 

look if we had no water. Then he will be ready to be im- 
pressed by the fact that — 

We need water to keep ourselves and our clothes clean. 

On your way home notice all the water you can see. It may 
be in a brook, or where some one is watering the lawn, or just 
from a pump. To-morrow you may tell me what you see. 

Forms of Water 

Bring the children into touch with nature in their search for 
beautiful forms of water. Call their attention to the dewdrops 
glistening on the grass blades in all the 
colors of the rainbow. What colors do 
we see there ? Look for the raindrops 
on the spider's web. 

Read Tennyson's Brook to the chil- 
dren. How many have seen a brook ? 
Did it look like the one Tennyson tells 
about ? 

Where does the rain come from ? 
Point out the clouds in the sky. Show 
that they are made of water, by holding 
a slate in front of a boiling teakettle 
and letting the steam condense on its 
cold surface. What becomes of water when it boils away ? 

Who has seen a foggy morning ? What becomes of the fog 
when the sun shines ? Tell the children that fog rises to 
form clouds in the sky. How do the clouds look when it rains ? 
When the sun shines on them ? What colors have you seen in 
the clouds ? 

How does Jack Frost change the rivers and brooks when 
winter comes ? What does he do on the windowpanes ? We 
can imagine we see his long white fingers in the icicles hanging 
from the trees and roof. 




WATER 27 

What do we find on the ground after a storm in winter ? 

What becomes of the snow when summer comes ? Snow 
covers up the grass and flowers and keeps them safe from 
Jack Frost. 

MEMORY POINTS 

Every part of our bodies needs muter. This makes as thirsty. 
A well child wants to drink often because he is growing. 
Tea and coffee are bad for children. 
Water is the best drink for everybody. 
We should drink only pure ivater. 
Without ivater ive coidd not keep clean. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Water an Important Constituent of the Body 

Water exists in all parts of the body, in the hardest structure, 
as in the bones and the enamel of the teeth, and in the fluids, 
some of which, as perspiration, contain little else. — Austin 
Flint, M.D., LL.D., Professor of Physiology in Bellevue Hospitcd 
Medical School. 

The Necessity of Water 

Of all articles used for food or drink, water in some form 
or other is the most indispensable. Men can live longer on 
water without food than on food without water. — Roger S. 
Tracy, M.D. 

The Uses of Water in the Body 

Water dissolves material in the alimentary canal, and carries 
the solutions through its walls into the blood vessels, so that 
they can be conveyed from place to place ; and it permits 
interchanges by enabling the things it has dissolved to soak 
through the walls of the vessels. — H. Newell Martin, M.D., 
F.R.S. 



28 



FIRST YEAR 



CIGAKETTES 
LESSON 5. —WILLIE AND HARRY 

I am going to tell you a story about two little boys. One 
was named Harry. The other was Willie. Harry lived in a 
brown stone house. Willie lived in a red brick house. 

Because they were born the same day, their birthdays 
always came at the same time. When these birthdays came, 




Harry with his father and mother went to Willie's house to 
dinner to celebrate Willie's birthday. Then they all played 
games with Willie and gave him presents. The same day, 
Willie and his father and mother went to Harry's house to 
supper to celebrate Harry's birthday, to play games with him, 
and to give him presents. 

Their mothers always had nice things the boys liked, for the 
birthday dinner and supper. 



CIGARETTES l >( .) 

When they left the table after dinner or supper, each boy's 
Father marked on the wall just how tall the boys were. The 
marks stayed there and showed how much each grew in a 
year. 

They grew fast; they were almost always well. 

When they had had six birthdays, they went to school. 
They began the same day. They went to the same school 
until they had passed the fourth grade. Then Harry went 
into the fifth grade, but Willie could not. 

He was dull in school. 

He did not give attention nor remember what the teacher 
said. 

He was behind his class. 

When his birthday came and he stood up after dinner for 
his father to mark his height, the marks on the wall showed 
that he was not growing so fast as Harry. 

He did not like to play so well as he used to. 

He was often sick. 

He did not try to be good. 

Can you tell me what had happened to Willie ? 

Why was he shorter than his little friend ? Why had he 
fallen behind in his studies ? Why was he often sick ? 

We are all sorry to know that Willie could not keep up 
with Harry in school and that so many other bad things hap- 
pened to him. Willie's father and mother were very sorry 
too. The next time Willie Avas sick, they sent for the doctor. 
That, wise doctor found out what made him sick and dull, 
why he did not like to play, and why he did not grow Avell 
or keep up with his class. 

Willie was smoking cigarettes. A large boy had shown 
him how to smoke. Willie spent for cigarettes the pennies 
his father gave him, and smoked them when his father and 
mother did not know it. 



30 FIRST YEAR 

The doctor told Willie cigarettes are made of tobacco. 
Then he told him what tobacco would do to a boy. Willie's 
mother wrote it down and had it printed in large letters on a 
card. She hung this card over the marks on the wall in the 
dining room, which showed how much Willie and Harry grew 
each year. 

This is what the doctor said and what was printed on the 
card : — 

MEMORY POINTS 

There is tobacco in cigarettes. 

Tobacco will make a boy dull. 

A boy who uses tobacco ivill not give good attention. 

A boy ivho uses tobacco will not remember well. 

A boy ivho uses tobacco will not keep up with his class in school. 

Tobacco will hinder a boy's growth. 

Tobacco will make a boy ill. 

Tobacco will keep a boy from caring for play. 

Tobacco ivill keep a boy from trying to be good. 

A boy should never use tobacco in any form. 

Review this story by asking the class to tell — 

Why Willie did not care to play as he used to. 
Why he did not give good attention. 
Why he did not grow so fast as Harry. 

Some pupil may want to know if Willie stopped smoking 
cigarettes. This will give an opportunity to tell of the diffi- 
culty he had, because tobacco can make those who use it like 
it so much. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

I have found that a boy who smokes becomes morally and 
mentally weaker than those who do not. I have observed that 
boys who are employed in business houses and smoke are often 



GROWTH, HEIGHT, AND WEIGHT 31 

dishonest, and that they never attain the success that non- 
smoking boys do. — Charles Bulkley Hubbel, New York 
Board of Education. 

Cigarette smoking blunts the whole moral nature. It has 
an appalling effect upon the whole system. It stupefies the 
nerves. It sends boys into consumption. It gives them 
enlargement of the heart, and it sends them into the asylum. 
I am a physician to several boys' schools, and I am often 
called to prescribe for palpitation of the heart. In nine cases 
out of ten it is caused by the cigarette habit. — C. A. Clinton, 
jVLD., San Francisco Board of Education. 

Out of thirty-two young men in Xew York City who were 
recently examined for West Point cadetship, only nine were 
accepted as physically sound. Such a note might well make 
the young men of our cities pause for a moment's thought. 
Beer, the cigarette, too much amusement, and the hidden vices 
are making havoc with the physical manhood of all our towns 
and cities. — Journal of the American Medical Association. 



GROWTH, HEIGHT, AND WEIGHT 

LESSON 6. —LIVING THINGS GROW 

The day before this lesson is to be given ask the children 
to find out how tall they are and how much they weigh. They 
might ask an older brother or sister to write the desired in- 
formation on a slip of paper which they can bring to school. 
Xever mind if some slips are lost; the interest of the children 
in the coming lesson will have been awakened. These slips 
may be copied into a chart and kept for reference. Ask some 
boy to bring a tiny maple tree, or a little oak with the acorn 
still fastened to the rootlet. Another may bring a bud and 
flower, or even a little kitten in a basket, if one of the chil- 
dren is its proud possessor. 



32 



FIRST YEAR 



Holding up one of these little trees, begin the lesson with 
the story of — 

Bob and the Cherry Tree 

One day Bob went out into the orchard to see his papa plant 
some little cherry trees which had just come in the express 

wagon. Bob was only rive years 
old and had never seen trees 
planted before. He wondered 
where the expressman got 
them. 

"Papa/' he asked, 
" where did that man get 
these little trees ? " 

"They came on the 
train from the nursery- 
man/' answered his fa- 
ther. " The place where 
little trees are taken care 
of so that they will grow, 
is called a nursery, just 
as rooms where babies are 
cared for as they grow and play are called nurseries." 

Show the class the little oak, with acorn still attached to 
its rootlets, and lead them to compare it with some tall tree 
which they have seen. Then compare the bud with the flower, 
bringing out the thought that trees and plants grow. Next, 
direct their attention to the kitten. TThy is it not so large 
and heavy as the mother cat ? Will it ever be ? How will 
it become large and heavy ? 

Young animals and plants grow. 

Ask all who know, to tell their own height and weight. 
Take some measurements of height by having different chil- 




:r- 



GROWTH, IIKKUIT. AM) WKKiHT 



38 



dren stand against the blackboard, while a line is drawn to 
indicate how tall they are; or have the class compare their 
height with some object in the schoolroom. 




How maiw are 

taller and heavier 

than they were last 

y year ? By questioning, 

lead the children to tell 

how they know that they 

have grown, until some one 

gives the desired answer. 

When children grow, they get taller 
and heavier. 

Paul and Bert 

Paul and Bert were two friends who lived 
across the street from each other. They were just 
the same age, and on their sixth birthday Paul's big 

OR. LESS. IN HY. 3 



34 



FIRST YEAR 



brother measured their height on the gatepost, marking 
it with a pencil. He found the boys were just the same 
height. 

Paul was fond of playing out of doors in the fresh air and 
sunshine. He wanted to be large and strong like his big 
brother, so he ate the oatmeal and bread and milk which his 




mother gave him, without teasing for candy or other sweets. 
He was seldom sick. 

Bert stayed in the house and played with his toys. He did 
not want to eat plain foods, but teased for cake, pie, and candy. 
When he did go out of doors he sometimes took cold and was 
sick because he was not used to it. His mamma said that 
Bert was not very well or strong. 

When the boys were eight years old, they were measured 



GROWTH, HEIGHT, AND WEIGHT 35 

again, but they were not the same height this time. Which 
do you suppose was the taller ? 

We must try to keep well and strong if we want to grow 
fast. Ask the class to name some things which help children 
in their growth. From the story they may be able to state at 
once a few of the essentials. If not, question them about the 
story. 

Write at one side of the board in large letters : — 

Some Things which help to make us Grow 

Sketch below this a loaf of bread, an oatmeal dish with a 
spoon in it, and a glass labeled "milk." This will aid in 
obtaining from the children the following statement, which 
should be written under the picture : — 

GOOD FOOD HELPS TO MAKE US GROW 

Draw on the board the picture of a boy working or playing, 
and beside it a child resting or asleep, or show the children 
such pictures, obtaining from the class by questions the state- 
ment : — 

We need to work, to play, and to rest if we want to grow 
well. 

Ask about their bedtime, and help the mothers by explain- 
ing to the children that little people who are growing need 
much more sleep than grown people, so they should be glad 
to go to bed early in order to grow fast and become stronger 
and heavier each year. 

Some Things which hurt our Growth 

Call attention to the appearance of grass which has been 
covered by a board for some time. How do plants look when 
they are first brought up from the cellar in spring ? Why do 
the grass under the board and the plants in the cellar change 



36 FIRST YEAR 

their color ? They have had food from the earth and water to 
drink. Why are they not strong and green like plants which 
are out in the air and sunshine ? 

Plants cannot grow well without fresh air and sunshine. 

Can you think of anything which may hurt the growth of 
little boys and girls ? 

Bad air may hurt the growth. 

Lack of sunshine makes people look sickly. 

Improve this opportunity to impress upon the little people 
the healthf ulness of out-of-door sports, and especially the 
benefit of playing in sunshine. Teach also by example and 
precept such principles of ventilation as the pupils will be 
able to apply at home. Watch the condition of the air in the 
schoolroom, being careful to keep it pure. 

Why Eddie stopped Growing 

Eddie was a little boy who lived in Illinois. He was a 
pretty little fellow, with bright brown eyes and pleasant man- 
ners. He always lifted his hat when he met his teacher, but 
although he learned his lessons quite well when he began 
school in the first grade, before the year's work was done he 
was far behind the other children, and in June could not pass 
into the second grade. He had not grown much besides. 
His teacher felt sorry and wondered what was the matter. 

One day she found something in his pocket which looked 
like this (sketching a cigarette on the board). It was of a 
dirty white color and had something rolled up inside of it 
which did not smell good. Who knows what it was ? 

A cigarette. 

Yes, that was it. Eddie had been smoking cigarettes for 
several months. Then his teacher knew why he could not 
pass into the second grade, for there is a poison in cigarettes 



GROWTH, HEIGHT, AND WEIGHT 37 

which makes the boy who smokes them dull and stupid. She 
also knew why he had not grown like other boys. She told 
him how he was dulling his brain and hurting his body, so 
that he could not grow well, and he promised not to smoke 
any more. But one of the most dreadful things about ciga- 
rettes is that boys who smoke them are likely to break their 
promises. Another bad thing is, that the boy who smokes a 
few wants to smoke more. Eddie broke his promise because 
he had smoked so long he could not stop, — or thought he 
could not, — and when his teacher saw him again four years 
afterward, he was still very small and was only in the third 
grade in school. 

MEMORY POINTS 

Young plants and animals grow. 

Children become taller and heavier when they groiv. 

11 V must keep well if we want to grow fast. 

Wholesome food helps us grow. 

We grow when we work, play, and rest. 

We need fresh air and sunshine. 

Children who smoke cigarettes are likely to be small and sickly. 



EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

The teachings of elementary physiology indicate the neces- 
sity for the growing child of continuous exercise out of doors 
and pure air in school, a larger allowance of sleep than is 
necessary for the adult, and pure air in the sleeping room. — 
London Lancet' 

Tobacco interferes with and impairs general development, 
physically and mentally, probably by retarding progressive 
cell changes and impairing nutrition. — British Medical and 
Surgical Journal. 



38 



FIRST YEAR 



FOOD AXD REST 



LESSON 7. —WHY WE NEED FOOD 



The wise teacher will have her food lesson after, not before, 

a meal. Talking about food on an empty stomach puts a 

severe strain on the self-control and amiability of the class. 

Take a box of strawberries, or some other article of food, to 

school, placing it out of sight in the desk. 

Intimate to the class that you are going to talk about what 
Ave have every day, and the child who guesses first may have 
some. 

I was in Mildred's home the other day, and saw something 
that pleased me very much. 
It was about as long as this. 

It was kept in a basket when I saw it. What do you think 
it was ? No, it was not a kitty nor a dog nor a doll. Mildred 

loves it better than all the dolls in 
^/j _ the world. She would not exchange 

it for a whole toy shop full of dolls. 

Yes, it is a baby, Mildred's dear 
sister Helen. 

Lucy: "I saw Mildred's Helen 
when she was no bigger than a doll. 
Her hands were just as wee ! She 
is bigger now." 

Why is Helen bigger now? 
Kate : " She is older." 
Lucy : " She has grown." 
Name something else that grows. 

Dogs, cats, birds, flowers, grass, trees, hair, nails, may be 
mentioned. 

If we should take Helen and put her in a room by herself 
and leave her there for a week, what would probably happen ? 




m**$ 



FOOD AND UKST 



39 



Roger : u She would cry." 

Faith: "I think she'd die, because she would have nothing 
to eat." 

AY hat does a baby need? 

It needs food. 

What else needs food ? 

After a little the children will grasp the thought that every- 
thing alive needs food. 

If Helen- had just enough food to keep her alive, would that 
be all she needs ? 

Children state that she would not be happy, she would cry, 
would not be fat, would 
be pale. 

Food insures growth. 



What else needs food 
for growth ? 

The pet kitty must 
have her milk regularly. 

The dog needs his 
meals as regularly as 
we do. 

The canary in his cage, and all other pets, must be cared for. 

The plants must be watered regularly. God sends sunshine 
and moisture to the grass, trees, and flowers. The trees suck 
up juice from the soil with their roots. 

What will mother do when winter comes, to keep Helen 
from getting cold ? 

Mildred : " She will have a fire in the nursery, and put 
thicker dresses on her." 

That is one of the ways to keep warm. 

Refer to the wadded cover mamma puts over the tea or coffee 
pot, at the table, and point out that the cover keeps the heat 
from coming out of the pot. 




40 



FIRST YEAR 



So our clothes keep the heat from leaving the body too 
rapidly. 

Show that some kinds of clothing let the heat out more 
readily than others, hence the reason for wearing woolen in 

winter and cotton in summer. 
In very cold countries peo- 
ple must eat more to keep 
them warm. 

Agoonack, the ' little Es- 
kimo in Seven Sisters, must 
eat much fat to keep her 
warm. Perhaps she would 
enjoy a tallow candle more 
than a stick of candy. 
Why do we need food? 
To keep us alive. 
To make us grow. 
To keep us warm. 

There is another reason. 
Harold, why did your 
mamma throw away her 
rubbers and your rubber 
boots ? 

Harold: " Because they were all worn out. The heels were 
out in her rubbers, and my boots had a lot of holes in them." 

Daisy : " My school sack is worn out. It isn't good enough 
for any one to wear." 

Everything wears out sooner or later. Our bodies do the 
same thing, for every minute little parts of us wear out, and 
if new parts are not put in very quickly, we grow thin and ill. 
What do you suppose keeps our bodies from wearing out ? 
Here is a new point to add to our knowledge. 

We need food to keep the body from wearing out. 




FOOD AND KEST 41 

LESSON 8. — THE KIND OF FOOD WE NEED 

After we take a bath how does the water look ? 

It looks dirty. 

When we wash ourselves, rubbing hard, what comes off? 

Harold: " Mamma calls it dead skin." 

Yes, parts of us are wearing out all the time. These must 
be built up as fast as they wear out, or we shall be ill. 

When any part of your house grows old and leaks, what does 
father do ? 

He mends it. 

So we have to keep our bodies mended, or they will not grow. 
We do not mend them as we do our clothes or china when it is 
broken. 

AYhen we feel hungry we eat, and our food builds up again 
the worn-out parts of our bodies. It does this just as rain 
makes the flowers grow. 

I once saw a baby that was very ill and thin and cried all 
the time. The mother told me they could not find any food 
the baby could eat. Poor sick baby ! Its little body was 
wearing out fast, because they did not know how to mend the 
worn-out parts. We need food which will make the body grow 
and keep it mended. 

Kitty sat up very late last night. Mamma had company 
who were anxious to see the little girl. 

This morning Kitty is sleepy. She does not feel like work- 
ing, and she cried because she did not get her number lesson 
done in time. 

What is the matter ? 

Walter: "She didn't have sleep enough." 

Roger : " Perhaps she ate her supper too late." 

That must be it. Our bodies need to rest. We must not 
keep them working all the time. Do you remember the pop- 
gun your uncle brought you from New York, Willie ? 



42 



FIRST YEAR 



Willie: "Yes, indeed. It didn't last a week. I played 
with it every spare minute. Mother said I wore it all out." 

Our bodies need rest or they will 
not grow well. 
.^. Is it a good plan to eat be- 

tween meals half a dozen times 
a day ? 

Poor stomach, how hard 
it has to work if we eat 
so often ! By and by it 
will get out of order. 

If our bodies are to 
grow, if our food is to do 
us any good, we must rest 
as well as work. 

We must sleep well at night. 
TVe must not eat anything 
that will make our stomachs 
^ work too hard. 

Is it well to ride one's bicycle 
too long at a time ? 
Shall we sit up late at night ? 
Shall we j ump rope or roll hoop long at a time ? 
Shall we eat too much and too often ? 




■-^F 



MEMORY POINTS 

Food keeps us alive and makes us grow. 

It helps to keep us warm. 

It keeps the body from wearing out. 

We must not eat between meals. 

Our bodies must have time to rest. 

Children need a great deal of sleep. 



THE APPLE 43 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 
Food repairs the Body 

The only way we can repair the waste of the body is by the 
process of eating. — Journal of Hygiene. 

Make the bodily income as large as possible by the best food 
in the right proportions, by good air, appropriate rest, and 
restraint over evil habits which squander the bodily resources. 
— M. L. Holbrook, M.D. 

Food for School Children 

Breakfast should consist chiefly of porridge and milk, brown 
bread should be substituted for white, and tea and alcohol 
should be banished. — London Lancet. 

Alcohol is not a Food 

Alcohol is neither directly nor indirectly a food. Its habit- 
ual use impairs not only the resisting but the recuperative 
power of the system. — H. D. Did am a, M.D. 



THE APPLE 
LESSON 9 —A NATURE STUDY 

Select a large, handsome, ripe apple to use in this lesson. 
If possible have an apple in the hand of each child. 

Question and help the children to tell the shape of their 
apples, the color. Dwell upon the beauty of the apple, asking 
all who think that rosy-red apples or yellow apples are pretty 
to raise their hands. 



44 



FIRST YEAR 



Potatoes grow in the ground. How many ever saw potatoes 
dug ? Where do apples grow ? Do all kinds of trees have 
^ apples growing on them ? 

Help the children to name the 
common trees of their own local- 
ity and describe the fruit of each. 
Teacher: "I have here an 
apple. What color is it ? " 
It is green. 

Teacher: " Come here, Roy, and press this green apple 
with your finger. Tell us whether it is hard or soft." 
It is hard and green because it is not ripe. 





Teacher: "Is it good to eat?" Almost every child will be 
able to tell from experience that green, unripe apples may 
make us sick if we eat them, that they are not good to eat. 

Teacher : " When are apples good to eat ? " 

Apples are good to eat when they are ripe. 

Question about cooked apples, leading the children to tell 
that baked or stewed apples, or ripe uncooked apples are good 



THE APPLE 45 

to eat. Appeal to the sense of gratitude in the child for the 
beautiful apples which taste good and which all like. 

Teacher: " Will ripe apples keep good always?" Hold up 
a good apple and another which is decayed. Cut both in sec- 
tions and pass them, calling attention to the difference in color 
and odor. Explain that rotten or decayed apples are not fit 
to eat. They would make us ill. 

Teacher : " What is inside of our apples ? " Before you 
answer, I will tell you a story about — 

Tom and his Ball 

A little boy whose name was Tom had a large rubber ball 
that he kicked with his feet, and a small one that bounded 
back when he threw it. One rainy day he was playing in the 
house. All at once his mother heard him crying and went to 
see what was the matter. There Tom sat, in tears, with his 
knife in his hand and both balls in bits on the floor. 

•• What is the matter, Tom ? n his mother asked. 

"I cut the balls open to find what was inside of them, and 
there isn't anything there/ 5 sobbed Tom. 

Teacher : " If we should cut open our apples, should we find 
anything in them ? What is inside the skin of an apple ? " 

Question until the children name the core of the apple, the 
seeds, the pulp, and the juice. 

Teacher: " How do you suppose the apple will keep longer, 
— whole, or after it has been cut open ? " 

" Yes, the apple spoils very soon after the skin is broken. 
Men sometimes crush apples and press out their juice : Do you 
know what they call such pressed-out juice ? " 

" You said the crushed apple would spoil quicker than the 
whole one. How many think the pressed-out apple juice, 
or cider, will keep good as long as the juice in the whole 
apple ? " 

Show the class apples which have been crushed several hours 



46 FIRST YEAR 

before, and ask them to notice the color. Lead them to see 
that both the crushed apple and its juice are growing to look 
like the rotten apple. Teach them that this is because — 

Apple juice soon changes after it is pressed out of the 
apple. 

It is not like the good sweet juice in the apple. This is 
because a poison called alcohol forms in apple juice after it is 
made into cider. 

A little alcohol may make us want more. 

Care should be taken not to exaggerate the truth. Empha- 
size the fact that the danger in cider lies in the power of the 
alcohol it contains to make one want more and more until he 
has taken enough to hurt him, and is perhaps unable to let it 
alone. 

Teacher: "I will not drink cider, because there is alcohol 
in it. If you think I am right, raise your hands." 

There are three things about cider that make it a very bad 
drink. We have learned one of these : — 

There is alcohol in cider, and alcohol is a poison. 

The second bad thing about cider is this : — 

The alcohol in cider can make one who drinks it want more. 

Poor Horace 

When the juice of apples is first pressed out, and people 
think there is no alcohol in it, they call it sweet cider. 

Many years ago there lived in a pleasant country town a 
boy whose name was Horace. His father had a large apple 
orchard, and in the autumn many of the apples were taken to 
a mill to be made into cider. 

Horace began to drink cider when he was a little boy, and 
soon became very fond of it. At first he drank only what was 



THE APPLE 47 

called sweet eider, but after a time, the stronger it was, the 
better he liked it, and he wanted it every day. When he was 
a big boy, he wanted something stronger, and often went to a 
store in the village where he drank whisky and rum. Before 
he was twenty years old he became a drunkard. He began 
this bad life by drinking what he called sweet cider. He 
thought it would not hurt him any more than the apples did. 
Why is it that ripe apples are good to eat, while cider made 
from their juice is a bad drink ? 

The third bad thing about cider is this : — 

The alcohol in cider can make one say bad words and do 
bad things. 

I ought not to drink cider, and you ought not, because there 
is alcohol in it. 

Some child will doubtless ask if sweet cider is not good. 
Then will be the time for the teacher to tell the class that 
alcohol ordinarily forms in cider in about six hours after it is 
pressed out, and if they never drink any cider they will never 
become cider drunkards. 

MEMORY POINTS 

Ripe apples are good to eat. 

Apple juice soon changes after it is pressed oat of the apple. 

It is not so sweet as before. 

Its color is different. 

It is no longer safe to drink. 

Alcohol forms in pressed-out apple juice. 

Alcohol is a poison. 

A poison has the power to do us harm. 

The alcohol in cider may hurt us. 

It may make us want more. 

It may make us say bad icorcls and do bad things. 

We must not drink cider. 



48 



FIRST YEAR 



APPLE SONG. 




i. One, two, three,one, two,three,Come now to 

2. One, two, three,one, two,three, Come now to 

3. We may eat ap-ples sweet, Give them to 



the ap - pie tree ; 
the ap - pie tree ; 
the friends we meet ; 



2*2 



4:E 



-I — 

-v- 




yf y J 

Here we go, in a row, Where the nice red ap - pies grow. 

All a-round, they are found, Ly - ing thick - ly on the ground. 

Pick them now from the bough, We will glad - ly show you how. 



^P* 



=t 



=*= 




H- 



-+- 



/ 



^ • V V V 

Now we're stand - ing by a tree, And the fruit so 
Here the small de - caved ones lie, And we quick - ly 



But 



of 



ci - der take we none, This bad drink let 



£=q 



^ 



r- 



Cho. Now we're march-ing all 

-1- 



jEt-V 



a - round, Where the 

i* -4 1 



ap - pies 



i=i 



P= 



15 



1 

fair we see, One,two,three,one,two,three,Pick them from the tree, 
pass them by, One,two,three,one,two,three,Pick them from the tree. 
chil-dren shun,Ono,two,three,one,two,three,Pick them from the tree. 



9* 



7JL 



-v- 



£=ei 



nice are found,As we go in a row, Sing - ing joy - ful - ly. 
Music used by permission of Oliver Ditson Company, owners of the copyright. 



THE APPLE 49 

Suggestions for Motions to accompany the Song 

The children rise, and as they sing, march to the music till 
they come to the words, " Now we're standing by a tree M ; 
they then stand still, and as they sing, " One, two, three/' 
etc., they raise both hands as high as possible, allowing them 
to fall again with the rhythm of the music, and continuing 
the motion to the end of the stanza. 

The music for the chorus is the same as the last four lines 
of each stanza. The chorus may be omitted at the option of 
the teacher. This is designed for a marching song, and if it 
is desired that the pupils march around the room before sing- 
ing the second stanza, the chorus may be repeated as many 
times as required. 

In singing the second stanza, the children march as in the 
first, till they come to the end of line beginning, "Come now," 
etc., when they stop, and look downward, continuing to sing, 
"All around," etc., at the same time dropping and lifting the 
hands with a downward movement, to the end of the sixth line, 
then resume the motion of gathering the fruit as in first stanza. 

In the third stanza, as the first line is sung, hands may be 
passed to the mouth, repeating to end of first line. 

Through the second line the hands may be thrown out with 
extended palm, and drawn back as the words are sung, " Give 
them," etc., to end of second line. The motions in the third 
and fourth lines are the same as in the last line of the first 
stanza. When the words " none " and " shun " are sung, 
the right hand is thrown out as though throwing something 
away. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Cider can Intoxicate 

AYhen the juice of apples is pressed out and exposed to the 
air, ferments from the surface of the fruit and ferments float- 

OR. LESS. IX HY. 4 



50 FIRST YEAR 

ing in the dust of the air reach it and break up its sugar into 

carbon dioxide and alcohol ; the result is cider, an intoxicating 

liquor. — H. Newell Martin, M.D., F.B.S., Johns Hopkins 

University. 

Alcohol in Cider 

Dr. S. Dana Hayes, State Assayer of Massachusetts, says 
hard cider has as much as ten and one half per cent alcohol. 

Alcohol a Poison 

Alcohol is a virulent poison, and as such, should be placed 
in the list with arsenic, mercury, and other dangerous drugs. 
— Alfred Carpenter, M.D., Examiner of Public Health in the 
University of London, President of the Council of the British 
Medical Association. 



THE BODY AS A WHOLE 
LESSON 10. — OUR LIKENESS TO TREES 

Bessie and Philip went out to walk one day with Aunt 
Bertha. It had been dull, rainy weather for nearly a week, 
but now the sun had come out, and the sky was blue once 
more. 

The children were glad as kittens, and they skipped and 
played along the road, very much like our little four-footed 
friends. 

" I want to stop and look at the oaks," said Aunt Bertha. 
So they turned up a side path, which wound up a hill where 
the trees stood. 

" This is my tree," cried Philip, running and putting his 
arms about it. 

Do you know the name of the part that he clasped in his 
arms? 



THE 1JODV AS A WiiOLK 



51 



Roger: "It must have been the trunk. He couldn't get 
hold of the branches unless he were very tall." 

It was the trunk, and it was so large even Aunt Bertha's 
hands could not meet when she tried to clasp it. 

The children ran about, trying to rind trees they could 
entirely clasp with their arms. 
They found only one or two, 
for these were old oaks, 
and very large. 

Suddenly a bird sang 
over their heads. They 
tried to see it. "Where do 
you think it was ? 

Mildred : " Up in the 
leaves." 

What 



'row on 



do the leaves 



"On the 




Mildred 

branches." 

It was like looking up 
into a cool green bower. 
They could hear the bird's 
sweet note, and by and by he 
flew out and perched upon a lower 
limb. Bessie laughed, and the bird 
flew away. 

"He must have a nest up there somewhere/' said Philip. 

"No doubt there are many nests in that tree," said Aunt 
Bertha. "The oak is a kind old tree. It shelters many little 
bird families." 

" Here are some violet leaves," said Philip. 

" There must have been hundreds of violets here a month ago." 

" Do you know what the oak did last fall to help the vio- 
lets ? " Aunt Bertha asked. 



52 FIRST YEAR 

" It dropped its leaves down to make a warm blanket/' said 
Philip. 

" The oak gives us acorns/' said Bessie. " Papa made me a 
set of dishes out of acorns and acorn cups." 

Can you think of any other good the oak does ? 

" It is a shady tree. When we are out walking and get hot 
we sit down and rest. I like the oak/' said Bessie. " I wish 
I were a tree." 

A growing tree is a beautiful thing, but a growing child is 
even better. We are not unlike trees in some ways. What 
part did you clasp, Philip ? 

" I clasped the trunk." 

Each of you has a trunk. Show where it is. 

Bessie threw her arms about her brother Philip, and gave 
him a big hug under his arms, saying : — 

" This part is the trunk." 

What is above and below the trunk ? 

Philip thought a moment, then said, "My head is at the 
top, and my legs are at the bottom." 

Do we have branches, like trees ? 

" Oh, yes, we do," said Bessie. " Our arms are the branches. 
What are our legs, Auntie ? " 

" There is another name for branches," said Aunt Bertha. 

" Oh, I know — limbs. I tore my red and white dress on 
the limb of the old pear tree." 

Yes, our arms and legs are our limbs. 

Which are the upper limbs ? 

" Our arms must be our upper limbs, because they are higher 
up," said Philip. 

"Then our legs would be the lower limbs," said Bessie. 

" Trees haven't lower limbs," said Bessie, gazing at the old oak. 

Why doesn't a tree blow over in a storm ? 

" Oh, I know," cried Philip, " the roots hold them fast. I 
guess the roots are as good feet as the tree can have," 



THE BODY AS A WHOLE 53 

Can you tell the parts of a tree ? 

Philip : " Trunk, limbs, roots, — yes, and leaves." 

What are the parts of the body ? Begin at the top. 

Philip : " Head, trunk, limbs; the upper limbs are my arms; 

my legs are my lower limbs." 

Bessie: "Our fingers are the leaves, are they not ?" 

" We can call them so," said Aunt Bertha. " I saw some 

verses the other day that I think will please you." 

The Maple's Fingers 

" ' Green leaves, what are you doing, 
Up there on the tree so high ? ' 
« We are shaking hands with the breezes, 
As they go singing by.' 

" * What — green leaves, have you fingers ? ' 
Then the maple laughed with glee, 
* Yes, just as many as you have, 
Count them, and you will see.' " 

"I like that," said Bessie; "but I didn't think trees were 
so much like people. I will tell mamma it when I get home." 

" Aunt Bertha," said Philip, " we are going to have lessons 
about our bodies next term. Herbert has them and he told me 
about it. His teacher told them about the trunk and the 
limbs. I like this way better." 

Aunt Bertha : " You must try to remember what we have 
found out so you can tell your teacher. When we get home 
I'll ask you again to tell me the parts of the body." 

" I hate to leave the oak," said Bessie, " it is so beautiful 
and so kind. Good-by, old oak, take care of the birds, and 
give me some more cups and saucers next fall." 

"Good-by," cried Philip, "be getting your blankets ready 
for the flowers." 

"Now we will go down to the brook," said Aunt Bertha, 
and the children skipped merrily away. 



54 



FIRST YEAR 



MEMORY POINTS 



The parts of a tree are the trunk, limbs, roots, and leaves. 
The parts of the body are the head, trunk, and limbs. 
The arms, hands, and fingers are our upper limbs. 
The legs, feet, and toes are our lower limbs. 



THE HEAD 

Nature seems to have designed the head as the cupola to the most 
glorious of her works. — Addison. 



LESSON 11. — PARTS OF THE HEAD 




Sir Joshua Reynolds. 



Hold up in sight of 
the class a copy of Sir 
Joshua Reynolds's " An- 
gels' Heads. " 

There was once a 
painter who was very 
fond of children. 

He had no little boys 
or girls of his own, but 
he was so gentle and 
jolly that he made 
friends of all he met, 
even the beggar children 
in the street. 

Sometimes he would 
take them into his studio 
and paint their pictures. 

Nobody else could 
paint children so well as 
he. 



THE HEAD 



55 



One day a little friend of his was taken sick and had to 
spend his birthday away from home, so Sir Joshua Reynolds, 
for that was this good painter's name, went to see him. 




" Xever mind/' he said; " if you can't go home, I'll paint 
your picture and send that to your father instead." 

Little Frances Gordon was one of his favorites, and he 
painted these five heads from hers, in different position s, so 
they are all pictures of one little girl. They are called angels' 
heads, but we like also to think of them as pictures of a real 



56 FIRST YEAR 

live little girl who had a beautiful face and head, and who took 
the right care of them. 

Look at her picture while we talk about it, and we'll see if 
we can hnd some of the reasons why it is beautiful. Then we 
shall know how to treat our own heads properly. 

You may stand and put your hands on your heads. What 
does the head feel like ? 

My head feels hard. 

My head feels round — something like a ball. 

Our heads feel hard because there is a layer of bone just 
underneath the skin. Some clay we shall learn what is inside 
this bony covering, but now we need to remember only that 
the outside is made hard and strong to protect the parts 
within which are very soft and delicate. 

We must know the names of the different parts, or Ave can- 
not talk about them. How many can you name from the pic- 
ture ? 

Call upon one of the most self-possessed girls or boys to 
stand before the others while they look to see whether he or 
she has features and parts of the head corresponding to those 
of the child in the picture. Give the class the name of any 
part unfamiliar to them. 

Suppose we rise and find the parts of our own heads. You 
may point them out while I name them, and all who get them 
right may stand here with me and give the names for the rest 
to find. 

Point to the front of the head, the back, the right side, left 
side, crown, left ear, the hair, the right ear. 

When all can do this quickly, ask different ones to point to 
these parts in the pictured heads and in the pictures of other 
people or of animals which hang in the room or are found in their 
storybooks. 

If a live dog or kitten can be brought into the class for the 
same purpose, so much the better. 



THE HEAD 57 



LESSON 12. — CARE OF THE HEAD 

Put your hands on the tops of your heads. What sort of a 
covering do you find there ? 

We all have the same thing, but the color is different, 
Tell me how many different colors of hair you can see. 
Why do we have hair on our heads? 

Our hair keeps us from taking cold. 

The hair on our heads makes us look better. 

Look at this picture of the •• Angels' Heads" and tell me 
what kind of hair little Frances Gordon had. 

Question and suggest until the children notice that her hair 
looks soft and silky. 

This morning I saw some hens and chickens by the roadside. 
Every now and then one of them would stoop to smooth her 
feathers and press with her bill the ends where they were 
fastened to her body. I will tell you why they did this. 
There is a tiny bag of oil at the roots of their feathers, and 
when this is pressed a little of the oil runs out into the feather 
and makes it smooth and glossy. 

There are little bags of oil at the roots of our hair. How 
shall we get this out to make our hair soft and smooth ? 

The painful experiences with brush and comb through which 
many children pass will suggest the right answer, and by giv- 
ing them a reason for its necessity help to make them more 
patient during the process of having the hair brushed. 

What else does the hair need to keep it in good condition ? 

The hair needs to be kept clean. 

The skin at the roots of the hair is apt to dry and form in 
little scales which we call dandruff. We need to brush our 
hair and wash our heads often to get rid of this dry, dead skin, 
so our hair will grow nicely. 



58 



FIRST YEAR 



Sometimes the hair splits at the ends and grows brittle and 
rough to the touch. This shows it has not been well taken 
care of. When it is in this condition we need to have some 
one cut off the ends with the scissors. Then we must take 
extra pains to keep it clean and well brushed until it grows 
soft again. 

What Cigarettes may do to the Head 

"What a bright boy Nat Taylor is!" Mrs. Eason used to 
say to her husband. " It does me good to see him go by the 

house. He's always whistling or sing- 
ing away to himself as if he were 
too happy to keep still. There 
,, he comes now on his way to 

school. He is not the boy to 
- ; be late. His teacher says he 

is never tardy or absent, and 
it is really wonderful how fast 
I he learns." 

|£« ,! Just then Nat appeared 

round the corner, whistling 
j E gr as usual. He had a package 

in one hand to leave at the 
express office for his mother, 
and a big bunch of strawberries 
— in the other. 

" What are you going to do with 
your berries, Nat ? " asked Mrs. Eason. 
" Oh, they're for Auntie Clapp," said 
" She said she'd almost forgotten how 
strawberries taste, so, when I found these in the pasture this 
morning, while I was after the cow, I thought I'd bring them 
along to remind her." 

" Isn't that just like the boy?" Mrs. Eason continued, after 




Nat Avith a chuckle. 



THE HKA1) 59 

Kat was out of sight. "He's always thinking of some one 
else." 

One morning Nat didn't go to school. He was sick and had 
to lie in bed, and everybody missed him. Some of the boys 
came to find out what the matter was, but he felt too miserable 
to see them. 

It was a day or two before he was well again, and then he 
wasn't quite his old self. By and by people began to ask, 
" What has happened to Nat ? He doesn't whistle so much 
as he used to." Everybody thought he would be himself again 
soon, but he grew stranger and stranger. 

He neglected to do errands for his mother, even when she 
told him two or three times over. He said he forgot, although 
he used to pride himself on his good memory. His teacher 
noticed the difference in school, and asked Mrs. Taylor if Nat 
were sick. 

"Almost every day he seems dull and stupid a good part of 
the time. Yesterday he went to sleep twice in class, some- 
thing I never knew him to do before. I can't make out what 
the trouble is." 

Mrs. Taylor looked anxious. She called Nat, and asked him 
if he felt well. He said he did, but he hung his head and 
looked as if he had been caught in some mischief. Something 
was wrong with Nat. 

That night his mother found out what it was. 

" There's a hole in the knee of my trousers," Nat said when 
he bade them all good night. " Will you mend it, mother, so 
that I can have them to put on in the morning ? " 

Mrs. Taylor repaired the torn place and looked to see if 
there were any other holes. " There is sure to be one in the 
pocket," she thought. 

There was no hole there, for a wonder, but she found some- 
thing else which made what Nat called the sorry look come 
into her eves. 



60 FIRST YEAR 

Can you guess what it was ? 

A cigarette. She knew now what had made Nat sick, why 
he forgot to do her errands, and why he wanted to sleep in 
school. He had been learning to smoke. 

When Nat came down in the morning, Mrs. Taylor said, 
" Did you know there had been a thief in the house ? " 

"Why, no," exclaimed Nat, with wide-open eyes. "Did he 
steal anything ? " 

"Yes, he has been stealing my boy's health and his good 
spirits, and his memory, and leaving quite a different kind of 
boy in his place. Here he is/' said Mrs. Taylor, holding up 
the cigarette. " What shall we do with him ? " 

Nat started to laugh, but he stopped when he saw his mother's 
face, and they had a long talk. 

When it ended, he said, Avith a smile : — 

" Well, mother, I don't believe we want any thieves in our 
house." 

Mrs. Taylor did not find any more cigarettes in Nat's pocket, 
for he kept his breath sweet and his head clear by not smoking 
again. 

Tobacco steals — 

Our health Our strength 

Our good looks Our memory. 

Our liking for play 

MEMORY POINTS 

The parts of the head are the face, back, crown, sides, hair, 
and ears. 

We must keep the head clean. 

The hair needs to be brushed every day. 

Cigarettes hurt the head. 

They ivill spoil our health, our good looks, our liking for play, 
our strength, our memory. 



THE FACE 61 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Alcohol stunts Growth 

There is no better way of interfering with the growth and 
development of body and mind in lads and lassies than by 
giving them alcoholic liquors. — Medical Pioneer. 

Tobacco prevents Development 

Smoking prevents healthy nutrition of the structures of the 
body. Hence result, especially in young persons, an arrest of 
the growth of the body, low stature, and weak bodily powers. 
— J. Copelaxd, M.D., F.E.S. 

THE FACE 
LESSON 13. — GENERAL SHAPE 

Begix the lesson with some motion song which ends in 
hiding the face. Waken the children by telling them that 
now you wish to see their faces. Ask one of them to come to 
the front of the room and turn his back to the school, select- 
ing a child with an oval face. Ask the class Iioav much of 
Johnny they can see. 

We can see the back of his head, his hair, his back, arms, 
and legs. 

Turn the boy around, facing the school, and ask again what 
the children see. 

Select for emphasis the answer : — 

We can see his face. 

Call another child to the front of the room, and ask him to 
trace with his finger the outline of Johnny's face. 

Where is Johnny's face the widest ? Where is it the nar- 
rowest ? Where is it the longest ? Name some object which 
is shaped like a boy's face. Name a fruit oval in shape. 



62 



FIRST YEAR 




Some child thinks of the egg, while the pear is quickly 
recalled as the egg-shaped fruit. 

Provide each pupil with drawing paper and pencil. 
Teacher: " Look sharply at Johnny's face and draw the 
outline on your papers. Remember where it is widest and 
where it is narrowest." 

Teacher : " Do your pictures look like 
a boy's face ? " 

" Mine looks like an egg" volunteers 
Fred. 

What do your drawings need to make 
them look more like the picture of a 
boy's face ? (The teacher rapidly draws 
a vertical oval on the board to correspond 
with those drawn by the children.) 

" My picture ought to have some eyes," 
suggests Harry, eyes being the most prominent feature of the 
face to him. 

Very well, let us put some eyes in our pictures. Look 
at Johnny's face and put the eyes in the right place. (The 
teacher makes dots in the oval on the 
board to represent eyes.) 

Does our picture look like a face 
now ? The children suggest one after 
another of the additions necessary in 
order to represent the features of the 
face, — nose, mouth, and lastly, perhaps, 
eyebrows and eyelashes. 

Suggest to the children by lines 
which you draw in the picture on the 
board, how the different features should 
be represented. 

Then ask them to put these into their own drawings. 
The picture when completed looks something like this : — 




THE FACE 



(53 



An Exercise in Ovals 

Tell the following story as a recreation exercise, illustrating 
it on the board. Let the children follow your drawings with 
pencils and paper. 

Johnny's old hen wanted to sit. His mamma told him 
that he might go to the neighbor's and buy some eggs to put 
under her, and then by and by he 
would have some nice chicks. 

Johnny took the basket and 
some money and went to the 
neighbor's. The lady filled the 
basket with eggs. They looked 
like this : — 




But she did not take Johnny's money ; she gave him the 
eggs. He thanked her and was 
very glad; he looked like this : — 

On the way home he wondered 
if his mamma would like it, be- 
cause* he let the lady give him 
the eggs. He was as sober as 
this : — 





At the gate he stubbed his toe 
and fell, basket and all. He 
thought all the eggs were broken. 

Johnny found three good eggs 
which were not broken. He picked 
them up, put them into his basket, 



64 



FIRST YEAR 



and went into the house to tell his mother what had happened. 
She was sorry he had broken the eggs, for she wanted the 
old hen to have a nice brood of chickens. However, she told 
him to put the three eggs into the nest, and in three weeks there 
were three little chicks peeping from the shell, like this : — 




LESSON 14. —A GUESSING GAME 



Some one child is sent from the room while the class decide 
which feature of the face they will select. 

The guesser is then recalled to the room and asked to indicate 
by pointing to his own face what feature he thinks they have 
in mind. 

Child enters. 

Joe, we are thinking of some part of your face ; you may 
point to the part we are thinking of. 

Joe points to his cheeks. 

Class: "We are not thinking of your cheeks." 

Joe points to his chin. 

Class: "We are not thinking of your chin." 

He points to his eyebrows. 

Class: "We are not thinking of your eyebrows." 

Joe points to his lips. 

Class: "We are thinking of your mouth." 

Continue the exercise until the children have named and 
located all the features from brows to chin. 

After the names of all the parts are familiar to the children 



THE FACE 65 

the teacher draws from the class, as far as possible, the 
uses of the different features. 

The little ones readily tell why we need eyes, nose, and 
mouth, but are not so sure about the need of eyebrows and 
eyelashes. 

Suppose the day were very hot and you should run fast, what 
would there be on your foreheads and faces ? 

Water would run down our faces. Our foreheads would be 
all perspiration. Our faces would be red and wet. 

Does the perspiration from your foreheads often run into 
your eyes ? Why doesn't it ? 

Lead the pupils to understand the use of the eyebrows. 

The eyebrows make the face look prettier and keep the 
perspiration from running into the eyes. 

What do you do to keep the snow out of your eyes when 
you have to face a driving snowstorm ? 

I almost shut my eyes. 

I just peep through the lashes. 

The snow would hurt our eyes. We could not see in a storm. 
The eyelashes act as a screen to keep out snow or dust. 

The lashes also make a little curtain to shut out some of the 
light, when it is so strong that it may hurt the eyes. 

Now that we have found out about the parts of the face, tell 
me what kind of faces we like best to see. 

The answers are varied — pretty faces, bright faces, and 
sweet faces, until some one. perhaps from a memorable experi- 
ence, exclaims, "clean faces. " 

We cannot all have pretty faces, but each of us can have 
a sweet, clean face, and people like to see clean faces. There 
was once a little boy who wasn't the least bit pretty, but his 
teacher was always glad when he came into the room. People 
liked to see him at play. There were other things about the 
boy that made people like him, but that which they oftenest 
spoke about was his clean face. 

OR. LESS. IN HY, 5 



66 FIRST YEAR 

There is something else that we must learn about faces. 
When any one is cross, how do we know it ? 

He looks cross. 

When we feel glad or happy, how do people know it ? 

We look happy. 

Happy looks, kind looks, cross looks, are called expressions 
of the face. It is a long word, but we can understand it for 
it means how a face looks. What kind of an expression do you 
like best to see ? 

A pleasant expression. 

A happy expression. 

Miss Cloud and Miss Sunbeam 

Once there were two little children who played together in 
a large yard. One little girl tried to make everybody happy 
and was always smiling and pleasant at her play. The people 
called her little Miss Sunbeam. The other little girl was self- 
ish and unhappy. She used to pout and frown when anything 
did not please her. She was very hard to please. She was 
called little Miss Cloud. Miss Cloud would not do anything 
to help people, and was so cross that no one liked to look at 
her or have her for a playmate. 

What made Miss Cloud look so cross ? 

Because she was cross. 

She felt cross. 

That is just the reason. We must not let ourselves feel 
cross, if we want to look pleasant and have sweet expressions 
on our faces. If we are kind and pleasant and thoughtful of 
others, our faces will tell it. Here is a verse for us to learn : — 

" Little children, you should seek 
To be good as well as wise, 
Tor the thoughts you do not speak 
Shine out in your cheeks and eyes. 1 ' 



THE ARMS 07 

MEMORY POINTS 

We all have faces. 

Most faces arc shaped like an egg. 

Some are round. 

The parts of the face are: eyebrows, eyelashes, eyes, nose, 
mouth, cheeks, and chin. 

We see with oar eyes. 

We smell with our noses. 

We eat with our mouths. 

The eyelashes keep the perspiration on our foreheads from run- 
ning into our eyes. 

They make the face look prettier. 

The eyelashes keep the snow, dust, and light from hurting the eyes. 

The cheeks make walls for the mouth. 

If we try to be happy and make other people happy, we look 
pleasant and kind. We have a pleasant expression on our faces. 

The expression of our faces tells people how we feel. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Be beautiful and you will by and by appear so. Carve the 
face from within, not dress it from without, For whoever 
would be fairer illumination must begin in the soul ; the face 
catches the glow only from that side. — W. C. Gaxxett, D.D. 

As regards the importance of observing the laws of health, 
it is very pertinently pointed out that, if good temper is essen- 
tial to courtesy, good health is essential to good temper. 

— London Lancet. 

THE AEMS 

LESSON 15. — THEIR PARTS 

Teacher: "Suppose we begin our lesson this afternoon 
with a story. I'll begin, and if any words are left out you 



68 



FIRST YEAR 



must think quickly what they are ; and we'll put them back 
right away. 

"Last spring I saw two little birds hard at work build- 
ing a — 

" It was made of mud and sticks and 
straw, all nicely lined with tiny bits of 
cloth and thread and hair. The little 
birds had to carry all these things to the 
nest in their — 

" A few days after the nest was 
done, I looked inside and saw four 
bluish white — 

" The little mother is sit- 
ting on the nest now, keep- \^ 
ing the eggs nice and warm *s^ ** 




THE ARMS 69 

so that little birds will hatch out by and by. After school I'll 
show you where her home is, and every boy or girl who thinks 
hard about the rest of the lesson, and answers all the questions 
he or she can, may carry some crumbs for father and mother 
birds' supper." 

Why do the birds carry the material for their nests in their 
bills? 

They have no other way to carry things. 

Birds have no hands or arms. 

If you were going to build a playhouse and had to bring 
together all the things to make it, would you carry them as 
the birds do ? 

No ; we have arms to use. 

Our lesson to-day is about the arms. Stand up and point to 
your arms, first to the right arm, then to the left. 

Fold your arms in front and tell me what we call the place 
where the bend comes. I'll write it here on the board. 

The part of the arm which we can bend is called the elbow. 

Find another place in the arm which will bend, and tell its 
name. 

The lower part of the arm which we can bend is called the 
wrist. 

The parts of our body which we can bend are called joints. 

We must find what our wrists and elbow joints are for. 

Why were not our arms made in long, straight pieces with- 
out any joints ? 

Ask all to hold their arms as stiff as they can, then try to 
pick up something from the floor and lay it on their desks. 
The effort to do this will suggest the answer to the question. 

If our arms were in long, straight pieces, Ave could not pick 
up anything so quickly and easily as now. 

What is a joint ? 



ro 



FIRST YEAR 



If necessary, explain until all know that — 

A joint is a part of the body which bends. 

Now we must rind out about the other parts of the arm. 
This part between the shoulder and the elbow is called the 
upper arm. We have a lower arm, too, or the forearm. How 
many can find it ? 




We have learned now the names of all the different parts of 
the arm. Tell me, in order, what they are, beginning at the 
shoulder. 

The parts of the arm are the upper arm. elbow, forearm, 
wrist. 

Exercise and Rest 

Teacher: " I saw Ned and Arthur trying to see who could 
throw a ball the higher, this afternoon Which of you did? " 



THE ARMS 71 

"Neither of us could throw it so high as the schoolhouse 
roof," answered the boys, " but we are going to keep practicing 
until we can. Burt Page, over at the high school, can throw 
it up almost out of sight." 

Teacher: " What is the reason you cannot throw the ball so 
high as Burt?" 

" We aren't so large and strong as he is ; we haven't muscle 
enough yet, but we shall have when we are as old," said the 
boys. 

Teacher: " You said just now that you were going to prac- 
tice until ycu could throw the ball high, too. Try to think 
what good practice will do you, and then tell the rest of us 
about it." 

Emphasize still more the fact that exercise of different kinds 
is needed to develop the muscles of the arm, by writing on the 
board the following incomplete sentence, and letting the chil- 
dren think of games and modes of exercise for the arms to fill 
in the blank space : — 

If I want my arm to grow large and strong I can — 

Teacher: "I'll write what you give me in two columns, and 
we'll call one ' Work for the Arms/ and the other < Play for 
the Arms.' " 

Work for the Arms Play for the Arms 

Fill the woodbox. Roll the hoop. 

Set the table. Climb trees. 

Carry packages. Jump rope. 

Practice on the piano. Play croquet. 

Write a letter. Swim. 

Put the room in order. Play ball. 

All such work and play will give you good stout arms if you 
do not try to do too much of either at once. When you have 
given them plenty of exercise, how do your arms feel ? 

" Mine feel tired sometimes when I go to bed," some little 
mischief-maker may reply. 



72 FIRST YEAR 

Of course they do, and then they must have a chance to rest : — 

Our two arms need plenty of both exercise and rest to make 
them strong and help them grow as they ought. 

If we do not give them enough to do, or if we wear our 
clothing so tight that we haven't room to grow, our arms will 
be small and weak. 

The Boy who broke his Arm 

There was once a little boy named George, who fell from a 
ladder and broke his arm. It had to be kept bandaged tightly 
for several weeks to give the bones a chance to grow together. 

When it was quite well again George found he could not 
play ball so well as before. His arm felt very weak and soft ; 
it was not so large as the other. What do you think he did ? 

Yes ; as it grew strong he gave it plenty of exercise as 
the doctor advised. He ate enough good food, which makes 
healthy blood. Then he wore loose clothing, and his mother 
had him go to bed early every night to get plenty of rest. 

You will be glad to learn that his broken arm was soon as 
large and strong as the other. 

Suppose George had begun to smoke cigarettes or drink any 
liquor which had alcohol in it. Do you think that would have 
helped his arm to get well quickly ? 

How many think he was right to let these things alone ? 

MEMORY POINTS 

The parts of our arms are the upper arm, elbow, forearm, wrist. 
We have joints in our arms so that ice can bend them. 
Work and play make our arms grow. 
When our arms are tired ice must give them rest. 
Tight sleeves are bad for the arms and keep them from growing. 
We must not use tobacco or alcohol if ice icant to have strong 
arms and be able to do good icork. 



THE HANDS 



73 



Lively. 



CLAP, CLAP, HURRAH. 

Words and Music by W. II. WALKER. 



=i=i= 



=ft 



4— h— h— -* 

i J- i. . * 



— ?\- 
— i — 



Hold the right hand Tip, hold the left hand up; Whirl the 
To the east - ward point, to the west - ward point ; Fold your 
Here we all stand up clap-ping mer - ri - ly; Let the 
Let us seat - ed be, and our arms fold up, Then a - 
Now we rise a - gain, and our hands stretch up, Back and 



x: 



Bt 



i=t= 



t*N^ 



I. 

fin - gers brisk-ly, clap, clap, clap ; See the black-smith strike while the 
arms be - hind you, heads up fright ; See the drum-mer drum on his 
arms ex - tend a clap once a - gain ; & See the saw- er saw c at the 
gain clap merri-ly, merri-ly oh ! See the schoolgirl wash-ing her 

for - ward quickly the el-bows draw;^See the schoolboy driv - ing his 

A 



c 



==l=t 



-m—m 



-m 1- 



-m- 



mm 



I 



iron is hot ; Lit-tle boy wake up from your drow - sy nap! 
big bass drum ; Let us step to- geth - er — left foot, right 
big wood - pile ; How it makes the blood move through each vein I 

hands and face, For to school all clean she loves to go. 

hoop a - long, — ha, ha, ha, ha, ha! — Hur - rah! Hur-rah! e 



a.— Horizontally, to the left and right. 

b.— Keep the arms perfectly straight, and swing them upwards till they meet over 

the head. 
c— Bend the body over slightly, then move the hands and arms with great force 

in imitation of the wood-sawer. This movement expands the chest 

admirably. 
d— Stand perfectly erect, shut the hands, and throw the elbows back suddenly as 

far as you can, then forward, till the arms are straight. 
e. — Swing the right hand in the usual way. 
N. B. — As soon as the Hurrah is over, give the Triple Applause: i.e., all clap 

briskly, then stop; clap again briskly, then stop; clap once more briskly, 

then stop. The teacher can hold up one hand as a signal for stopping. 

Music used by permission of Oliver Ditson Company, owners of the copyright. 



74 FIRST YEAR 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Exercise aids Growth 

Proper exercise tends in every way to increase nutrition, 
and to a greater growth, while over exercise tends in the oppo- 
site direction. — Journal of the American Medical Association. 

Narcotics are opposed to Health 

He who desires the supreme vigor of health can have no 
use for alcohol, tea, coffee, or tobacco. 

— Charles H. Shepard, M.D. 

Alcohol gives no Strength 

Alcohol increases muscular fatigue and lessens power of 
endurance. — T. D. Crothers, M.D. 

I found that alcohol weakens the muscular contraction and 
lessens the time during which the contracting can remain 
active. — Sir B. \V. Kichardsox, M.I)., LL.D., F.E.S. 

Total abstinence from alcohol and tobacco is required from 
all competitors while in training for athletic games and races. 
— H. Newell Martix, M.D., F.E.S. 



THE HANDS 

" Beautiful hands are those that do 
Work that is earnest, brave, and true, 
Moment by moment, the whole day through." 

LESSON 16. — PARTS OF THE HAND 

Pass paper, pencil, and scissors to each pupil. Have the 
children place one hand flat upon the paper, tracing its outline 
with their lead pencils. Ask all who can to write the names 
of the fingers in their proper places. 



THE HANDS 75 

When they have finished drawing, allow them to cut out the 
paper hand so that the shape will be as nearly like the original 
as possible. 

Ask the children to put their hands on the desks beside the 
paper hands. Name a difference between them. 

" My hand is thick, the paper hand is flat." 

" My fingers have nails." 

" The paper hand cannot move itself." 

Teacher : " What is there in your hand which makes it 
thick ? " 

" There are bones and flesh in my hand." 

Draw a large hand horizontally on the blackboard and write 
the names of the fingers in their places on the drawing, or 
sketch faces on the nails in the picture, and name the little 
men, as the fingers are often called in children's songs. 

This will be of service when the care and training of the 
hands are considered. If the child feels that his fingers are 
his servants and that he is responsible for their appearance 
and ability to do certain work, he may be more careful, both 
in keeping them clean and in the manner of doing work 
assigned to him. 

After teaching the names of the fingers, return to the real 
hands upon the desks. 

Count the bones in your fingers and thumbs. Why do we 
need so many ? You may pick up your pencils, watching 
your fingers as you do so. John may come here. Play that 
you have but one long bone in each finger, and that you have 
no knuckles ; then pick up this ball. 

John soon discovers that he must take both hands. By a 
few such experiments the children will observe that we need 
many little bones with joints to help us grasp objects, and to 
enable us to do fine work. 

Ask all to lay their hands flat on the desk, palms upward, 
and touch each part as you give the name. Then let them 



76 FIRST YEAR 

turn the backs of their hands up and repeat the process. 
Have the names of all the parts of the hand written as a 
spelling lesson, — back, palm, fingers, tips, thumb, ball, joints, 
nails. 

Bring a pet cat into the class and ask them to find what 
parts of the kitty correspond to our hands. How many toes 
has she on her fore feet? on her hind feet? How do her 
nails differ from ours ? What can the cat do with her paws 
which we cannot do with our fingers ? What can we do which 
she cannot ? How is the covering of her fore paws unlike 
that on our hands ? How many joints have the fore paws of a 
cat ? How many in our hands ? Why do we need so many 
joints ? How are our hands joined to our arms ? How many 
ways can we move our hands ? our fingers ? Ask the chil- 
dren to notice all the animals they see and find which ones 
have fore limbs like the cat. What do cows have instead of 
hands ? instead of fingers ? 

Put on the board the picture of a fish. Let the children 
point out its fore limbs and show how these are unlike their 
own. What do we call the fore limbs of a fish ? What are 
they used for ? 

Study the wiugs of a bird in the same way. What can the 
canary do with its wings which we cannot with our hands ? 
What can we do with our hands which birds and fish cannot 
do with their fore limbs ? 

Review by describing the fore limbs of well-known animals 
and letting the children guess the names. Test their powers 
of observation also by putting drawings of the same on the 
board and asking them to write the correct name under 
each. 

Have the class count the bones in each finger ; in the thumb ; 
in the hand. How many in all ? 

Call attention to the way the thumb is placed in the hand. 
Why is it not in line with the fingers ? How does it help in 



THE HANDS 77 

picking up objects or holding them ? How are the fingers 
tipped on the back ? How do the nails help ? 

Ask the children to name all the things they can think of 
which could not be made if we had no hands. Then turn to 
the subject of the protection of the fingers and hands. 

Teacher: '-Did any of you boys ever pound your finger- 
nail ? Fred may tell us what happened." 

" The nail turned black and came off." 

"My finger hurt every time I hit it against anything until 
the new nail grew." 

Of what use are the finger-nails ? 

The nails make the fingers look prettier and keep them from 
being easily hurt. They help us to pick up small things such 
as pins. 

LESSON 17. — CARE OF THE HANDS 

Eead to the children the first stanza of Longfellow's Vil- 
lage Blacksmith. Why did the smith need "large and sinewy 
hands " ? How did they come to be so strong ? What other 
people need powerful hands ? Tell the class the story of the 
emperor who used to bend a gold coin double in his fingers 
and leave it at the door instead of a card when he made a call, 
the only man in Europe strong enough for such a feat. The 
hands of the strongest men were soft and delicate in child- 
hood, but they grew strong and large because they Avere given 
a great deal of exercise. How can we get strong hands ? 

What kind of hands must a watchmaker have ? a pianist ? 
a nurse ? What people need clean hands ? What can we do 
to our hands to keep them soft and flexible and able to do fine 
work. What hands do we like best ? 

Freddy in No-Hand Land 

Freddy didn't like to have his hands washed. His finger- 
nails were often dirty, too, so that his mamma was ashamed 



78 



FIRST YEAE 



to have him come to the table. Freddy would play all day 
and all the next day without ever having clean hands if his 
mother did not take him into her room and wash them herself. 

One day this little boy was very cross, and when it came 
time for his hands to be washed he became angry and ran out- 
of-doors and into the barn. 

" I wish I hadn't any hands/' he exclaimed, as he threw him- 




self down on the soft haymow ; " then they wouldn't have to 
be washed." 

In a few minutes a little man came up close to him. 

"You are in my country now/' said the queer little man, 
"and, first of all, I must take off your hands." 

" What do you mean ? " exclaimed Freddy, surprised and 
frightened. 

"Don't you see you are in 6 No-Hand Land,' where all the 
people live who wish they had no hands ? Some people 
come here because they do not want to work, but," he contin- 



THE hands 79 

ued, glancing at Freddy's hands, " I see that you came to 
escape being washed. Well, you won't be bothered any more, 
for you will have no hands to wash." 

Freddy felt helpless, for the little man was very strong. 
He had said that he wished he had no hands, and he wouldn't 
be a coward now, so he shut his teeth very tight and winked 
hard to keep back the tears while the little man unfastened his 
hands and took them off. Then the little man laughed, and 
told Freddy that he would find some other children over the 
hedge in the field and that he might go and play with them. 

Freddy went, but it was a very sorry little group of children 
that he found. Flay — what could children play without 
hands? There was no use in thinking of ball, marbles, or 
shinney. Even pullaway and tag could not be played there, 
for how could any one be caught if the catcher had no hands ? 

A bell rang, calling the children to dinner. 

Freddy was very hungry, but he could not see how he could 
get anything to eat without hands, and when nobody else had 
any hands to help him. He lay down on the ground and 
cried loudly. He was very sorry for the foolish wish he had 
made in the barn. Soon the bell rang again, louder this time, 
and some one was shouting, " Freddy." 

Freddy opened his eyes. The rafters of the barn were over 
his head, the soft hay was under him. It was his father's 
voice calling his name. The queer little man was no longer 
in sight. 

At first Freddy was almost afraid to look at his hands, lest 
he should find them missing, but finally he pulled them both 
from under his head and looked at them. It had all been a 
dream, but it seemed to him they had never looked so dirty 
and neglected before. 

He swung from a beam down to the barn floor and scam- 
pered into the house. He was very hungry, and his father 
and mother had been waiting for him, but before he sat down 



80 FIRST YEAR 

to the table he went to his mother's room and washed his 
hands and carefully brushed his nails. He did the same 
thing at supper time. His mamma wondered, but said 
nothing. 

That night, after she had put him to bed, Freddy told 
his mamma about the queer little man. and his visit to " No- 
Hand Land/' and how his wish that he had no hands was 
fulfilled. 

" I mean to keep my fingers clean after this/' he said ; 
"but if I ever forget, you jnst say ' No-Hand Land/ and 
I'll remember at once." 

MEMORY POINTS 

TJie parts of the hand are the back, palm, fingers, tips, thumb, 
ball, joints, nails. 

The joints help us to bend our hands and fingers. 

The nails help us to pick up things. They protect the ends of 
the fingers. 

We can have strong, skillful hands if ice use them rightly when 
ice are young. The hands shoidd be kept clean. 

Tobacco may make the hands tremble. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Naturalists tell ns the hand of man is one cause of his great- 
ness, and that the secret lies in the opposable thumb, which 
makes it possible for him to grasp objects as the lower animals 
cannot. — Joseph Cook, LL.D. 

Simple nourishment, good fresh air and plenty of it, are 
the two essentials of human life, and they should never be 
lost sight of.— N. S. Davis, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 

A shaky hand may be developed by irregular modes of liv- 
ing, by the moderate use of alcohol, and by smoking. — T. D. 
Crothers, M.D. 



GRAINS 81 



GBAINS 
LESSON 18. — RIGHT USE OF GRAINS 

Material for the Lesson. — Wheat, oats, rye, barley, 
corn, and rice in small boxes or bottles, an ear of corn, stalks 
of wheat, oats, and other grains ; pictures of the different grains 
growing, of mills where the grains are prepared, of bakeries, 
or of a home kitchen. 

Begin this lesson by telling the children about the — 

Field of Gold 

Little Helen took a journey with her parents one summer. 
They traveled westward from Boston until they came to Wis- 
consin, where Aunt Jean lived. 

I wish you could have seen the Happy Valley, Aunt Jean's 
home. The green fields were full of lovely flowers ; a little 
river ran along over the yellow sands, laughing softly to 
itself; there were groves of forest trees with great bowers 
of fern underneath, and all about the valley were beautiful 
hills. Do you not think Aunt Jean's home was well named ? 

On some of these hills the sheep grazed, up others forest 
trees climbed. There was one great hill opposite the house 
that seemed to Helen the most wonderful thing she had ever 
seen. 

" Oh, mother," she cried, " it is all gold. It moves ; is it 
alive ? " 

" It is a field of wheat, my dear," replied Mrs. Lyon. " It 
is nearly ripe. To-morrow we will go to see it." 

The next day Mrs. Lyon and Helen walked over to the 
wheat field. 

" Why, it's something like grass," said the little girl, when 
they drew near. 

OR. LESS. IN HY. — 6 



82 FIRST YEAR 

" It is a kind of grass/' replied the mother. 

She broke a stalk, and they sat down under a tree to 
examine it. 

She showed Helen the little hard grains, each with its husk 
coat, and then told her that when these grains are crushed 
flour is made from them — flour that we use for our daily bread. 

One day when they were out driving Helen saw another field. 

"There's some more wheat/' she cried, "only it's green 
instead of gold." 





y^^^^p^^^M 




"■■-.,■:,:■■■ ■ :;: ■*••■:■■■.. :; - ;■ ^^v ,;/^^.--*.-..- ' : V ...;. '•., : 'M 



" That is rye," said her mother, " another kind of grass full 
of seeds out of which we make flour." 

"Oh, I'd like some rye bread," said Helen. "How does it 
taste ? " 

That night Helen went with John the farmer to drive in the 
cows. She stopped at his cottage, and had some rye bread and 
fresh milk for her supper. It tasted so good — better than 
cake or pie, she thought. 

When she returned home she was never weary of saying, "I 
saAv a field of gold when I was in Wisconsin. It was ripe, 
golden grain climbing up a hill toward the sky." When any- 



GRAINS 83 

thing was said about good things to eat, Helen would shake 
her curly head wisely, and say, "You never have driven the 
cows home, and had rye bread and warm milk for your supper 
in the farmer's cottage. 7 ' 

Teacher: "How many of you have ever seen wheat grow- 
ing?" 

In many sections of the country the children will be familiar 
with fields of grain. If such is the case in your school, ask 
the pupils to describe a wheat field, the harvesting and thresh- 
ing. If not, show them pictures of these scenes and specimens 
of the dried grains in the ear and out of it. 

Teacher (holding up a vial of oats): "Here are some seeds 
that are very useful. Old Tom out in the stall is just as fond 
of them as some little people I know." 

Percy : " Why, those are oats — we don't eat oats." 

Mabel: "But we eat oatmeal ; I do every morning." 

Douglas: "My grandma lived in Scotland when she was a 
little girl, and all the bread she had, except at Christmas, was 
oat cakes, scones she called them." 

Teacher : " Our kind Father in heaven gives every country 
seeds of some kind, that they may be ground into flour to make 
bread. In this country we have several kinds. Tell me the 
name of each as I show it to you. "What do we make from the 
wheat stalk ? the rye ? oats ? " 

Develop the idea that all these grains are food-producing, 
and that bread is the result. This statement is then written 
on the board : — 

r wheat 
Grains i rye 
I oats 

They give us food. We make bread from them. 

Teacher: "'We have still other kinds of grain. What is 
this ? " 



8-4 FIRST YEAR 

Inez: " That is corn. I like to pop corn." 

Herbert: "I like johnnycake. My grandma makes it for 
me." 

Teacher: "Here is another kind of grain. Does any one 
know it ? I like it very much in soups. It is barley. This 
kind my mother always called pearl-barley, because the grains 
when cooked were as white and shining and just the shape of 
pearls. 

" Here is a picture I want to show you. It is the picture of 
a rice field. 

"Do you see those men working halfway up to their knees 
in mud and water ? They are cultivating rice. Katherine, 
find the rice in our specimens. In some hot countries across 
the sea, millions of people live on little else but rice. 

"'Let us acid corn and rice to our list ; then we have the chief 
grains, those that feed the greatest number of people. As I 
name each I want some child to come and hold up what I 
name : Wheat, rye, oats, barley, corn, rice." 

LESSON 19. —WRONG USE OF GRAINS 

Ask the children what they like best to eat. What would 
you choose if you could have but one thing to eat ? 

Talk with them until they see that bread from the various 
grains is really the " staff of life " and does most to build up 
and nourish the body. But this noble gift may be perverted. 

Two Heads of Rye 

Xear Jenny's home was a pretty field of rye. Jenny liked 
to watch it from the moment the first blades peeped from the 
soil until the heads were bending down heavy with the ripe 
grains within. In the midst of the field were two little heads 
that liked to play together. As the breeze rocked them they 
would cross their stems and whisper all about the sunshine, or 



GRAINS 85 

the blue sky, or the birds flying over that almost touched them. 
One day they saw Jenny running through the field, and after 
that they could talk of nothing else, think of nothing else but 
the little girl. 

" What blue eyes she has ! " said one head. 

" What golden hair ! " said the other. 

"Her step is almost as light as the wind," said the first 
head. 

" I wish she would stay by us always," sighed the second. 

Harvest time came and the rye was gathered in. Now I 
have something to say that makes me very sad. With winter 
a great trouble visited Jenny's home. Her mother's cheeks 
grew pale and her eyes dim with weeping. Little Jenny lost 
her bright color and plump cheeks. The father whom they 
had loved so much was now seldom at home, and when he did 
return to his wife and little one there was more fear than joy 
in their hearts. 

During the summer Jenny used to look at the waving fields 

and sing : — 

" By and by, pretty rye, 
Bread, you'll give to Jenny." 

Now the rye had gone, but it made no bread for the dear 
little girl. At last a night came when there was nothing to 
eat in the house — not even a fragment of cold oat or rye cake. 
Jenny and her mother went hungry to bed but not to sleep. 
Pretty soon they heard some one coming up the path shouting 
and singing. Jenny began to cry, for she knew what it meant. 
Her mother jumped up and, seizing the blanket, ran up the 
ladder into the little attic with Jenny. There they lay cold 
and trembling until the morning dawned. Poor little Jenny. 

The rye had been made into a bad drink which her father 
had learned to like. That is why Jenny was cold and hungry 
and afraid. 

In similar ways show the children that barley is made into 



86 FIRST YEAR 

beer, and that various drinks are prepared from other grains. 
Show that what God meant for food is thus turned into a 
poison. 

Why Beer, Rum, and Whisky are Bad 

Teacher : " Why was Jenny afraid of her father ? I will 
tell you. He had been drinking. When he was in this' condi- 
tion he would be very cross, perhaps strike her, and she and 
her mother always tried to keep out of his way. Poor little 
Jenny. Do you not suppose she hated the poison that changed 
her dear father into a cross, angry man ? " 

Strong drink makes us cross and angry. 
Sometimes it makes people hurt others. 

Teacher: " One day Jenny came to school barefooted. Her 
father had carried away her shoes to sell for liquor. He used 
to love his little girl, but alcohol had so changed him that he 
no longer cared for her." 

Do you not think we ought to keep far away from a poison 
that does so much harm? Is it safe to drink just a little? 
When we are sliding down hill is it easy to stop after we get 
started? 

What is the safest way ? 

What made Olga Sleepy 

Olga was a very little girl who had just begun going to 
school. She had a round pink face that was always shining 
with pleasure, bright blue eyes, and flaxen hair braided in two 
little tails and tied with pink ribbon. 

Olga liked everything in school and tried heartily to follow 
her teacher's directions. Whenever a song was sung or a game 
played, Olga's little face was like a sunbeam. At first she 
learned the new words quickly, and her number lesson was no 
trouble to her as it is to some children. 



GRAINS 87 

But after a few weeks one thing puzzled Miss Angier. 
Every afternoon Olga seemed sleepy. She yawned over her 
primer and nodded in the writing exercise, and her lessons 
were not learned so easily as before. Every day before three 
o'clock the little head would be on her desk, and when recess 
came some child would say, " Olga's asleep again." 

Miss Angier did not know what to do. She found out that 
her little pupil went to bed early and slept well during the 
night. What could be the trouble ? At last a thought came 
to her. " Olga, dear," she asked, " what do you eat at noon ? " 

" Bread and beer," replied Olga. " We have our dinner at 
night when father gets home, since he works in the mill." 

" Ah," thought the teacher, " I think I know what makes 
Olga sleepy, and why it takes her so long to get her lessons." 

She wrote a note to the child's mother and said : — 

"Dear Mrs. Grimm: Our little Olga seems very sleepy 
every afternoon and cannot do her work. I should be very 
glad if you would not give her beer at noon, for I think that 
is the trouble. Very truly, 

" Alice Angier." 

This answer came back : — 

"Dear Teacher: W r e will try to go without the beer. You 
so good to my child. Yours truly, 

" Christina Grimm." 

So Olga had fruit with her bread at noon, and Miss Angier 
was pleased to see that she went to sleep no more, but was as 
wide-awake as any one. 

Teacher: " Tell one reason why beer is bad for us." 

Hugh : " It makes us sleepy." 

Teacher: "Yes, and it makes people fat. Now to be very 
fat does not mean to be strong. 

" What keeps us warm, children ? " 

Class: "The food we eat." 



88 FIRST YEAR 

The good part of our food is carried all over our bodies in 
the blood. 

When very cold weather comes, drinking people suffer more 
than others. 

Beer makes us grow fat. 

All strong drink makes us feel the cold quickly. 

Beer makes us dull and sleepy. 

Beer keeps us from doing our work quickly and well. 

Teacher : " There are other reasons why beer, whisky, and 
rum are bad. What do they contain ? " 

Percy : "Alcohol, and alcohol is a poison." 

Teacher : " When people drink, the alcohol hurts the parts 
of the body which have work to do. The heart beats faster 
than it should, and sometimes a case of fat forms about it. In 
time this kills." 

Good food builds up the body and makes it stronger. 
Strong drink tears down the body and spoils the health. 

MEMORY POINTS 

Wheat, rye, oats, corn, barley, and rice are good to eat. TJiey 
are food-producing grains. 

They nourish the body and help to make it grow. 

The right use of these grains is to make them into food. 

Sometimes these grains are made into beer and other bad drinks. 

This is a wrong use to make of grains. 

Beer makes people fat instead of strong. 

Beer makes people sleepy and stupid. 

Beer, whisky, and rum make us feel the cold- quickly. 

They will keep us from doing good work. 

All these drinks hurt people instead of making them grow. 

They contain alcohol, and alcohol is a poison. 

Strong drink tears down the body and hurts the health. 



TIIK TRUNK 89 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Of all alcoholic drinks, the most dangerous is beer, because 
no other is taken in such quantities. — Gustav Bunge, M.D., 
Basel 

Most drunkards commence on beer and wine, and finally 
drink stronger beverages A beer drunk is the worst kind of 
a drunk. — L. D. Mason, M.I). 

Alcohol, not in strong liquors alone, but in the diluted kinds, 
as beer and wine, is a poison. — August Fokel, M.D., Zurich, 



THE TRUNK 
LESSON 20. —UPPER PARTS OF THE TRUNK 

How many can think of a part of the body which we have 
talked about before ? Each may name the part he is thinking 
of; what parts have we not yet studied? What do we call 
the middle part of our bodies ? 

Name something else which has a trunk. 

Teacher : " To-day we are to learn all we can about this part 
of the body. Guy, will you stand before the class and help 
me ? You may put your hands on your head. Put them on 
the part just below. What is the name of that part ?" 

The neck. 

Teacher: " Clasp your fingers about your own necks. Tell 
me one reason why we need to have necks. " 

They fasten the head and trunk together. 

Teacher: "What is the shape of the neck? It is like one 
of the blocks we draw. Who can find another part of the 
body shaped something like a cylinder ? 

" Yes, the arm, the leg, the trunk. Who can draw the trunk 
and join it to the neck? 



90 FIRST YEAR 

" Every one may rise and place his hands on the upper part 
of his trunk just below the neck. This upper part is called 
the chest. How may we know what the chest is for ? " 

Helen : " We have a chest in our attic. My mother keeps 
pieces of cloth in it." 

Teacher: "The chests in our bodies are made to hold some- 
thing too. Put your hands on the upper part of the chest. 
Now take a long breath. What do you feel ? " 

Albert: "I feel something swell out." 

Teacher : "What you feel is the lungs. They are what we 
breathe with. Put your hands now on your left sides. What 
do you feel there ? " 

Bessie: "I feel my heart beat. It ticks just like a 
watch." 

Teacher : " Bessie is right. We all can feel our hearts beat. 
They never stop so long as we live, and they keep all the' rest 
of our bodies going." 

George : " Just like the big engine in the mill ? That keeps 
the rest of the machinery going." 

Teacher: "Yes, the heart is sometimes called an engine for 
that very reason. Sometimes, too, it is called a pump. The 
chest holds not only the lungs and heart, but other organs 
that work for us and keep us alive. You see what an 
important part of the trunk it is." 

The chest holds the lungs and heart, the parts of the body 
that keep us alive. 

* " Find the part of your bodies opposite the chest. George, 
feel Guy's back and tell me about it." 

George : " It feels hard. There are bones in the middle and 
some near the top. It isn't soft and fat like our chests." 

Teacher: "The row of bones we feel in the middle of the 
back is called the spine. Why do we need a spine ? Tell me 
something alive which does not have a backbone. Which can 



THE TRUNK 91 

stand up better, boys and girls with good straight spines, or a 
caterpillar which has none? 

" Show me the place where the arm is joined to the trunk. 
What do we call this ? " 

Class : " That is the shoulder." 

Teacher: "Point to the right shoulder; the left shoulder. 
In what ways can you move your shoulder ? " 

I can move mine up — so. 

I can put mine down. 

I can move mine up and down, and forward and back. 

Teacher: "Point to your right side; the left side. Who 
can tell me the upper parts of the trunk as quickly as I write 
them ? You may each name one part." 

The upper parts of the trunk are the chest, back, spine, 
right shoulder, left shoulder, right side, left side. 

The Care of the Trunk 

Teacher: "The other day I saw a poor little boy who 
walked all bent over. He had a great hump on his back." 

Esther: "I think he was sick, or perhaps he had hurt his 
back." 

Teacher : " Both were true. When he was a little baby his 
mother let him roll off the bed. He fell on the floor against 
a rocking-chair, and lay there crying a long time." 

Rose : " Why didn't his mother pick him up ? Was she 
asleep ? " 

Teacher : " Yes ; but something had put her to sleep when 
she ought to have been awake. She had been drinking. 
Now poor little Tim must suffer all his life from the fall. 
We must be very careful not to hurt the back, it is such a 
delicate part of the body. 

" When you boys were playing the other day I saw George 



92 FIRST YEAR 

hit Koger on the back with a big stick. It was only in fun I 
know, but you must not do it." 

It is not safe to strike the back. 

Teacher : "How many of you boys want to be humpbacked ? 
I notice that some of you lean over on your bicycles so far 
that your backs are all humped up. This squeezes your chests 
and gives the parts inside no room to do their work. If you 
keep on riding in that way, by and by you will not be able to 
sit and stand erect when you want to." 

What do we mean when we say any one is round- 
shouldered ? Let me show you. 

Does that look well ? 

How does my back look ? Do you see how it is curved over 
instead of being perfectly straight ? 

Chest high, chin down, and shoulders back. That is the 
way God's children are meant to stand. 



LESSON 21. — CARE OF THE TRUNK 
Margery's Waist 

Margery was rather a fat little girl, and was ashamed to be 
so large, I am sorry to say. She wanted all her clothes made 
very tight to give her a slimmer figure. 

One day, when her mother was very busy, she said: " Mar- 
gery, start for school early to-day, and stop at Miss Lake's. 
She will fit a new w r aist to you." 

When Margery was ready to try on the new waist a great 
temptation came to her. She would try one a size smaller 
than usual. 

" I think this is too large," she said to Miss Lake, as she 
tried on the first one. 

" It is your usual size," Miss Lake told her. 



THE TRUNK 



93 



" I'd like to try another size," said foolish Margery ; so 
Miss Lake brought out a smaller waist. 

"This is just right." said Margery. "Please button my 
dress, or I'll be late to school." 

"Fin afraid your mother will not like it/' Miss Lake ob- 
jected. 

•• Oli, yes, she will.*'" and Margery ran away to school, feeling 
very proud — and very uncomfortable. Some- 
how she could not study that morning. Her 
new waist grew tighter and tighter, and all 
she could think about was how it pinched 
and hurt her. 

When noon came, she ran home 
crying, "Take it off! take it off! 
my new waist hurts." 

Margery's mother unbuttoned her 
dress, and began to unfasten the new 
waist. 

" Why, Margery," she said. " this 
waist is too small. How did Miss 
Lake happen to give it to you ? " 

" I made her," said Margery, hon- 
estly. " I wanted to look small." 

" You silly little girl," said her mother ; 
"but I'll not scold you, for I think you 
have been punished enough." 

"Oh, I have; I could hardly breathe. I 
couldn't study, and at recess I couldn't play. 
I'm so glad to have on my old waist again." 

Teacher: "'What did the tight waist do to 
Margery's chest ? How must we take care of the trunk ? " 




The shoulders must be kept down and back. We must not 
stoop over when we stand or walk or ride the bicycle. 



94 FIRST YEAR 

We must wear loose clothing, and not squeeze the chest. 
In standing and walking, we must hold the chest high. 
The back must be guarded from blows. 

The Lower Parts of the Trunk 

Teacher : " Place your hands on jour trunk just below the 
chest. This part is the waist. Try to see how far you can 
bend at the waist. Keep the knees perfectly straight, and try 
to touch the floor with your fingers. How must we dress to 
give the waist plenty of room to grow ? 

"The soft fleshy part of the trunk just below the waist is 
the abdomen. You may repeat the word after me, and I will 
write it here where we can see how it looks. 

"Put your hands on your sides just below the waist. What 
do you find ? Who knows the name of these bones ? 

"Maud is right. They are our hip bones. Point to your 
right hip ; the left. 

" Which parts hold the trunk upright and keep it in place ? 
These parts need to be very strong to do all this work." 

The lower parts of the trunk are the back, sides, waist, abdo- 
men, hips. 

Teacher : " How can we take care of the trunk and all its 
parts ? " 

The trunk needs to be bathed often to keep it clean. 
We must wear loose clothing to give every part room to 
grow. 

This part of our body needs plenty of exercise. 

If we want tall, straight bodies we must never use tobacco. 

MEMORY POINTS 

The neck joins the head and trunk. 

The chest holds the parts of the body which keep us alive, the 
lungs and heart. 



THE TRUNK 95 

The shoulders join the arms to the body. 

The spine helps to hold the body erect. 

The upper parts of the trunk are the chest, back, spine, shoul- 
ders, and sides. 

We must be careful not to hurt the bark. 

The shoulders must be held down and bach', the chest high. 

We must sit and walk erect. 

The lower parts of the trunk are the waist, abdomen, back, 
sides, and hijys. 

The trunk must be kept clean. 

We must wear loose, comfortable clothing. 

We must take plenty of exercise. 

We must not stunt the body by using tobacco. 



EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Alcohol injures the Bodily Structure 

Alcohol in time depraves nearly every tissue of the body 
and induces morbid conditions. At once narcotic and irritant, 
whatever it comes in contact with of vital structure is affected 
disastrously. — H. S. Drayton, M.D. 

Alcohol and Tobacco hinder Development 

Even the moderate use of alcoholic liquors and tobacco 
retards both physical and mental development during youth 
to such a degree that both should be entirely abstained from 
until full maturity is reached. But if these narcotics are ca- 
pable of so impairing these processes during growth as to render 
such growth incomplete, will they not as certainly impair the 
same processes in middle and old age, and thereby make the 
nutrition necessary for tissue repair less perfect, and thereby 
encourage tissue degeneration and early failure of life ? 

— X. S. Davis, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 



96 



FIRST YEAR 



Tobacco interferes with Growth 

To the young, tobacco is injurious in any form or quantity 
and at all times, because, owing to the stage of development, 
the nicotine, which it is impossible to prevent passing off with 
the smoke, is in all doses hurtful, and even poisonous. — Lon- 
don Lancet. 



THE LEGS 



LESSON 22. — PARTS OF THE LEGS 



Bring a jointed doll dressed as a sailor boy into the school- 
room on the day before this lesson is to be given and place it 
where it can be seen and handled by all. 
Teacher: "We have a little visitor 
with us to-day. Let me introduce him 
to you. His name is Jack Seaman. To- 
morrow we are to talk about the parts 
of our bodies which help us to move 
about from place to place. Who can 
tell what we call them ? 

" I am going to see who can find out 
most about legs for our next lesson, and 
you may look at Jack as long as you 
like. Perhaps you can learn something 
from him. Then you may ask your 
fathers and mothers and big brothers 
and sisters, and see how much you can find out from them. 
I shall want to know the names of all the different parts of 
the leg, what they are for, what will help to make them grow, 
and anything else you can find. I should like to have you 
notice all the animals and living creatures you meet, too, and 
tell me how their legs differ from those of people." 




THE LEGS 97 

The next day bring out all the points which the children have 
collected. Then help them to classify these as clearly and 
simply as may be, perhaps beginning in this way : — 

Teacher: "We have our little visitor Jack here again this 
morning. Everybody who can name one or more parts of the 
leg and can show where they are, may come and point to them 
in Jack. What do you know about the legs of real live boys 
and girls and people ? Let us rise and find the parts of our 
own legs. 

" Where shall we begin ? Yes, at the top. What is the 
name of this long fleshy part ? " 

If the word "thigh" has not been brought out by the chil- 
dren in their talk about the doll, it may be given now by the 
teacher and written on the board. 

Teacher : " Who can tell me about the lower parts of the 
legs ? Do they look alike or feel alike all the way around ? " 

The legs are hard in front and softer behind. 

What do we call the hard part ? It is hard because the bone 
is so near the surface. What do we call the soft, fleshy part ? 

The upper part of the leg which joins the body is called the 
thigh. 

The front part of the lower leg is called the shin. 
The back part of the lower leg is called the calf. 

Teacher: "Tell me whether the leg is made in one piece or 
in several ? How can yo u find out ? " 

We can tell by bending our legs. We could not stoop down 
or bend them at all if each was made in one piece. Find all 
the places where we can bend our legs. How many such places 
are there ? 

We call those parts of our bodies which can bend joints. 

Who can give the names of these three joints in the legs ? 

Which of these joints can we move most freely ? In how 
many directions can we move the hip joint ? 

OR. LESS. IX HY. 7 



98 FIRST YEAR 

What is the name of the joint near the middle of the leg? 
In how many ways can you move the knee joint ? 

What is the lowest joint in the leg? Why do we need a 
joint at the ankle ? 

The upper joint is called the hip joint. It is between the 
trunk and the thigh. 

The middle joint is the knee joint. It is between the thigh 
and the shin. 

The lower joint is the ankle joint. It is between the leg 
and the foot. 

What other joints in our bodies are like these in our legs ? 

Call attention to the fact that these joints correspond 
to the shoulder, elbow, and wrist joints in the arm, and that 
they have very nearly the same motions. 

LESSON 23. — USES OF THE LEGS 

Who knows what our legs are for ? 

We run with our legs. 

Our legs help us to stand. 

No one could walk if he had no legs. 

Teacher : " Which of you can run fastest ? You may all try 
a race at recess and I'll watch to see. What kind of legs must 
a boy or girl have to run fast, or to play a long time without 
getting tired ? Is that the kind we all want ? " 

We need good, strong legs for work and play. 

Teacher: "Look at Jack Seaman again and tell me how 
much larger and stronger his legs are now than they were last 
year. Do you think they have grown any ? 

" No ; Jack's legs do not grow because he is a doll. 

"Your legs are quite a good deal longer and larger than 
they were last year ; what do you do to make your legs grow 
which Jack cannot do ? " 



THE LEGS 99 

Jack can't eat, and we can. 

Teacher: "That is one reason why children's legs grow and 
dolls' do not, but there is another reason. 

" Suppose you had hurt your legs so you could not walk, 
and had to go about all the time in a wheel chair, could your 
legs grow very fast then ? 

" Tell me two things which w r ill help to make our legs and 
all parts of our bodies grow as they ought." 

Good food will help to make our legs grow. 
Our legs will grow strong and large if we give them plenty 
of exercise. 

Sometimes people drink beer or rum, which are not good for 
them ; then they are likely to get sick. 

Those who take much of such drinks cannot stand up 
straight and strong like other people. Their legs are weak 
and shaky, and sometimes they topple clear over. Do you 
know why ? Here is a little story which shows the reason. 

Elsie and Karl 

Karl came home from school one day and found his little 
sister in tears. 

" What's the matter, Elsie ? " he called out cheerily. 

" Father's been drinking again," said the child. " He could 
hardly get home at all, his legs wobbled so. And the boys 
made fun of him all along the street, and one of them threw 
a stone which 'most hit him. He's asleep now, but he'll be 
awful cross when he wakes up. He always is, you know." 

Karl put his arm around Elsie's neck. 

" Don't feel bad," he said. "I know why whisky makes 
people tumble down, and go to sleep when they oughtn't to, 
and be cross. We learned about it in school to-day, and we'll 
tell father when he wakes up, and perhaps he won't drink any 
more. Whisky hurts people 'cause there's a poison in it." 

LofC. 



100 



FIRST YEAR 



" What poison ? " said Elsie, with wide-open eyes. 
" Alcohol," continued Karl. " There's lots of it in whisky 
and rum and gin, and that's why they make people drunk. 
If they should drink enough 'twould kill 'em right off quick." 

"There's alcohol in beer, too, Miss 
White said, and in wine and cider. 
Not so much, you know, but 
enough to hurt you, and make 
you want more. I'm not 
going to drink any more 
beer for breakfast after 
this, and you mustn't 
either, Elsie. We don't 
want to get to be cross and 
trembly." 

"No, let's not," said 
Elsie. 
You will be glad to know 
that Elsie and Karl kept their 
promise to each other and that 
they grew up tall and straight 
and healthy. 
They told their father what they had learned about alcohol, 
and begged him not to drink any more whisky. 

"If I had known all this when I was your age," he said, "I 
shouldn't be such a poor, miserable creature, but it's too late 
now to stop drinking. I should die if I didn't have liquor." 
But he did try, to please Elsie and Karl. 
Teacher: "Tell me now why beer and whisky and gin and 
all such drinks sometimes make people walk crookedly and 
always hurt them more or less." 

Whisky, gin, beer, and all such drinks hurt people because 
they contain a poison, alcohol. 




THE LEGS 101 

Boys and girls who want to grow tall and strong must not 
take any drink which lias alcohol in it. 

MEMORY POINTS 

The upper part of the leg is called the thigh. 
The shin is the front part of the leg below the knee. 
The calf is the back part of the lower leg. 
TJiere are three joints in the leg. 
The hip joint* joins the thigh to the trunk. 
The knee joint joins the thigh to the shin. 
The ankle joint joins the leg to the foot. 
Our legs help us to stand, walk, and run. 
We need strong legs to carry us about. 

Wholesome food, exercise, and rest will make the legs grow. 
Drinks which contain alcohol are likely to make the legs weak 
and shaky. 

Such drinks hurt the growth. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 
Alcohol lessens Strength 

Every dose of alcohol, even the most moderate, diminishes 
the strength. All that man asserts of the strengthening effects 
of alcohol is founded on delusion. — Adolf Fick, M.D., Uni- 
versity of Wilrzburg. 

Tobacco weakens Muscle 

Even moderate amounts of tobacco in the form of smoke 
lower the working power of the human muscle by a high per- 
centage. — W. P. Lombard, M.D. 

Nicotine is a Poison 

Nicotine is so deadly a poison that what is contained in one 
cigar, if extracted and given to a person in a pure state, would 
cause speedy death. — Journal of Science. 



102 FIRST YEAR 

THE FEET 
LESSON 24. — PARTS OF THE FOOT 

The best way to teach this part of the body is to have some 
little foot, clean, sweet, and bare, for a model. Some child 
may be willing to assist in this way. If not, use a drawing on 
the board or a plaster cast. 

If a living model is presented, put the child in a chair 
on the platform, and elevate the bare foot on a stool or 
cushion. 

Teacher : " We are to learn about the foot to-day. Roger 
has been so kind as to let us study his foot. We are very 
grateful to him, because we can learn so much more in this 
way than from a picture. What use are the feet ? " 

Daisy : " We could not walk without them." 

Teacher: "A foot is a wonderful thing. It is nearly as 
wonderful as the hand and can do almost as much. How 
many of its parts do you know ? Come and point to 
them." 

Guy : " This is the heel and these are the toes." 

Teacher : " What shall we call this part between the ankle 
and the toes, on the outside of the foot ? " 

Some one may know it as the instep ; if not, the class must 
be told. 

Teacher: "I'll turn Roger's foot over. Tell me about the 
under part next the toes." 

May: "It is soft like a cushion." 

Teacher : " We call it the ball of the foot. This is the part 
we should walk on. When Roger has his foot down in the 
proper position, what parts touch the ground ? " 

Kate : " The ball and toes and part of the heel. There is a 
part between that does not touch." 

Teacher: "That is the arch. I will draw a picture of the 



THE FEET 103 

foot on the board and write the names of its parts beside it as 
you give them to me." 

Parts of the Foot 

Instep Heel 

Arch 

Ball Toes 

Teacher : " Each of you may draw a foot and write the 
names of its parts in their proper place." 

Care of the Feet 

There was once a little girl named Agnes, who had a pair of 
fancy kid shoes. She thought them the most beautiful shoes 
in the world, and was never so happy as when she had them 
on. Agnes grew larger and larger, but her shoes stayed just 
the same size, and by and by they hurt her feet. 

"Your shoes are too small for you," her mother said one 
day ; " you must have a larger pair." 

Agnes was afraid the new shoes would not be so pretty as 
those she had, so she answered quickly : — 

" Oh, no, they're not a bit too small. I can wear them just 
as well as not." 

But every day they hurt her more. She couldn't run like 
the other girls, because the pretty shoes pinched her feet. 
The pain made her cross and fretful, and small, hard bunches 
grew on her toes where the shoes were the tightest. 

At last her pride gave way and she begged for a larger pair. 
Her mother took her on her lap and showed her the picture 
of some Chinese girls with their tiny feet. Then she told her 
how tightly their poor little feet had to be bandaged until 
they stopped growing, and how much pain they suffered in 
order to wear smaller shoes than other people. 

"I shouldn't think they could have a good time at all," said 
Agnes. 



104 



FIRST YEAR 



"They can't/' her mother continued. " They have to lie on 
couches or be carried about wherever they want to go, instead 
of running and jumping like their little brothers. 

" Many of them have beautiful dresses to wear as they lie on 

their couches all day, and 
lovely ornaments, but I'm 
quite sure my little girl 
would not like to change 
places with them." 

" No, indeed ! " said 
Agnes, "I'm glad I'm 
not a Chinese girl, and 
I'll not wear tight shoes 
again, even if they are 
pretty." 

"No one can have 
beautiful feet who wears 
ill-fitting shoes," said her 
mother. 

"In the first place 
they must be large 
enough. Then they must 
be of the same shape as 
the foot. Let us see if 
this is true of your shoes. 
" Put your bare foot 
down on this paper. I 
will mark around it with 
my pencil. Now place your shoe on the drawing. Are the 
two of the same size ? " 

" Why, my shoe is ever so much smaller," said Agnes. 
"It isn't so wide, or so long as my foot, and the heel is 
smaller too. I'm going to make a picture of my shoe right 
beside the other." 




THE FEET 105 

"Which picture do you like better?/' asked her mother, 
when Agnes had finished. 

"I think I like your drawing better," said Agnes, thought- 
fully. " It is prettier to have my foot and shoe the same 
size." 

" I will tell you how to keep a pretty foot," said her mother. 
" Then you can tell Horace when he comes home from school. 
Do you think you can remember ? " 

" Of course I can," said Agnes. 

Teacher : " Can you tell me what Agnes told her brother ? " 

In order to have beautiful feet we need — 

Shoes a little longer than the feet. 

Shoes as wide as the feet. 

Shoes with broad low heels. 

Shoes which are not too large. 

Shoes which do not hurt the feet in any place. 

Teacher : " How many have a pet cat at home ? What 

does your pussy do to clean her feet when she gets them even 

a little soiled ? " 

George : " She licks them off with her tongue." 

Teacher : " Our feet must be taken care of, too, but we do 

not do it in the same way that pussy does. What shall we 

do to keep our feet in good order ? " 

We must wash our feet often to keep them clean. 

We must keep our toe-nails cut. 

We must not let the nails grow longer than the toes. 

Teacher: "There is one more thing we must be careful 
about." 

We must not sit with wet feet. 

If we get our shoes wet we should change them as soon as 
we come into the house. 



106 



FIRST YEAR 



LESSON 25. —THE RIGHT KIND OF FEET 

"Oh, grandma," said Bertha, "won't you please tell me a 
story ? I've almost run my feet off to-day, and I'm so tired. 
Tell me what you used to do when you were a little girl." 

" Suppose I tell you how my feet carried me into mischief 
one day," said grandma, with a smile. 

" Oh, do," exclaimed Bertha ; so grandma began her story of 



The Feet which got into Mischief 

When I was about your age, I went to a private school kept 

by a little old lady named Miss Prim. She used to wear a 

cap and kerchief, and knit 
while we studied our les- 
sons. We were so afraid 
of her we hardly dared 
raise our eyes from our 
work while she was in the 
room. One day she was 
called out and we planned 
some fun. We watched . 
her out of the corners of 

our eyes until she was fairly gone ; then the mischief began. 

Our spelling books and 

slates were filing into a 

corner and each of us tried 

to outdo the others in hav- 
ing a good time. Miss 

Prim's chair was pulled 

out into the middle of the 

room, and one of the boys 

gave the other a mad ride 

in it. My sister harnessed 





THE FEET 



107 




two of our stools together and drove them tandem, while I 
practiced a new dance step upon the other stool. 

We played until we were tired; then, fearing Miss Prim 
would come back and find us out of order, we began studying. 

Pretty soon the door 
opened and in she came. 
No one dared look up for 
Ave all felt guilty, but work 
went on just as usual, and 
by and by we breathed 
more easily. Perhaps she 
wouldn't know after all. 

Just before luncheon 
Miss Prim said : — 

" You were so good and studious while I was away this 
morning that T shall give you a treat now. We will not have 
any more school to-day, but go for a picnic instead." 

Can you imagine how small and mean we felt? We were 

almost too ashamed to 
speak, but at last my sister 
faltered out : — 

" We weren't good, while 
you were away, Miss Prim. 
Our feet just wouldn't keep 
still. We ran all round the 
room and played and did 
lots of naughty things till 
we were tired." 
" Was it your feet which led you into mischief ? " said Miss 
Prim, very soberly. 

" No'm," I said, " they got into mischief 'cause we wanted 
them to." 

Grandma stopped a moment. "Do you know what Miss 
Prim said next ? I have never forgotten it." 




108 FIRST YEAR 

" What was it ? " said Bertha. 

" Remove thy feet from evil. 

" Even a child is known by his doings, whether his work be 
pure, and whether it be right." 

"Then Miss Prim told ns we must not blame our hands or 
our feet when we got into mischief or did wrong, because they 
were only our little servants and did just what they were told." 

Teacher : " If we want the right kind of feet, what sort of 
orders must we give them ? " 

We must tell our feet to do right. 

MEMORY POINTS 

The parts of the foot are the instep, ball, arch, heel, and toes. 

We should icalk on the bcdl of the foot. 

Tight shoes hurt the feet and make corns. 

We should ivear shoes which fust fit the feet. 

Small high heels hurt the health. 

The feet should be kept clean. 

The nails should be kept trimmed. 

No one should sit with wet feet. 

We must help our feet to do right. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Alcohol injures the Body 

Alcohol destroys health and strength. — Adolf Baer, M.D., 
Royal Sanitary Commissioner, Berlin. 

Tobacco checks Growth 

Upon the young tobacco has a decidedly injurious effect, so 
much energy being wasted through all the years when so much 
is needed for growth and repair, and the whole organism being 
in a state of disorder. — Selma Seversox, M.D. 



THE FIVE SENSES 



109 



THE FIVE SENSES 



l * Heaven sends us ten thousand truths, but because our doors and 
windows are closed to them they sit and sing awhile upon the roof and 
then fly away." 

LESSON 26. — SEEING 

Teacher (taking a checkerberry wafer) : " Children, your 
eyes look so bright I should like to find out what they are for. 
"Who can tell me ? " 

Katie: "We see with our eyes." 

Teacher: "We must find out if Katie is right, and if it is 
really our eyes which see. Shut your eyes. Can you see 
now ? 

"No, we cannot see if our eyes are shut tight. Keep them 
shut a moment more. I am going to take something in my 
hand. Xow open 
your eyes and look 
at it. How many- 
know what it is 
(showing the bit of 
round color in her 
open palm) ? 

" I will tell you. 
It is a wafer. 

" We will play that each of us has a little servant who shows 
the wafer to us, and that her name is Sally Seeing." 

We give her this name because she sees for us. 

Bring out the idea that a servant is a helper. 

Teacher : " Let us try to think how Sally Seeing helps. We 
want to find out something about this wafer. Does Sally 
Seeing show you a white wafer ? " 

No, it is red. 

Teacher : "Sally Seeing is right. This good little servant has 




({4 %$ 





110 FIRST YEAR 

told us its color. Can Sally Seeing tell us if the checkerberry 
wafer is large like this big peppermint lozenge, or smaller ? " 

Sally Seeing says it is smaller. 

"I wish it was as big, if you are going to give it to me," 
pipes a little candy -lover. 

Teacher : " Can Sally Seeing tell us its shape ? " 

Sally Seeing says it is round. 

Teacher : " Could Sally Seeing show anything very well if 
you w r ere sleepy ? " 

If we were sleepy, Sally would be sleepy too, because she is 
our eyes. 

Teacher: "If the room were full of smoke, could Sally do 
her work well, and help us see ? " 

Smoke hurts so we cannot see well ; a good deal of smoke 
makes us shut our eyes. Sally Seeing cannot help us find out 
about things if our eyes are shut. 

Teacher: "Would tobacco smoke help Sally do her work 
well ? " 

Tobacco smoke makes our eyes smart. Sally Seeing does 
not like it, for then she cannot do good work. 

Tell the class that doctors have found that tobacco hurts the 
eyes, and sometimes makes people who smoke almost blind. 
Cigarettes which boys smoke hurt the eyes too. Poor little 
Sally Seeing has a very hard time trying to work for boys who 
smoke. 

It is not good for the eyes to be in a closed room where 
people are smoking. 

LESSON 27. —FEELING 

Teacher: "Shut your eyes, and send Sally Seeing away. 
She has worked hard enough, and we must try to find another 
little servant to help us. Keep your eyes shut. Willie, I will 
put something into your hand, and you may tell me what it is 
without looking at it." 



THE FIVE SENSES 



111 



Willie: "It is the wafer." 

Teacher: "You are right. Pass the wafer along until all 
can tell the wafer by feeling." 

Teacher: "Here is another little servant. TVe will call her 
Fanny Feeling." 

Question as before until the class agree that it is Fanny 
Feeling who helps them to find out that the wafer is smooth, 
hard, round, and small ; that it is Fanny 
Feeling who tells them when they have 
a toothache or a headache, and can tell 
them very quickly when the head and 





tooth stop aching. If Fanny Feeling is awake she can tell 
us when we burn a foot or a finger, but if she were asleep 
she would know nothing about it. People have sometimes 
been burned to death because Fanny Feeling was asleep. 

Alcohol puts Fanny to sleep when she ought to be awake. 
Tobacco hurts Fanny, and makes her sick and lazy. Whole- 
some food to eat and water or milk to drink will keep her wide 
awake and active in the daytime, but we must see that she 
goes to bed early at night. 



LESSON 28. — TASTING 

Teacher: "Shut your eyes and put your hands behind you. 
I will put a piece of wafer into your mouths. Tell me some- 
thing about it which we have not learned before." 

I taste the wafer. 



112 



FIRST YEAR 



The wafer is sweet. 

Tommy Tasting may now be added to the list of serv- 
ants. 

A little lesson on self-control should follow. Question until 
the class agree that Tommy Tasting cannot be trusted always, 
and that if he urges us to eat too much candy because it tastes 
sweet and good, we must say no to him. We must learn what 
is good and what is not good for us, so that we may keep 
Tommy Tasting from making mistakes. We must teach 
Tommy to be a good servant. 

Teacher: "Could Tommy tell you how a nice ripe pear 
tastes if your mouth had been burned ? 

"Tommy Tasting gives us a great deal of pleasure if we 
treat him well. He tells us how good our dinner is ; what a 

lovely flavor the ripe ap- 
v\\ pies, peaches, grapes, and 
l£yyj$Sr^ pears have; he told you 
that the pieces of wafer I 
put into your mouths had 
a good checkerberry flavor. 
Tommy Tasting is a very good fellow if only 
he is treated rightly. But people sometimes 
treat Tommy so badly he cannot tell them about these good 
things. When they drink a liquor which has alcohol in it, 
as wine, beer, or cider, it hurts Tommy, and he cannot tell 
so well how other things taste. Tommy cannot tell the boys 
or men who smoke or chew tobacco how good their dinner 
really is, so they lose more pleasure from smoking and drink- 
ing than they get." 

Alcohol and tobacco hurt Tommy Tasting because they are 
poisonous. 

If Tommy Tasting is to be a good little servant for us, we 
must not take either alcohol or tobacco. 

How many little servants have we found already ? What 




THE FfVE SENSES 



113 



is the name of the first one? What does Sally Seeing do 
for us ? 

What is the name of the second little servant? What does 
Fanny Feeling do for us ? How do we know when to put on 
our heavy coats and jackets ? Could Fanny Feeling tell us it 
is cold and we need our overcoats if she were asleep ? What 
sometimes puts Fanny Feeling to sleep when she ought to be 
awake ? What sometimes makes Fanny Feeling sick so she 
cannot work ? 

What is the name of the third little servant ? What does 
Tommy Tasting do for us ? What must we teach Tommy in 
order to make a sood little servant of him ? 



LESSON 29.— HEARING AND SMELLING 

Teacher : " Shut your eyes and mouths, and put your hands 
behind you so that Sally Seeing, Fanny Feeling, and Tommy 
Tasting will not know what 
we are doing. Be very still 
and tell me what I am doing 
with this wafer." 

You are breaking the wafer. 

Teacher: "How do you 
know I am breaking 
wafer ? " /V'T 




a^ 9 



ins the <f^om^t 

I hear you break the wafer. ^ 

Teacher: "Very well; we will add Hatty Hearing to our 
list of servants." 

How do we know when the clock strikes ? When the 
bells ring ? What little servant tells us when a dog barks ? 
You may each name a way in which Hatty Hearing helps 
us. 

We train this little servant to do better work when Ave pay 
attention to what is said. 



Oil. LESS. IN HY. I 



114 



FIRST YEAR 



Alcohol and tobacco will make Hatty Hearing so dull and 

stupid that she will not listen well, or tell us what we ought 

to hear. 

Smelling 

Teacher: "One more little servant can tell us something 
the other four have not found out. 

" Lucy, I am going to put this wafer close to your nose. 
You may tell me something new about it." 
Lucy: "I smell checkerberry in the wafer." 
When the wafer has been passed along, and all have become 
familiar with its odor, Sammy Smelling is introduced. By 

questioning show that it is 
he who tells when mamma 
is cooking something we 
like for dinner ; that it is 
Sammy Smelling who tells 
us how sweet or fragrant 
vV^^ ^~~ — \ the flowers are ; when food 

is spoiled and unfit to eat; 
when the air indoors is bad 
and should be changed; when we should go out to play and 
get the nice fresh air. 

Next, tell the children that tobacco hurts Sammy Smelling ; 
that the one who uses alcoholic drinks and tobacco cannot 
smell so well the fragrant flowers and the nice cooking, be- 
cause tobacco and alcohol make Sammy Smelling dull or send 
him away so he cannot do his part. 




MEMORY POINTS 



These five little servants are called our Five Senses. 

Through them we learn what ice know of this world. 

We must help them to do good icork. 

Alcohol and tobacco injure all the senses. 

It is wrong to use anything that will dull these little servants. 



THE FIVE SENSES 115 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 
Alcohol dulls the Senses 

Alcohol diminishes the acuteness of all the senses. Half a 
small glass of wine impairs feeling, vision, and sensibility to 
weight, — Charles H. Shepard, M.D. 

The use of alcohol blunts the delicate and swift perception 
of the physical senses. — R. Hixgstox Fox, M.D. 

Tobacco injures the Sight 

The use of tobacco may help to cause defective color sense. 

— London Lancet. 

LESSON 30. — REVIEW QUESTIONS 

Why should we sit, stand, and walk properly ? 
What are the best drinks for children ? 
What may happen to the boy who uses tobacco? 
What do we need to make us grow ? 
Why do we need food ? 

Why is cider a bad drink, while apples are good to eat ? 
What are the parts of the body ? 
How should the head be taken care of ? 
How can every one have a pleasant face ? 
Why do we need joints in our arms and legs ? 
Why should we keep every part of our bodies clean ? 
Name the good uses of grains ? 

How do the rum, beer, and whisky made from these grains 
hurt people ? 

What are the parts of the leg ? of the foot ? 

How can we help our limbs to grow strong and firm ? 

What do we learn through our senses? 

Why is it wrong to do anything which will injure them ? 



SECOND YEAR TOPICS 



I. 


The Body as a Whole 










PAGE 

117 


II. 


Food .... 










129 


III. 


The Sense of Taste . 










. 134 


IV. 


The # Grape and Wine 










141 


V. 


The Eye 










146 


VI. 


The Voice . 










157 


VII. 


The Ear 










160 


VIII. 


The Nose . . 










168 


IX. 


The Sense of Touch . 










172 


X. 


Tobacco 










178 


XI. 


Beer .... 










184 



116 



SECOND YEAR > 
THE BODY AS A WHOLE 
LESSON 1. — PARTS OF THE BODY 

Teacher: "Suppose this picture on the board were a real 
live child like one of you, and we were to invite him to take 
dinner with us. What parts of his body would he need to use 
in eating? Come to the board and point to them. What parts 
would he use in catching a ball ? in riding a bicycle ? in 
drawing a long breath ? in laughing ? Point to each of these 
parts. What parts of the body have we not named ? " 

Ask each child to name something he likes to do, then to 
tell what parts of the body he uses in doing it. 

Compare the human body in various ways with that of ani- 
mals. Name animals which are larger than man ; those which 
are smaller. Who can think of an animal whose body is all 
in one piece ? If no one can do this, show an oyster and ask 
the class to find whether it has any distinct head or legs. 
How many parts are there in the body of an eel or a snake ? 
How many in a caterpillar ? in a frog ? a boy ? 

What parts of the body can we bend ? What do we call 
these parts ? Find the joints in your arms ; your legs. What 
other joints are there in the body. What is the use of each 
joint ? 

W T hat animals have their bodies composed of the same gen- 
eral parts as man ? What differences can be thought of 
between the body of a horse and the human body ? Which 
can run faster ? Which can stand upright ? Which has 

117 



118 



SECOXD YEAR 



hands ? which is stronger ? which has the better brain, and 
can think and learn more quickly ? 

Name as many acts of animals as yon can think of. Make 
a blackboard list of these. Ask the children to come to the 
board, one at a time, and check off from this list everything 
which man can do. Which is more skillful and able to do the 
greater number of things, man or the lower animals ? 

How many have seen a person who has lost a finger, an arm, 
or a leg ? What parts can be taken away and the person still 
live ? What parts would cost a person his life if he should be 
deprived of them ? 

What parts does a person need to do the best work ? 



LESSON 2. — REPAIR OF THE BODY 

Teacher: "Suppose our boy on the blackboard lived in a 
real house, and he were to find some day that his house was 

all coming to pieces ; 
&$tii holes in the roof where 

the rain could come in, 
plastering coming off the 
walls, and everything 
about the place untidy 
and disagreeable. What 
would you advise him 
to do ? " 

He might build a new 
house. 

He could mend the old 

roof and repair the house 

he now lives in. 

He might buy another house and move into that. 

Teacher: "He could do any of these things if he had 

money enough, but how is it with our bodies ? We have to 




THE BODY AS A WHOLE 111) 

live in them all the time, just as a turtle lives in his shell. 
If we hurt them or wear them out, can we buy new bodies ? 
Can we even repair them so they will be as good as new ? I 
am afraid they would always look patched and show that we 
had not taken good care of them. I know a man who has 
lived in the same house for seventy-one years, and it is just as 
strong and comfortable now as it ever was. How do you sup- 
pose he has kept it in such good condition ? " 

It was built strong in the first place. 

He has had it repaired just as soon as anything needed to be 
done. 

Teacher: "These are two good reasons why his house has 
lasted so long. I wonder why it is that some people's bodily 
houses last so much longer than others'.' 7 

Jasper : " Perhaps it's because they take better care of them. 
But I don't see how people can take care of that kind of a 
house." 

Teacher : " Let us see if we can find out. In the first place, 
what are houses built of ? " 

Class: "Mine is built of stone." 

" Our house is made of wood." 

" Ours is brick." 

Teacher: " These are all good materials for houses, and when 
they are worn in any place we can put in a new brick or board 
and make them almost as good as new. Our bodies get worn 
too, with all our work and play, and need repair. Only the other 
morning I heard a little girl trying to tell how hungry she was. 
She said, 6 Oh, mother, there is such a big hole in my stomach, 
I can't wait any longer for breakfast.' 

" You couldn't mend that kind of a hole with wood or stone. 
What do you suppose her mother did use ? 

"Yes, we need food to make good the waste of our bodies, 
— bread and butter and milk and eggs and fruit and fresh 
vegetables and meat." 



120 SECOND YEAR 

Who has been in a mill and watched the men at work? 
Grain is put in at one end of the mill and comes out at the 
other fine white flour, all ready to be made into bread. Some- 
thing like that happens to our food when we eat. We put it 
into our mouths, and in a very little time it doesn't look in the 
least like beef or potato. It has been ground very fine by our 
teeth and mixed with different juices until it is ready to be 
made a part of the arm that we play ball with, or the legs 
that we run with. Every time we work or play or think we 
wear out tiny parts of our bodies, and every time we eat, our 
food goes to mend these worn-out parts, and make them as 
good as new. 

LESSON 3.— NEED OF EXERCISE AND REST 

There are other ways in which we can take care of these 
wonderful bodies of ours. Let us think what they are. 

Sometimes you have chicken for dinner. Have you noticed 
a difference in color between the meat on a chicken's leg and 
that on his wing ? Which meat is more tender ? Which part 
did the chicken use more ? Why does a horse have very 
strong legs ? How do a baby's arms get strong ? 

By such questions develop the idea that every part of the 
body grows strong by exercise. 

Many children are unwilling to go to bed at an early hour. 
They must be taught that plenty of sleep in the first part of 
the night is another important essential to growth. Show 
them the picture in this lesson of little Jessie Hilton, and tell 
them how she got her bright face and clear complexion. 

Early to Bed 

Jessie Hilton was never ready to go to bed. "Let me sit 
up just a few minutes longer," she used to beg her mother 



THE BODY AS A WHOLE 



121 



when seven o'clock came. "It's so early, and I'm not one bit 
tired." 

One night Mrs. Hilton called Jessie to see the new dress 
she had just finished for her. The child was delighted. 

"Now I won't have to wear my old one any more/' she 
said. "Fm so glad, for it's almost worn out." 

" How is it that little girls don't wear out as well as dresses ? " 
asked her mother. " I should think they would, running about 
and playing as hard as they do every 
day." 

" How funny ! " laughed Jes- 
sie. " Of course they don't 
wear out, 'cause, 'cause 
they're alive, I guess." 

"That is one reason," 
said Mrs. Hilton. "But 
they wouldn't stay alive ;•;$ 
very long if they romped 
and played all the time. 
Every time you run or 
jump, or even move, you 
are wearing out your body 
whether you feel tired or 
not, and these worn places have 
to be kept mended. We don't 
use cloth and needles and thread 

to repair our bodies as we do to mend dresses. A good break- 
fast and dinner will answer the purpose much better, but 
something else is necessary besides food, and that is sleep. 
If we get all the rest and sleep we need every night, this 
will give our bodies a chance to grow, and they will be even 
stronger than they were before." 

" Is that why you make me go to bed early ? " asked Jessie ; 
" so I won't wear out ? " 




122 SECOND YEAR 

"That's just it," said her mother. "I want my little girl 
to have bright eyes and rosy cheeks and a strong, active body, 
so I take care that she gets a good long sleep every night, with 
plenty of fresh air in her room." 

Do you want to know how Mrs. Hilton's -plan succeeded ? 
She had Jessie's picture taken that summer, and here it is. - 
Don't you think she looks like a healthy little girl ? 

LESSON 4. — NEED OF CLEANLINESS 

Make neatness and cleanliness the fashion. Commend those 
who come to school with hair nicely combed, face, hands, and 
nails clean, and with spots washed off their clothes, and shoes 
brushed. It is marvelous to note the growing and healthful 
desire which may be developed even in young children to 
improve their personal appearance. 

How Dan got his Cherries 

Baby Marion had found a prize. She trudged out to the old 
cherry tree one morning, hoping to find some of the ripe fruit 
low enough for her to reach, and there on the ground was a 
newspaper nearly full of bright red cherries. Here was luck 
indeed. Just as she had gathered her treasures into her arms, 
along came Dan Evans with both hands in his pockets. When 
he saw Marion he gave a low whistle of surprise. She had his 
cherries. 

Dan was only a rough boy, but he never thought of taking 
his property away from a little girl, neither did he want to 
lose those cherries. He flung himself down on the grass to 
think the matter over. 

Marion drew back a little. She was afraid of boys, and Dan 
looked tumbled and dirty. Perhaps he would take her cherries 
if he got a chance. But Dan never moved. Marion ate one or 
two, then she began to feel a 'little selfish. 



THE BODY AS A VVIIOLK 



123 



"If you were a nice clean boy/' she said after a while, "I'd 
give you some cherries." 

Dan grinned till he showed all his teeth. 

"Am I dirty? 7 ' he said. "Wait a minute then, and I'll 
clean up." 

He scrubbed his face and hands vigorously in the brook 
near by, then presented himself again to the little maid. 




" Will I do now ? " he asked. 

Marion held out a big cherry for reply, and soon the two 
children were eating away in the most friendly fashion. 

"Do you know what made me look so bad?" Dan asked 
after a while. " I got all tumbled up picking those cherries 
this morning." 

" Were they yours all the time ? " said Marion. " Then I 
like you 'cause you didn't take them away from me, but I like 
you better now you're clean." 

Name some of the ways in which the hands and face get 
soiled. Can we work or play at anything and keep perfectly 



124 SECOND YEAR 

clean ? Why do we need to bathe often ? Why should the 
hands and face be washed before meals ? Why do we need 
clean hands in school ? clean faces ? How do birds keep 
clean ? What animals have yon seen take a bath ? 

How do the pretty flowers and plants in our gardens keep so 
fresh and bright ? How do they look when it has been dry 
and dusty for a long time ? What do the crops in the fields 
and the grass on our lawns need to keep them fresh and 
green and growing ? How do we keep our streets and houses 
clean ? How do we clean our soiled clothing ? the dishes 
from which we eat our food ? 

Get from the children as many reasons as you can why 
cleanliness is both desirable and necessary. 

A large china doll can be used as an object lesson in show- 
ing how every part of the face, neck, and hands should be 
washed ; how the ears should be kept clean and how the nails 
should be cared for to keep them neat and of the proper length. 
Give only a few of these facts at a time, but emphasize by 
repeated drills until each child knows just how to keep his 
own hands and face clean. 

At the same time, do not neglect to instruct the class as 
to the proper place for cleaning the nails, remembering that 
many children have little or no training in etiquette at 
home. 

Ask the children what kind of men and women they would 
like to be when grown. All will want to be tall and strong, 
with clear eyes, quick ears, and able to think well and readily. 
Bring out these facts, then write on the board at their dicta- 
tion a review of the essentials to such growth and development 
already brought out in this lesson. 

How many have a bird at home or some other pet? Let 
them decide whether their pets need proper kinds of food, 
plenty of sunshine, a chance to exercise and rest, water, to 
drink and bathe in, in order to grow and keep well. Would 



THE BODY AS A WHOLE 125 

it be a good plan to feed them anything which might make 
them sick, or stop their growth? Ought we to be any less 
careful of ourselves than of our pets ? Who can give a reason 
why children should never taste beer or any other liquor which 
has alcohol in it ? 

LESSON 5. — THE TEETH 

Have ready on the board drawings of the teeth as they 
appear in each jaw, also an enlarged drawing of a single tooth. 
Ask the children to come one at a time to the board and find 
some of the differences between the front and back teeth. 

Why do we need teeth with thin sharp edges in front ? 
Which teeth do we use mostly in chewing our food ? How are 
they shaped ? What kind of teeth has the cat ? the horse ? 

Bring to the class a tooth and show the hard smooth sub- 
stance which covers it. Explain how this keeps the tooth strong 
and well and prevents it from aching, just as the skin on our 
bodies keeps them from getting hurt. Tell the class that this 
covering is very thin, and that if we bite hard substances with 
our teeth we may crack it or even split it off in places ; then 
the tooth will soon ache. 

Show that clean teeth and a clean mouth are necessary 
because the inside of the mouth is so warm that bits of food 
left there soon begin to spoil and hurt the teeth. Explain 
just how the toothbrush should be used, first up and down 
the teeth, then across them both front and back. 

Teach the children to brush their teeth gently but thoroughly 
after each meal, using a soft brush and plenty of warm water, 
taking care to clean the back side of the teeth as well as the 
front. Show them also how to remove particles from the 
spaces between the teeth by using bits of floss silk. 

Tell them the story of Colonel Roosevelt and his Rough 
Riders as they went into the battle at El Caney. All the 



126 SECOND YEAR 

luggage had to be left behind except the mackintoshes 
which protected the men from the heavy rains, but they 
needed their toothbrushes so much that they stuck them into 
their hatbands and carried them in this way rather than go 
without them. Form a toothbrush brigade in your own school 
for each boy and girl to join who will try to take as good 
care of their teeth as did this regiment of United States 
soldiers. 

LESSON 6. — CIGARETTES SPOIL THE TEETH 

Arthur's mother has taught her little boy to take care of 
himself in a great many ways. In warm weather he often 
goes barefooted, but he always washes his own feet and hands 
and brushes his teeth before he goes to bed. 

One night he started up to bed with his arms full. His pet 
kitten, Muff, and Towser the puppy, sleep in little baskets 
just outside Arthur's door. He tried to carry them both up- 
stairs at once and his Noah's Ark too, but he soon found that 
this was too much of a load for a little boy, and Towser had 
to be left behind to do his own climbing. 

When his mother came up to tuck him into bed, he asked 
if Muff and Towser didn't need to have their teeth brushed. 

Mrs. Grant told him that dogs and cats know how to keep 
themselves clean better than any one can do it for them. 
They are very neat and nice in all their ways if given an 
opportunity, much more so than many people. You never 
saw a dog with black teeth ; the}^ are always white and shin- 
ing like ivory. One reason is that dogs never smoke cigarettes 
or chew tobacco. 

No one who uses tobacco will have nice teeth very long. 
They soon have a dirty yellow color which quite spoils their 
looks. Then we cannot get them clean, no matter how care- 
fully we brush them. There is a strong odor about them, 
too, which no one likes. Tobacco users often spit out the 



THE BODY AS A WIIOLK 



127 



juice on the sidewalks or in other places where people must 
walk. No one who wishes to be truly clean will smoke 
cigarettes or use tobacco in any way. 

The Care of the Hair 

Read to the class the following story of the " Snarlies " and 
then sketch Mrs. Brush and Mr. Comb on the board. This pic- 
ture, with an occasional allusion to 
the story, will be of great aid in 
keeping snarls out of the children's 
hair. 



The Snarlies got into a little girl's ^\ 

hair ; 
They said, "Let us make us a little 

nest there." 
Mrs. Brush came along, and she said, 

"Oh, no, 
This little girl's hair was not meant to 

look so." 




c^ 



(L- 



The Snarlies determined that there they would stay ; 
They wanted to sleep, and they wanted to play. 
So they said, " Mrs. Brush, you are not doing right ; 
If you don't go away, we will tie you up tight ; 
To stay in this hair is our greatest delight." 

So then Mrs. Brush sent for good Mr. Comb, 
And asked him to help send the Snarlies all home ; 
And together they drove every Snarly away, 
And told them in some other place they must stay ; 
Then wasn't that little girl happy and gay ! * 

There will be no difficulty in persuading the class that well- 
combed hair looks better than snarls, and, by an encouraging 
word and smile now and then, in commendation of those who 



1 Charlotte E. L. Slccltm. 



128 SECOND YEAR 

have tried to make themselves tidy, quite a change may be 
wrought in the general appearance of the class. 



MEMORY POINTS 

Our bodies are made up of many parts because we have many 
different tilings to do. 

Our bodies are all the time wearing out because ice use them so 
much. 

We need plenty of wholesome food to keep them in repair. 

Exercise helps every part of the body to grow strong. 

Children need plenty of sleep. 

Fresh air and sunshine aid growth. 

Every part of the body should be kept clean. 

The hair and teeth should be well brushed every day. 

Cigarettes spoil the teeth and turn them yellow. 

Alcohol and tobacco hurt the body and stunt its growth. 



EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Cleanliness 

Cleanliness covers a large part of the field of sanitary labor. 
Cleanliness, that is purity of air ; cleanliness, that is purity of 
water ; cleanliness in and around the house ; cleanliness of 
person ; cleanliness of dress ; cleanliness of food and feeling ; 
cleanliness in work ; cleanliness of life and conversation ; 
purity of life, temperance, — all these are in man's power. 
Modern knowledge of bacteria has given enormous impetus 
to cleanliness in medicine. — Journal of Hygiene. 

The stunted growth, the increasing number of weak, sickly 
children, arrested alike in their moral and their physical devel- 
opment, and the increase of crime — all these are to be laid at 
the door of alcoholism. — X. S. Davis, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S.' 



FOOD 129 

Alcohol destroys the body and undermines the health. — 
A. Baer, M.D., Royal Sanitary Commissioner, Berlin. 

The tobacco habit is injurious to health, to scholarship, and 
to character. It weakens the will, diminishes the power of 
application, and lowers the tone of thought and feeling. 
Excessive smokers are uniformly poor scholars. — -W. D. 
Hyde, D.D., President of Bowdoin College. 



FOOD 
LESSON 7. — WHAT FOOD IS FOR 

Teacher (holding a doll) : " I must tell you what happened 
to Doll Marion last week. 

" My little niece took her to play in the orchard and forgot 
to carry her home. The next clay she went to my uncle's for 
a little visit. The day she came home her brother found 
Marion in a bush and brought her to me. 

"You may look at her carefully and see if she has been 
harmed." 

Carrie: "Her clothes are rather soiled and she looks as if 
she had been out in the rain, but I don't think she is hurt at 
all." 

Teacher : " Suppose Carrie had been left alone in the fields 
or woods as the doll was, with no food for a week, with no 
shelter from sun and rain, what would have happened to 
her?" 

" She would have died just as the i Babes in the Wood ' 
did," said Ada. 

Teacher: "But here's Doll Marion as gay and smiling as 
ever." 

Percy: "She's only a doll; she isn't alive. A doll doesn't 
eat." 

OR. LESS. IN HY. 9 



130 SECOXD YEAR 

Teacher : " Suppose Daisy doesn't feed her canary or Donald 
his dog for a week — what then ?" 

Cecille : " They would both die." 

Teacher : " What do living things need to keep them alive ? " 

All living creatures from the great elephant down to the 
tiniest insect must take food to keep them alive. 

Teacher: "Suppose I put Carrie in a -room and give her a 
little food — just enough to keep her alive. Will that be all 
that is necessary? " 

Norman: "No, indeed, she would be hungry all the time 
and cry." 

Teacher : " If I asked her to carry a heavy basket for me 
when she had not had enough to eat, could she do it ? " 

Guy : " She would be too weak, she could not carry it." 

Teacher : " What does food do besides keeping us alive ? " 

Mabel: "It makes us strong." 

Teacher : " There was once a little boy who lived in a dark 
alley in a great city. This child was very small, no larger 
than children usually at five. One could hardly believe he 
was nine years old. 

" He went into the country to stay with a kind farmer and his 
wife. There he had all the good food he wanted, and in two 
months he had to have a new suit of clothes although he had 
not worn out the one he came in. Why was this ? " 

Hugh : "I think he grew fast." 

Teacher : " That is it ; the good food and air and sunshine 
began to change him at once from a puny, thin, undersized 
child, to the size he should have been." 

LESSON 8. — WHAT TO EAT 

Show a picture of a cow grazing, another of a girl or boy at 
a table eating bread and milk. 

Call attention to the first and ask, What is the cow eating ? 



FOOD 



131 



What is the child eating ? Suppose Lillie and Tom went into 
the pasture and tried to make a dinner of grass, or into the 
barn and munched the dry hay, as the cow does, would they 
thus get a good dinner? Would the cow like bread and milk 
as well as hay ? 

Explain that God has provided the food needed for every 
living creature, and such food as each needs to build it up, 
to repair the waste, and keep it strong. What do birds eat ? 
What does the Eskimo eat ? 

The Eskimo lives in a cold country and eats foods that 
make fat because he needs 
such to keep him alive in 
the great cold. 

People in cold countries 
need fatty and oily food 
to keep the body warm. 

People in warm coun- 
tries eat fruit and vege- 
tables which keep the 
body cool. 

A mixed diet is best 
in countries partly hot, 
partly cold. 

In the winter we should take food that will protect the body 
against the cold. 

In the summer we should take less fatty food and should eat 
cooling fgods : grains, vegetables, fruit, and only a little meat. 

What foods do most to build up the body and keep it 
strong ? 

Milk, bread from whole grains, fruit, vegetables, and meat. 




A Good Breakfast for a Child 

Fruit, oatmeal, cream, bread, eggs. 



132 SECOND YEAR 

A Good Lunch 

Pea or bean soup, bread, fruit — raw or stewed — and very 
light plain cake. 

A Good Dinner 

Meat — beef or lamb. 

Vegetables — potatoes, beans, or peas in season. 
Salad — lettuce or other green vegetable dressed with oil and 
a little lemon juice. 

Dessert — fruit stewed or raw, or a very simple pudding. 

LESSON 9. — WHEN WE SHOULD EAT AND HOW MUCH 

Explain that what we eat goes into the stomach, and that 
the stomach has to get the food ready to make us strong and 
well and keep us alive. 

Ask the children how they would like to be called in every 
time they went out to play, to clo some piece of work. Would 
they like to be awakened in the middle of the night to work ? 

The stomach needs times of rest as well as other parts of the 
body. If we make it work at any and every time it becomes 
tired, gets sick, and works poorly ; sometimes it refuses to 
work at all. 

Suppose mother said, " I'll not get breakfast until ten o'clock 
when you are in school ; " would you like it ? How often should 
Ave eat ? 

Develop the idea of regularity in work and play. Show how 
much in life depends upon doing things at the right time and 
place. Make plain the idea of confusion that arises when 
things are done irregularly. Show that irregularity in eating 
causes confusion in the stomach. Teach that because things 
do not distress us at the time we take them, that is no sign 
they are harmless. Nature does not always require her bills 
paid on presenting. 



food 133 

memory points 

Every living thing needs food. 

Fond keeps us alive, makes us grow, and gives us strength. 
In warm weather we should choose fruits and vegetables for a 
large part of our food. 

In temperate climates a mixed diet is best. 

Very rich food is not good for the body. 

In the morning the body is rested from the night's sleep and 
needs food to strengthen it for the work of the day. 

At noon the body needs food to supply what has been nsed up 
during the morning hours. 

At night ice need food to supj)ly what has been lost during the 
afternoon, and ivhat will be needed during the long hours of 
resting at night. 

Grown people, and children large enough to go to school, wiw 
are in good health, do not usually need to eat between meeds. 

Do not keep nibbling at all times. 

A stomach that is icell treated mill be a good friend for life. 

Alcohol and tobacco are not foods; they are bad for the 
stomach. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Alcohol is not a Food 

Alcohol is not in any sense a true food-stuff. Containing no 
nitrogen, it cannot contribute to the muscular, the nervous, or 
the glandular systems. It fails to meet the demand of the 
body for proteid material, and so supplies no necessity of life. 
— A. F. Blaisdell, M.D. 

Brimstone can be burned in the furnace of a steam engine, 
but it would not be proper fuel, and would destroy the engine. 
So alcohol is not entitled to be called a food, as, even if burnt, 
it does harm to the apparatus. — Lauder Bruntox, M.D., 
F.E.S. 



134 SECOND YEAR 

Alcohol does not build up the Body- 
Neither alcohol nor tobacco supplies any material for the 
growth or repair of organized structures. Their presence 
diminishes the activity of both vegetable and animal nutri- 
tion and growth.— N. S. Davis, M.D., LL.D., F.E.S. 

Alcohol injures Growing Tissue 

According to the highest authorities, alcohol exerts an exceed- 
ingly deleterious action on rapidly growing tissues, interfering 
with their nutrition, and preventing the development of their 
proper function. — G. Sims Woodhead, M.D. 



THE SENSE OF TASTE 
LESSON 10. — WHAT TASTE IS FOR 

Supply each child at the beginning of the recitation with a 
tiny gingersnap. Ask what they can tell about the ginger- 
snap by looking at it, then by touching, smelling, and last by 
tasting it. 

Using a similar device, bring out what the children know of 
the sense of hearing. 

Teacher : " Here are two apples ; one is sweet, the other is 
sour. Harry, which is the sour one ? w 

Harry : "I do not know." 

Teacher : " He cannot tell by the sense of sight which of 
these apples is the sweet one. Let us see if he can find out by 
the sense of touch." 

The teacher cuts the skin from a small place in each apple, 
and asks Harry to touch each at that point with his fingers, 
and to tell which the sweet one is. 

Harry: "They both feel alike." 



THE SENSE OF TASTE 135 

Develop the fact that neither the sense of sight nor of feel- 
ing can tell us which apple is the sweet one. 

Teacher : " How can Harry find out which is the sweet 
apple ? " 

He can tell which the sweet apple is by tasting it. 

What does taste tell us about a peanut which we could not 
find out in any other way ? 

Which one of our senses tells us that the kernels of green corn 
are good to eat, but that the husks which grow around them 
are not good ? 

The sense of taste tells us what is good to eat. 

Teacher: "Let us see if this sense tells us anything about 
things which are not good to eat. I will tell you a story which 
will help you to answer." 

Harold^ Maple Sugar 

" What do you think Uncle Frank tucked into my bag just 
before I came away ? " said Harold Wilson's mother to her 
eight-year-old son, the day after her return from a long visit 
in Vermont. 

" Something for me ? " cried Harold, dancing up and down 
in great excitement. " Oh, mother, do tell me what it is." 

"It's sweetness from the very heart of the maple woods," said 
Mrs. Wilson, smiling at his eagerness. " ]STow can you guess ? " 

"Maple sugar, maple sugar!" shouted Harold. "Please do 
tell me quick where it is ; it's been so long since I've had any 
I've forgotten almost how it tastes." 

"It is on the second shelf in the storeroom, just beyond 
the — " but Harold was out of sight and hearing. 

A moment later he flew back to his mother, spluttering and 
choking and crying between his sobs : — 

" 'Tisn't maple — sugar — 't all ; 't's nothing — but — old — 
brown — soap." 



136 



SECOND YEAR 



" Why, my dear boy, you got hold of the wrong package. 
The sugar is there. The cakes do look something alike, but it 
doesn't take very long to find out the difference when one has — " 

Let the children supply the word. 

What is the second thing which taste tells us ? 

The sense of taste tells us what things are not good to eat. 







» 



Does taste help us remember to eat our breakfast in the 
morning ? 

Xame some good wholesome foods which give us pleasure, 
and also some things which are unpleasant to the taste. 

Taste is meant to give us pleasure so that we may enjoy the 
food we need to eat. 

Teacher : " What kind of food does us more good, that which 
we like, or what is disagreeable ? " 



THE SENSE OF TASTE 



137 



Call attention to the fact that taste, as some one has said, is 
the "watchdog of the stomach/' whose duty it is to see that 
we do not eat what might do us harm. 

Wholesome food which is not pleasant to onr taste does not 
do us so much good as wholesome food which we like. 

Lead the class to see that a taste for wholesome food, which 
we may not like at first, may be cultivated, and that we should 
try to like such food as will make us grow and keep us strong 
and well. 



LESSON 11. — WHY HELEN DID NOT EAT HER CANDY 

It was the day after Christmas, and Helen was lost. Her 
mother called and called, but no Helen. At last she opened 
the door of the back parlor and 
saw a woe-begone little figure 
curled up on the sofa. 

" Oh, here you are," said 
her mother. "Just see 
what Aunt Kate has sent 
you — another box of 
candy." 

Most children would 
have been pleased, but < 
Helen wasn't ; she shook 
her head and began to cry. 

"Why, my dear, — " said 
her mother. Then she saw an 
empty box on the floor which told 
the whole story, for it had been full 
of candy that morning. | 

What was the matter with Helen, and how 
did her mother know what made her feel sick ? 




138 SECOND YEAR 

If we eat too much of anything just because it tastes good, 
we may lose our taste for it. 

How many of you ever tried to eat a very hot potato that 
burned your mouth ? What happens to our sense of taste at 
such times ? 

We cannot taste so w r ell when the mouth or tongue has been 
burned. 

This sense is so very delicate we must take care that it is 
not injured in any way. Mention some of the things which 
are most likely to hurt it and make it unfit to do its proper 
work. 

If the children cannot do this at once, help them by a few 
suggestive questions until they know that biting things such 
as pepper, mustard, spices, when taken in any but very small 
quantities, may injure the taste for good food. 

Tobacco will blunt and harm the sense of taste. 

Teacher : " If we injure this sense by such bad things, how 
will good food taste to us ? " 

Help the pupils to realize that when the taste has been hurt 
by alcoholic drinks or tobacco, good food will taste flat, and we 
cannot so w 7 ell enjoy its delicate flavors. 

Call attention to the fact that people who have injured their 
sense of taste by these drinks, very often use too much pepper 
or salt or mustard to make food taste as they think it ought, and 
in that way they blunt this sense still more and so lose much of 
the pleasure these things taken in small quantities are meant 
to give. 

Ask the children to name all the advantages and pleasures 
which alcoholic drinks and tobacco are supposed to give to 
people, and also those of which they deprive them. Write 
these on the board in two lists and strike a balance between 
them. This will form a very convincing argument for the 



THE SENSE OF TASTE 139 

fact that a person who uses alcoholic drinks or tobacco loses 
far more pleasure than he gains. 

Taste is one of the senses which we need most to control. 

Kead aloud to the class Mrs. Swing's Story of a Short Life, 
showing how one little boy, who had at first no idea of 
self-control and made every one around him miserable because 
he could not go to war and be a brave soldier, learned little by 
little to master his temper and speak softly when he was in 
pain, until every one came to love him and think him braver 
than if he had faced an enemy on the battlefield. 

Teach the children to see that in controlling themselves in 
the sense of taste, they have taken a long step toward self- 
mastery. 



LESSON 12. —TABLE MANNERS 

Children often feel that even the most common rules of 
table etiquette are arbitrary and unreasonable. It should be 
our aim to show that this is not the case, and to teach the 
relation which exists between such rules and the laws of 
hygiene and courtesy ; that it is neither healthful for ourselves 
nor polite to others to eat rapidly. 

Bring out the fact that our food needs to be well chewed 
and mixed with the juices of the stomach, if it is to do us 
good and make us grow strong and healthy. 

Teacher: " How many think it good table manners to be 
cross and glum over your breakfasts or dinners because you 
feel out of sorts or because the special kinds of food you 
like best are not served ? " 

We want sweet bright faces always when we come to the 
table. 

What should we talk about when we eat ? 



140 



SECOND YEAR 



Which meal tastes better, that which is made cheerful by 
pleasant talk and a good laugh now and then, or one eaten 
almost in silence ? 

Our food tastes better and does us more good when we are 
happy and talk pleasantly at the table. 

Make the noon lunch hour an object lesson in good table 
manners. If the teacher acts as hostess and her pupils as 




guests on such occasions, and if the illusion of play is kept up 
throughout, the hour may be made most enjoyable as well as 
instructive ; while the spirit of politeness and thou ghtf illness 
for others will become " natural to the children, not to be laid 
aside when the play is over, but going with them into their 
own homes as a leaven of refinement. 



MEMORY POINTS 



The sense of taste tells us the difference between foods. 

It tells its ivhat things are good and what are not good to eat. 

Taste helps us to enjoy our food. 



THE GRAPE AND WINE 141 

If we eat too much of any hind of food, we may lose our taste 
for it. 

Much pepper or spice of any kind will be likely to blunt the 
tast<\ 

Drinks which hare alcohol in them will hurt this sense. 
Tobacco harms the sense of taste. 
We must always control the sense of taste. 

Food tastes better and does as more good when it is eaten slowly. 
No one should come to the table feeling cross or angry. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Alcohol hurts the Senses 

Careful experiments have proved paralysis of the special 
senses of smell, taste, touch, sight, and hearing after small 
doses of alcohol. — Captain P. W. O'Gormax, D.P.H. Cantab. 

Alcohol diminishes the acuteness of all the senses. — 
Charles Shepard, M.D. 

Tobacco blunts the Sense of Taste 

The use of tobacco tends to blunt all the senses and to 
weaken the action of all the nerves of sensation. The persist- 
ent smoking of tobacco often renders a person almost incapa- 
ble of distinguishing flavors. — W. E. Baldwin, M.D. 



THE GKAPE AXD WINE 

LESSON 13.— OBJECT LESSON ON GRAPES 

Before this lesson is to be presented place upon the board 
a sketch of two bunches of grapes, putting a face with a smil- 
ing mouth on each grape in one bunch, and sad-looking faces 
with mouths turned down on the grapes of the other bunch. 



142 SECOXD YEAR 

Have also on hand grapes of different colors, a glass of 
grape jelly, a bunch of raisins, an apple, plum, or other fruit. 

Hold up the grapes and ask the class to describe their shape 
and color. Find what other kinds of grapes they have seen 
and tasted. Bring out the following facts by questions and 
illustration : — 

There are purple grapes, and others which are red, white, 
green, and black. 

Some grapes are round, and some are shaped like plums. 

Grapes have a tough skin. 

There are seeds inside of grapes. 

A field that is planted with grapes is called a vineyard. 

Show the apple, plum, pear, and other fruits, and ask the 
children to compare their size, color, and taste, with that of 
the grape. 

What kind of grapes do you like best to eat ? 

Hold up the glass of jelly, ask what it is, and if they have 
ever seen it made. 

Show the bunch of raisins and find how many can tell what 
they are made from. 

Raisins are dried grapes. 

LESSON 14.— A VISIT TO THE VINEYARD 

Hazel and Fred Burton had just moved to California, where 
the big white grapes grow. Xot far from the house where 
they lived was a large vineyard, in the center of which stood 
a long, low house or shed. No one lived there, and the 
children often wondered what it was for. By and by the 
grapes began to ripen, and one day the children saw men and 
boys going through the vineyard, cutting the clusters of ripe 
grapes from the long rows of vines. Fred asked his father 
what they did with the grapes. 



THE GRAPE AND WINE 143 

" They are curing them for raisins, my son/' said his father ; 
" I will take you over to the vineyard and show you how it is 
done." 

The next day Fred, Hazel, and their father visited the vine- 
yard. They found large racks upon which clusters of grapes 
cut the day before were drying in the sun. In the shed, they 
found many girls sorting the dried grapes or raisins, and pack- 




ing them in boxes, ready to be sent away on the cars to all 
parts of the United States. 

Fred said he fancied the grapes were smiling on the racks, 
because they were going to be so sweet and nice for people to 
eat. 

"Yes," said his father, "the grapes look merry, and the 
owner looks merry, too. He knows he is making the best 
possible use of his grapes." 

Fred imagined that those grapes looked like this bunch 
(pointing to the picture on the board with the merry mouths). 



144 SECOND YEAR 

One clay when Mr. Burton and the children were riding 
through the country, they saw another vineyard which did not 
look like the first one. They got out of the buggy and went 
to see what the men were doing there. 

In this vineyard, instead of the racks for drying the raisins, 
there were several large presses in which the grapes were 
squeezed until all the juice had run out. 

"What are they going to do with all the juice, papa?" 
asked Fred. " Are they going to make lots and lots of jelly ? " 

"No, they do not boil the juice," said his father. "They let 
it stand, and after a few days it becomes changed. Alcohol 
is formed in it, and it is called wine. Some people drink wine, 
but the alcohol in the wine is a poison which may make the 
one who drinks it want more wine. This may hurt his body 
and brain so that he cannot work or think well. Wine often 
makes people do and say bad things. Sometimes people who 
have taken wine make others unhappy." 

" I do not believe those grapes want to be made into wine, 
to make people bad and unhappy," said Hazel, as one of the 
men passed by carrying a big basketful of the fruit. 

" It is too bad for men to make a bad drink out of grapes, 
when there are so many nice ways to use them," said her father. 
" We will eat the grapes and the raisins and never touch the 
wine." 

How Wine is Made 

Call the attention of the children to the dust on the skin of 
the grapes, and tell them about the little plants called fer- 
ments which are found in that dust. 

How many have seen moss growing on the trunks of trees, 
and on the roofs of cottages ? This moss is a tiny plant. 
Other little plants very much smaller than moss are found in 
the dust on the grapes, plants so small that we cannot see them 
without a strong glass called a microscope. 



THE GRAPE AND WINE 145 

Explain that just as the moss lias no means of getting into 
the heart of the tree, but lias to stay on the outside, so these 
other little plants which grow on the grapes cannot get through 
the skin to hurt the grape. 

Crush a few grapes in a cup and let the children see that 
the dust and the plants in it have been washed into the juice. 

Tell the class that these tiny plants or ferments, which do 
not hurt the grapes while the skin is unbroken, can change the 
grape juice when they get into it, until it loses its sweet taste 
and becomes a very different liquid. Part of the juice becomes 
a gas more like air than sugar, and another part becomes the 
sharp-tasting liquid called alcohol which Mr. Burton told the 
children about. 

Why does wine hurt those who drink it, when the grapes 
it is made from are so good to eat ? 

Under the picture of the unhappy grapes let us write some 
sentences, which show that a bad use of graj)es manes people 
very unhappy and sometimes causes them to say and do wicked 
things. Who can think of one ? 

MEMORY POINTS 

Grapes are of different colors and shapes. 

They grow on vines. 

Afield of grapes is called a vineyard. 

Ripe grapes are sweet and good to eat. 

Other good uses for grapes are to make them into jellies and 
sauces. 

Raisins are dried grapes. 

People get the grape juice by crushing the grapes and pressing 
it out. 

Little plants called ferments are found on the skin of the grape. 

When the juice is prressed out, these ferments can change the 
grape juice into a gas and alcohol. 

OR. LESS. IX HY. 10 



146 SECOND YEAR 

Tlie poison alcohol in wine hurts people who drink it 
Wine sometimes makes people who drink it do and say bad 
things. 

Wine has made many drunkards. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

In fermentation the juice of grapes is changed from being 
sweet and full of sugar into a vinous liquor which no longer 
contains any sugar. — Sir B. W. Richardson, M.D., LL.D. ; 
F.R.S. 

Vinous fermentation changes sugar into alcohol. Grape 
juice splits up into alcohol and carbonic acid. — Gustav 
Bunge, M.D., Basel, Switzerland. 

All alcoholic drinks are poisonous and injurious to health. 
They should never be used for beverage purposes. — H. New- 
ell Martix, M.D.j F.R.S. 



THE EYE 
LESSON 15. — PARTS OF THE EYE 

Dull children usually suffer from some physical defect. 

Test the eyes of all pupils and assign the most advantageous 
seats to those v T ho may be near-sighted. If spectacles seem 
necessary, suggest that an oculist be consulted at once. 

Teacher : " I am thinking about a part of the face. Let 
me tell you something about it while you try to guess what it 
is. It is shaped somewhat like a ball, but we can see only 
one side of it. Most of it is tucked away in a kind of bony 
cradle to keep it from getting hurt, for it is very delicate and 
precious. It is not fastened into its cradle so tightly that it 
cannot move at all. We can move it up and down and from 
side to side whenever we like. In the daytime it is almost 



THE EYE 147 

always in motion. A curtain lined with pink and edged with 
a curious sort of fringe hangs in front of it, and this can be 
let down to cover it all up when night comes and it needs to 
rest, or when anything comes near which might hurt it. 

" Who knows what a camera is ? This part of the face 
which I am telling you about is like a camera in some respects ; 
at least you can take pictures with it of anything you like, 
and you do take them all the time except when you are asleep. 

"How many know what part I am thinking about ? " 

The part of the face you are thinking of is the eye. 

Teacher : " To-day we are going to find out something new 
about these wonderful little cameras of ours, as we may call 
them. Arthur may draw the curtain and let us see what we 
have on the blackboard." 

When a good-sized drawing of the eye which has been pre- 
viously prepared is thus shown, the teacher continues: "I 
want some one to come to the board and find the part of the 
eye which takes pictures for us. Is it on the inside or the 
outside of the eye ? " 

If possible, have a small camera and let the children look 
through this at one another and at different objects in the 
room. 

Tell them there is something inside the machine which 
makes an exact picture of whatever is in front of it, and that 
in much the same way pictures of everything we look at are 
formed on the inside of the eye. 

Ask some child to find the spot in the drawing on the board 
where the light can get through to form these pictures. 

Teacher : " You may all rise by twos and look at each 
other's eyes for a moment. How many can see the place in 
them where the light gets to the inside ? " 

The light goes through the black spot in the middle. 

Teacher : " I wonder if you know w r hat this black spot is 
called. It is the pupil of the eye. 



148 SECOND YEAR 

" It is really a little hole to let the light into the eye, and in 
front of it there is something like a little window which lets 
the light shine right through, but keeps the dust out. You are 
looking at this little window when you see the sparkle in any 
one's eyes, and it is this which makes them look so bright." 

How many have noticed whether the pupil of the eye is 
always the same size ? Why is it larger at some times than 
at others ? 

What do we do when the sun shines too brightly in the 
room ? 

We pull down the curtain. 

This is just what our eyes do for us. Did you know we had 
curtains in them all around this little window we call the. 
pupil ? This colored part of the eye is a kind of curtain 
which almost covers the pupil. When the light is very strong, 
it lets in only a little. In the dark it opens very wide to 
admit a great deal of light. 

How many different colored eye curtains can you see ? 

How many have a pet cat at home ? Those who have may 
look at her eyes to-night, and you will see how this queer little 
curtain works. Put her into a dark room for a few minutes 
and then bring her out into the light where you can watch her 
eyes. Of course you will be sure to hold her very gently and 
not hurt or frighten kitty in any way. 

This beautifully colored eye curtain is called the iris. 

Teacher : " Take another look at the eyes of the one nearest 
you and tell me some other part which has not been named. 

" Frank is right; I meant the white of the eye. This part of 
our eyes is made quite hard and firm to help hold them in place." 

Name all the parts of the eye we have learned. 

The parts of the eye are — 

The pupil, a little black hole in the center of the eye which 
lets in the lisrht. 



THE EYE 



149 



The iris, a colored curtain which keeps too much light from 
getting into the rye. 

The white of the eye, which is firm and hard to help hold 
the eye in place. 



LESSON 16.— MABEL AND HER UMBRELLA 

One morning as a lady went down street she saw a little 
girl named Mabel with a large open umbrella. The little girl 
thought it would be great fun to play lady and carry the 




umbrella open. The wind blew very hard and almost blew 
the umbrella away from her, but she clung to it with both 
hands. By and by she wanted to turn around and go home, 
so she braced her feet hard against the ground, but the wind 
took her and the umbrella along. Poor' little Mabel, she needed 



150 SECOND YEAR 

help ! The lady shut the umbrella for her and found that she 
was crying hard, and that drops of water were coming out of 
her eyes. The lady wiped these drops off her face and led 
her home to her mamma. 

What do we call such drops of water ? Tears. 

What are tears ? 

Tears are drops of water that come into our eyes when we cry. 

When we feel bad, too much tear water comes into our eyes 
and runs out on our cheeks. A little of this tear water is 
coming into our eyes all the time, and when we wink it is 
spread around over our eyeballs to keep them moist. Who can 
tell what winking is ? 

Winking is shutting our eyes and opening them quickly. 

We have to wink to spread the tear water over our eyeballs. 
Here is another story about a little girl who cried : — 

Susie and the Dark 

One evening a lady heard a little girl, who had gone to bed, 
crying very loudly. The lady went to see what was the mat- 
ter. The little girl, whose name was Susie, said, " I don't 
like the dark." The light had gone out, and she could not 
see anything; that made her cry. The lady brought in 
another lamp, so that the room was light again. She wiped 
away Susie's tears, told her to shut her eyes, and then asked 
if everything seemed dark again. Susie said, " Yes ; when I 
shut my eyes, it is dark to me. I don't like the dark, I want 
to see. I am glad you brought in the lamp." The lady talked 
kindly, and told Susie there was no reason to be afraid in the 
dark. Susie listened, but she thought, "I like the light 
better." 

Teacher : " All of you who like the light better than the 
dark may stand up. 



THE EYE 151 

" I will stand with you, too, because I like the light. But 
when we are tired and need to sleep, the dark is better for 
our eyes than the light. For that reason the night is good as 
well as the day. But when we are rested, if we have good 
eyes and are well, we all like a bright, beautiful morning, 
because we like to see one another and the things about us. 

" Shut your eyes, and keep them shut until I say, Open. 
Your eyes are now shut ; does the room seem light or dark to 
you ? " 

The room seems dark when our eyes are shut. 

Teacher : " If anything were the matter with your eyes so 
that you could not see, it would always be dark to you. 

" Xow you may open your eyes again. 

" Why are you glad you have eyes and can see ? 

" What kind of eyes do you like best ? " 

Beautiful Eyes 

One day a man was walking on a crowded street ; his eyes 
were shut, he could not open them, and he could not have seen 
if he had opened them. He carried a cane right before him 
with which he seemed to feel the place to put his feet as he 
walked. 

What was the matter with this man ? He was blind. 
He came to a place where he had to cross the street. He 
could hear the feet of horses and the wheels of wagons and 
carriages in the way, but he could not see where or when he 
could safely cross. He stood on the edge of the street and 
looked troubled. 

A bright-eyed, happy boy, with his books in a strap on his 
way to school, saw the blind man, ran up to him, and said, " My 
name is Willie. I will be eyes for you and lead you over. 
Quick now, please, before that next horse and wagon get 
here." 



152 



SECOXD YEAR 



The blind man took Willie's hand, and. together they hurried 
safely across the street. As the blind man thanked him, he 




added, " I am glad 

you are not blind, 

Willie. I cannot 

see your eyes ; 

world is all dark 

to me, but I know 

that you have kind 

eyes and they are the most beautiful eyes in the world. 

What do we mean by kind eyes ? 

How can we have them as well as Willie ? 



LESSON 17.— TRAINING IN OBSERVATION 

Exercises in observation may be introduced at this point, the 
object of each being to develop in the children quickness and 
accuracy of perception. Send them one at a time to the door, 
or into another room for a moment, to notice everything in 
sight and then tell the class just what they have seen. 

Write short lists of familiar words or a sentence or two on 
the board, and after erasing them call for their reproduction 
from memory by the class. 

Vary these exercises by asking different pupils to stand 



THE EYE 153 

before the class and describe some object, while the others 
guess what it is from their description. 

Lesson in Color 

Write the names of the primary colors on the board one at 
a time and hold up strips of paper of the same color where all 
can see them. Ask the children to name all the objects they 
can think of which have this color, pointing out those which 
are in the room. 

When the seven principal colors have been learned in this 
way. show the class a prism, or let them see these colors in a 
glass of water upon which the sun is shining, and name them. 

Call attention to the next rainbow and ask the class to tell 
the colors they see in it. 

Have ready a box of different colored worsteds cut in short 
lengths for the children to sort as busy work. Ask them to 
match the colors exactly, then to arrange them in the follow- 
ing order — red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. 

How Tom learned to see Things 

At the dinner table one day, a little boy whose name was 
Tom told his parents that as he came from school he saw live 
boys playing marbles on the street in front of the brick church. 

Sam said, " Mother, I think something must be the matter 
with Tom's eyes ; he does not see straight." 

" Why do you say that ? " the mother asked. 

" Because/' Sam replied, "I came home right behind Tom 
and saw the same boys, and there were only four playing 
marbles, and not live, as Tom says. I don't suppose he meant 
to tell an untruth, so I think something is the matter with his 
eyes." 

" Oh, dear," said Tom, " Sam is so particular ; he wants me 
to tell just exactly how many I see every time, and everything 
just as it is ; I don't see what difference it makes." 



154 SECOXD YEAR 

" It makes the difference between telling what is true or what 
is not true, ray son," said his father, " and that is a great and 
serious difference. The boy who is careless about noticing 
exactly what he sees may not mean to tell an untruth when he 
tries to tell what he saw, but he will not be sure he is telling 
what is true. Now, Tom, for the rest of this week, I would 
like to have you and Sam tell us at the dinner table, each day, 
just what you see on the way home from school at noon." 

The mother said : (i I think that will be a very good exer- 
cise, and I hope my dear Tom will have seeing eyes that notice 
as well as see. I know he does not want to be one of those 
who < seeing, see not.' " 

When Tom kissed his mother good-by as he started back to 
school, he said, " Mamma, I do want seeing eyes, and I will try 
to beat Sam in telling what I truly see on the way home to 
dinner the rest of this week." 

LESSON 18. — CARE OF THE EYESIGHT 

Teacher: "If we are unfortunate enough to break off a 
tooth, we can go to the dentist's and have a new one put in. 
Suppose we should once lose our eyesight, would glasses or 
anything else help us to see ? 

" No, there is nothing to take the place of our eyes, so we 
must take good care of them that they may last as long as 
we live. 

" Who can think of some of the ways in which we may hurt 
our eyes ? 

" I will tell you a little story which will help to show you 
what I mean." 

How Dan hurt his Eyes 

Dan Benton was just getting well from an attack of the 
measles. He wanted to get up and play with the other boys, 



THE EYE 155 

but the doctor had said he must lie still in a dark room for 
another day or two. 

" Much he knows about how a fellow feels/' grumbled Dan 
to himself. " A little light won't hurt anybody, and I'm going 
to read my new book if I can't do anything else." 

Dan pushed open the blinds and read until Nora came in 
with his supper. " To-morrow I shall get up and have a good 
time," he thought ; " I'm not going to lie here forever." 

That night Dan woke up with a sharp pain in his eyes. 
They had never ached so before and he screamed for his 
mother. 

She bathed them in cool water, but they still hurt so much 
that the doctor had to be sent for. 

" You'll know enough to obey orders next time, won't you, 
young man ? " he asked, when he heard what Dan had been 
doing. 

"You'll have to keep those eyes of yours bandaged for 
several days yet if you want to get rid of that pain. It's lucky 
for you, you don't use tobacco, or your eyes would be a great 
deal worse than they are now. Have you heard about Burt 
Carter down at the Mills ? " 

" Xo ; what is the matter with him ? " asked Dan. 

" I'm afraid he's going to lose his eyesight," said the doctor. 
"He's been smoking cigarettes pretty steadily and drinking 
beer, and now his eyes are paying the penalty. They are 
going to take him to a city oculist to-morrow, but I'm afraid 
no one can help him." 

" Why, his eyes used to be as strong as anything," said Dan. 
" He could look right up at the sun when all the rest of us 
had to use smoked glass, and he says he always reads on the 
cars; I can't because it makes me dizzy." 

" He never will again," said the doctor. " He has abused 
his eyes too often, and now it looks as if he were going to be 
blind for the rest of his life." 



156 SECOND YEAR 

Dan looked pretty sober. "Miss Gray told us all these 
things in the physiology class," he said presently, "but we 
boys thought she was just trying to scare us; maybe she 
wasn't, though." 

" ISTo, indeed/' said the doctor, " she was telling you the 
truth ; you'd better be thankful you've found it out in time. 
If I had known as much at your age about the care of my 
eyes as you boys are learning in school, I shouldn't be 
wearing spectacles, I can tell you. You just tell the boys 
that." 

When Dan went back to school the physiology class was 
having a review lesson on the eyes, and his hand was the first 
to come up when Miss Gray asked who could tell some of the 
ways in which the eyes may be hurt. 

MEMORY POINTS 

The eye takes pictures of everything toe see. 

The pupil, iris, and white are parts of the eye. 

The pupil is a small black hole ivhich lets light into the eye. 

The iris is a colored curtain ivhich helps to protect the eye from 
light. 

TJie white of the eye helps to give strength and firmness and 
hold the eye in place. 

Tears keep the eye moist and help to wash out specks. 

When we cry more tears come than the eyes can hold. 

If ice had no eyes ice could not see the faces we love, nor the 
birds and grass and flowers. We could not see to ivork or play 
or read. 

The best eyes are kind eyes which see for others as well as for 
themselves. 

The colors of the rainboiv are red, orange, yellow, green, blue, 
indigo, and violet. 

Our eyes should help us tell the truth. 



the voice 157 

We must notice and remember ivhat toe see, if we want to have 
truthful eyes. 

It hurts the eyes to look steadily at the sun or any very bright 
light, or to try to see in a poor light. 

It strains the eyes to read when one is lying down, or riding in 
the cars or a wagon. 

It is bad for the eyes to use them much ivhen one is sick or not 
feeling well. 

Tobacco hurts the eyes, and sometimes makes people lose their 
eyesight. 

Any liquor ichieh contains alcohol may make the eyes red, 
and, hurt them in other ways. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

It has become evident that alcohol alone, is not in all cases 
the cause of acquired color blindness ; that very often the 
abuse of tobacco has much to do with it. — J. H. Thompsox, 
M.D., Surgeon Wabash Railway. 



THE VOICE 
LESSON 19. —THE USE OF THE VOICE 

There is something attractive in a pleasant voice. When 
we hear coarse loud tones in the home or in public places, 
our immediate verdict is, " The owner of that voice lacks 
refinement." 

Teach the children that we can control the voice, that sweet 
tones add to the happiness of those about us. They are a 
mark of good breeding and refinement, and within the reach 
of every one. 

The lesson may be begun with a guessing game which will 
arouse the curiosity of the children. 



158 SECOND YEAR 

Teacher : " We all possess something which no one has ever 
seen. "We may make people happy or unhappy by it. When 
Fred's mamma wants him to come home from Charlie's, she 
uses hers, and Fred hears and comes home. Some people 
have to talk on their fingers because they do not know how 
to use this something I am thinking about. Some people have 
such sweet ones that we love to listen to them. What am I 
thinking of ? " 

You are thinking of the voice. 

Teacher : " Try to imagine for a moment how it would seem 
if the birds had no voices and could neither twitter nor sing, 
if the sheep could not bleat, if the dogs could not bark, and if 
boys and girls, and men and women, could not speak or laugh 
or sing. Tell me now of what use the voice is.' 



9} 



If we had no voices we could not talk. 
We could not sing, and sweet singing makes us happy. 
We can understand each other better by talking than in any 
other way. 

We could not shout or laugh if we had no voices. 
The world would be painfully still if no one could speak. 

Care of the Throat 

Teacher: "We can express joy and pleasure with our voices, 
and in many ways cheer those about us. But people's voices 
are not always pleasant. Sometimes they allow themselves 
to get angry and talk in loud, coarse tones which hurt the feel- 
ings of their friends and all who hear them. Sometimes they 
forget and talk too loudly when they are not angry. We can 
control our voices if we try, and thus form the habit of speak- 
ing in sweet, pleasant tones, which every one will enjoy. Who 
can think of ways in which we may injure the voice, if we are 
not careful of it ? " 



THE VOICE 159 

We may injure our voices by shouting until we are hoarse. 

Our voices are injured by singing too loud or too high so that 
our throats are strained. 

We should not sing or use our voices much when we have 
colds. 

Teacher : " When you happen to get too near a bonfire and 
get smoke in your faces, and breathe in a little of the smoke, 
how does it make your throat feel ? " 

The smoke hurts our throats and makes us cough. 

Teacher: "What habit do boys and men sometimes indulge 
in which may hurt their throats and voices ? " 

Cigarette smoking or smoking tobacco. 

Tell the class that some people make their throats sore and 
hurt their voices by smoking tobacco or cigarettes, for the poi- 
sonous smoke hurts the delicate membranes of the throat and 
may make the voice harsh and unpleasant. The air in a room 
in which others are smoking is not good for our throats. 



MEMORY POINTS 

Each one of us has a voice. 

We use the voice every time we speak or sing. 

The voice is meant to give pleasure to those ivho hear it. 

Every one can have a sweet voice who tries to control his tones 
and always speaks kindly and gently. 

The voice may be strained by shouting or singing too loudly. 

We should use the voice very little when we have a cold in the 
throat. 

The voice is often injured by cigarette smoking. 

We will try to speak kindly. 

We icill try to use pleasant tones when ice speak. 

We will not hurt our voices by smoking cigarettes. 



160 



SECOND YEAR 



THE EAE 

So many people listen badly, when not sleepily, that the wonder is 
that anything ever is rightly understood. — George Macdonald. 



LESSON 20. — HOW WE HEAR 

Knowing what one hears is largely a matter of attention. 
By holding pupils accountable for knowing the place of lessons 
once assigned, or for hearing with the mind definite instruc- 
tions once given, the teacher is contributing to the hearing 
capacity of her class. 

Teacher : "This morning you all were at play outside. How 
did you know when it was time for school to open ? There 
was no clock in sight/' 
We heard the bell ring. 
Teacher : " Our lesson to-day is about that 
part of you which heard the bell ring. We 
are to see how much we can find out about 
it. What is the name of this part ? Point 
to it." 

What do deaf people sometimes use to 
help them hear ? 

Here is a picture of an ear trumpet. 
What is an ear trumpet for ? 
Ask some child to come to the board and 
trace with pointer an imaginary sound as it 
enters and passes through this tube to a person's ear. 

Question until the class understand that one end of the ear 
trumpet is made large and flaring to collect as much sound as 
possible, while the other end is small to fit the ear. Then 
transform the drawing by a few strokes of the chalk to a like- 
ness of the outer ear. 

The resemblance will appeal to the children, and when asked 




THE EAR 



161 



the use of this part of the ear they should be helped to under- 
stand that — 

The use of the outer ear is to collect sound. 

The outer ear must be large enough to collect a good deal of 
sound, but our ears would be very much in the way if they 
were as large as the ear trumpet, 
and we should not like to see them. 

Look at the outer ear of the 
child who sits next you. Can you 
tell how it is made large enough 
to collect the sound and yet not 
be in the way ? 

The outer ear is made large to 
catch the sound and then wrinkled 
up to be out of the way. 

If the parts of our ears which 
are on the outside of our heads are 
used only to collect sounds, we must 
find out what we really hear with. 

When sounds enter the large part of the trumpet they pass 
along inside the ear trumpet and out of the small end into 
the ear. 

Ask some child to come to the board and trace from the 
drawing the course of a sound from the large part of the ear 
to the end of the tube. 

If we could see sound and watch it after it enters our heads, 
we should find it hurrying along this tube until it reaches the 
farther end, where it knocks against a tight skin stretched 
across the opening. Do you think we have found the place 
now where we hear ? Xo, not yet. The sound goes on until 
it reaches the part of us with which we think. This is called 
the brain. 




OR. LESS. IX HY. 



11 



162 



SECOND YEAR 



The teacher should next add to the drawing on the board an 
outline sketch of the middle and inner ear, with the nerves 
of hearing reaching from the latter to the brain. 

Call upon several of the children in turn to utter a word or 
sound, while others at the same time from the drawing on the 




board trace its course from the outer ear to the brain. If care 
has been taken to keep the main thought before the children, 
they will be able now to answer the question: — 

TVhat do we hear with ? 
by the statement : — 

We hear with the brain by means of the ear. 



LESSON 21. — QUICKNESS AND ACCURACY OF PERCEPTION 

Allow a child to leave the room, closing the door behind him. 
Then tell him. to ring a bell or make some noise. Ask the 
class where Harry is. 

Harry is out in the hall. 

Teacher : " Can you see him ? " 

No, we cannot see him. 



THE KAK 163 

Teacher : " How do you know he is there ? " 

We know he is there because we can hear him. 

Teacher : " We cannot see out of these windows because they 
are too high, but 1 am sure there is something passing in the 
street. What is it ? " 

A heavy wagon is passing. I hear the wheels. 

There is a boy in the street. I hear him whistle. 

Teacher: "Let us listen again. Perhaps we may be able to 
learn something about what is farther away than our street. 
You may tell what you hear." 

The train is coming in. I hear the engine whistle. 

The mill is going. I hear the noise of the machinery. 

I hear the bells on the electric cars. 

Let us play we are so deaf ive cannot hear anything. 
Tell me some things we could not know without the sense of 
hearing. 

We could not hear the birds sing. 

We could not hear the bells and whistles. 

We could not hear the train coming if we were crossing the 
track. 

We could not know the sound of each other's voices, or 
what our friends are saying when they talk to us. 

Teacher: " There are some people who are born entirely deaf, 
and some who were made deaf by disease when they were chil- 
dren. These people cannot talk, for they have either never 
learned or have forgotten how, and we call them deaf and dumb. 
Can you tell why deaf people cannot talk ? " 

By skillful questioning lead the class to see that deaf chil- 
dren cannot hear the sounds of words, and so are unable to re- 
produce them without much careful training by special teachers. 

We should be very thankful for good hearing. 

In connection with this subject a lesson in kindness to the aged 
and deaf may fittingly be given. When we realize how much 



164 SECOND YEAR 

we gain by good hearing we can better appreciate the privation 
of those who are deaf, while we should be prompted to do 
what we can to relieve their discomfort. 



LESSON 22. — CARE OF THE EARS 

Have each child name some pleasure which comes to him 
through his ears and which he would have to give np if he 
should lose his hearing. 

Hold up an ear trumpet and ask if people could hear well 
through it if the tube were filled wholly or in part. 

Point to the drawing on the board and ask similar questions 
in regard to the human ear, developing the idea that — 

Anything put into the ear may hurt the hearing. 

Tell the class that if an insect accidentally gets into one's ear, 
he should not try to get it out but go at once to his teacher or 
some grown person who can remove it without injury to the 
ear ; and that no one should put sharp or hard instruments 
into his ear for any purpose. 

What happens when you blow np a paper bag and strike it 
with your fist ? Point to the drawing and from it explain 
that in just the same way a blow on the ears may crack the 
little skin which separates the outer ear from the middle part. 
If this were torn or hurt in any way the hearing would be 
greatly injured. 

Explain what a dangerous thing it is to pull or strike the 
ears. Not only is the onter ear thus pulled out of shape, but 
the delicate parts within the ear may be strained and the hear- 
ing itself hurt. 

A Cause of Earache 

Once there was a little boy who liked to hear the wind blow. 
The house in which he lived was not very new and there were 
wide cracks around the doors. One day when the wind was 



THE EAR 165 

blowing hard, he put his head down to the crack and let the 
wind blow into his ear. It hurt a little, but he thought it was 
fun to hear the roar. That night he cried so loudly that he 
awakened his mother. What do you suppose the matter was? 
He had the earache, and was almost sick with it the next day. 
This boy lived to be an old man, but he often had earache, and 
he always said that it began with the time when he let that 
strong wind blow into his ear. 

Teach the class how to clean the ears without injuring the 
drum. The best method is to use only a soft cloth in the outer 
ear and allow the wax, nature's cleanser, to clean the drum 
and the inner part of the opening. One should never use 
pins, hairpins, or the little ear shovels which sometimes come 
with penknives, as the hard substance pressed against the deli- 
cate little drum may injure it beyond recovery. 

There are other things which may injure our sense of hear- 
ing, just as they hurt every other part of our bodies. These 
are alcohol and tobacco. Shall we take either of these poisons 
if we want to hear quickly and well ? 

We must not drink anything which has alcohol in it, or use 
tobacco in any form, if we want to have good hearing. 

Who had the Best Ears ? 

Dorothy and Louise Burke were two little sisters with, a 
large family of dolls. They decided to play one day that it 
was the big doll's, Lena May's, birthday, and that they 
would have a party to celebrate it, with all the other dolls 
invited. 

They had the whole nursery to themselves, for their mother 
was going out for the afternoon. Before she went she looked 
in at the door, and said : — 

" Betty will bring up the birthday supper when you are 
ready for it. You may have bread and butter and some of the 



166 



SFXOXD YEAR 



cold chicken, and lemonade and cookies. But put Frisk out 
of the room before you begin your supper." 

Frisk wagged his tail when he heard " cold chicken/' but he 
lay very still in the corner. 

By and by everything was ready and the little table looked 
very tempting. 

Lena May had a chair all to herself and sat up very stiff and 
straight. Three dolls sat in their own big chair where they 
behaved beautifully, and Louise held the baby doll in her lap. 




- They were just ready to pour the lemonade when a dreadful 
thing happened. 

Frisk, who had come up so softly that no one had heard 
him, suddenly put his fore paws on the table and as quick as 
a wink had all the chicken in his mouth. 

Dorothy screamed and put both hands to her head in fright, 
while Louise tried in vain to pull Frisk away. He swallowed 
the last bit of the chicken. 

Just then Mrs. Burke opened the door. 

" Oh, mother ! " both girls sobbed out at once, and the dolls 
would have joined them if they could, " Frisk has eaten all 
the chicken." 



THE EAR 167 

Mrs. Burke walked up to the table. " Let me look at your 
ears," she said to the two girls. 

After she had looked she said, " I can't find anything wrong 
with them, but they don't seem to hear well. Frisk seems to 
have paid attention when I spoke about the chicken and to 
have remembered, but you forgot about putting him out of the 
room, as I told you. 

" Which ought to have better ears, do you think, children or 
little dogs ? " 

Teacher: "What do you think Dorothy and Louise said? 
I think they took good care after that not to let a dog get 
ahead of them either in hearing or remembering what they 
heard." 

MEMORY POINTS 

The outer ear collects the sounds ice hear. 

It is made in wrinkles to take up as little room as possible. 

We hear with the brain by means of the ear. 

The sense of hearing tells us the song of birds, what people are 
saying, and how to avoid danger. 

Deaf people are often unable to talk because they can hear no 
sounds and so do not know how to make them. 

We should be very thankful that ice can hear. 

Anything put into the ear may hurt the hearing. 

Any blow on the head or ear may hurt the hearing. 

We must not use any hard substance to clean the ears. 

We must not drink anything which has alcohol in it or use 
tobacco if ice want to hear well. 

Our ears are given us to hear with and to remember what is 
said to us. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Owing to the congestion of the nose and throat produced by 
alcohol and tobacco, it is found that deafness is quite common 



168 SECOND YEAR 

among drinkers and smokers. — Roger S. Tracy, M.D., New 
York. 

The sense organs are affected by alcohol and the acuteness 
of perception dulled. The habitual smoker usually suffers 
from what is known as " smoker's sore throat." Cigarettes 
especially are apt to cause these symptoms. — H. Newell 
Martin, M.D., F.E.S. 



THE NOSE 
LESSON 23. — THE ORGAN OF SMELL 

Teacher: "My little nephew came to visit me last night, 
and he was hardly inside the door before he called out, ' Some- 
body's been roasting chestnuts; please may I have some? 7 

" There wasn't one in sight when he came in, and nobody 
had said anything about chestnuts. How do you suppose Jas- 
per knew we had been having some roasted ? " 

I think he smelled the chestnuts, and that was how he knew 
you had been roasting them. 

Teacher : " Herbert has guessed. To-day we are going to 
find out what we can about the organ of smell. Point to it 
and tell its name. Everybody who knows may rise and touch 
it with the tips of his fingers." 

What are our noses for? Tell something we find out through 
this sense which neither our ears nor our eyes nor our mouths 
nor our hands can tell us. 

We smell with the nose. 
Some things smell good. 
Others have a bad smell. 

With our eyes shut we can tell any flower we know by 
smelling it. 

I like the smell of ripe fruit. 



THE NOSE 169 

Parts of the Nose 

Toucher: '-Suppose we think about the parts of the nose 
next. We cannot talk very much about things until we know 
what to call them. Anybody who can name a part may rise 
and tell what it is. Point to the part you are thinking of and 
tell something about it." 

The top of the nose is called the bridge. 
The bridge-bone helps to give shape to the nose. 
The tip of the nose is soft like a cushion to protect the end 
of the bridge-bone. 

The nose has two holes called the nostrils. 
We breathe through the nostrils. 

Teacher : "Is there any other way in which we could breathe 
if we had no nostrils ? Hold your handkerchiefs over your 
noses and see." 

We can breathe through the mouth also. 

Teacher : " Why do we need two ways in which to breathe ? " 

" I had a cold last week," said Helen, " and it stopped my 
nose up so I had to breathe through my mouth." 

Teacher: "It was fortunate for Helen that she had two 
ways to breathe. I should like to have her tell us which way 
she likes better." 

Helen: "I would rather breathe through my nose, because 
it makes my throat sore to breathe through my mouth all the 
time." 

Teacher: "There is another reason why we should breathe 
through the nose instead of the mouth, and that is because it 
looks better. Who would like to see people going about with 
their mouths open all the time ? " 

We will take care not to breathe in that way. 

Teacher: "I have another question I want to ask Helen, 
and perhaps some of the rest of you can answer it too. When 



170 SECOND YEAR 

you had such a bad cold last week, could you smell just as 
well as before ? " 

" No, I could smell hardly anything/' said Helen. " Why 
couldn't I ? " 

"We shall talk about that next/' said the teacher, "but first 
we must know what part of the nose it is that we smell with. 
I have a little bottle of perfumery with me, and you may come 
here one at a time. Try smelling with the bridge of the nose 
first ; then with the sides ; with one nostril at a time ; with 
both. What do you find ? " 

We smell through the nostrils with the upper part of the 
inside of the nose. 

LESSON 24. — CARE OF THE NOSE 

Teacher : " When we have a cold in the head the nose often 
swells on the inside and almost closes the openings, so that 
odors cannot pass through them easily. That is why Helen 
found it difficult to smell when she had a cold. Tell one way 
in which we may take care of this organ, so that we can smell 
flowers and fruit and other good things as soon as we come 
where they are." 

We must be careful not to take cold if we want to have a 
keen sense of smell. 

MEMORY POINTS 

The sense of smell tells us what odor a substance has. 
We smell ivith the nose. 

Tlie nose tells us that some things smell good and others have a 
bad smell. 

We can tell flowers and fruit by the different odor of each. 
The bridge, tip, and nostrils are parts of the nose. 
We breathe through the nostrils. 



THE NOSE 171 

We should not breathe through the mouth because it looks bad, 
and because it makes the throat sore. 

We smell through the nostrils. 

We must try not to take cold if ice want to have a keen sense of 
smell. 

We must keep our noses clean. 

We must not forget to use our handkerchiefs ivhen necessary. 

We must not pick the nose or ice may make it sore. 

We must not put our fingers into the nostrils for this will make 
them grow ill shaped. 

We should not smell very strong odors like ammonia, for they 
blunt or injure our sense of smell. 

We must not use tobacco or any drinks containing alcohol be- 
cause these things hurt the sense of smell. 

Breathing Exercises 

1. Inhale slowly through the nostrils ; exhale slowly through 
the nostrils ; practice until at least thirty seconds can be spent 
in each exercise. 

2. Inhale and hold the breath an instant ; inhale again and 
hold ; do this until the lungs are full ; then exhale rather 
slowly. 

3. Eepeat exercise 1, rising meanwhile on the toes, and 
raising the extended arms to shoulder level. Reverse during 
exhalation. — Household Hygiene. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Improper Breathing destroys Health 

How much imperfect development of feeble vitality, how 
much indifferent health, how much pulmonary disease, is due 
to neglect of systematic training of the breathing would be 
difficult to determine, but the amount of mischief thus caused 
is large. 



172 SECOXD YEAR 

In some schools the act of breathing is systematically 
taught. It is a simple matter to insist upon the habit of tak- 
ing regular and full respirations, especially in the open air. 

— London Lancet. 

Alcohol interferes with Proper Breathing 

Alcohol greatly lessens the oxidation of the blood, weakens 
respiration, and largely interferes with the elimination of the 
various toxemias upon which disease depends. — D. F. Mat- 
ter, M.D. 

Effects of Tobacco 

Cases of lung disease are aggravated by the use of tobacco. 
Tobacco smoke makes the air impure. In bronchitis tobacco 
smoke acts as an irritant to the already irritable surface of the 
bronchial tubes ; it keeps up a cough. — Sir B. W. Bjchardsox, 
M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 



THE SENSE OF TOUCH 

LESSON 23. — WHAT WE LEARN THROUGH TOUCH 

Before it is time for this lesson to be given, collect a number 
of objects having different qualities of surface or material; 
those, for instance, which are hard, soft, smooth, rough, cold, 
warm, heavy, light, for use in teaching the sense of touch. 
Later on in their school life the children will learn to distin- 
guish between the sense of touch proper, and temperature and 
muscular sensations, but in primary grades such close classifi- 
cation is unnecessary. If many of the objects chosen are un- 
familiar to the class, place these on a low table and call all 
the children about to examine them. Let some of the articles 
be bright-colored silks and woolens, others attractive fruits and 
flowers. 



THE SENSE OF TOUCH 173 

How many know the name of every object on the table ? 
Who does not? Let each one examine carefully a substance 
he does not know, find out how it looks, smells, and feels to 
the touch, until all are familiar. Then blindfold the children 
in turn and ask them to tell these different objects apart by 
handling them. A little practice will enable them to tell silk 
from cotton, apples from pears, glass from stone, and so on 
throughout the list. 

When all can do this readily help them to compare objects ; 
to tell how they know a peach from an apple of the same size, 
a marble from a plum, a fur rug from straw matting. 

Find a triangular block from touch alone; one that is square, 
round, oval. What have we learned about these blocks by 
handling them ? 

The sense of touch helps us to know the form of an object. 

What else can we learn about things simply by touching 
them ? How do you know that this is a piece of flannel and 
that a bit of cotton ? How can we tell brussels carpet from 
oilcloth if we do not look at either? a file from a knife 
blade ? the bark of a tree from the leaves ? What new 
fact about objects have we learned from touching these 
things ? 

Give further illustration if necessary, allowing the children 
to describe their own sensations in each case, until they know 
that some objects feel smooth, others rough, and that we learn 
these qualities by the sense of touch. 

Teacher: "Is this glass tumbler smooth or rough? Tell 
me without touching it. How did you find out ? What other 
sense besides touch helps us to know whether objects are 
rough or smooth ? " 

Sight and touch help each other in this, but if we could use 
only one we should choose touch because it is less likely to be 
mistaken. 



174 SECOND YEAR 

The sense of touch helps us to know whether objects are 
rough or smooth. 

Teacher: ( * Here are two glasses of water which look just 
alike. Harold may see if he can find any difference between 
them." 

Harold : " The water feels warm in one glass and cold in 
the other." 

Teacher : " How many have ever played snowball ? Is 
snow cold or warm? Can you tell just by looking at it? 
How do we know ? How do you know whether a flatiron is 
hot or cold ? ice cream ? the flame of a candle ? What is the 
third thing that the sense of touch tells us about objects ? " 

The sense of touch helps us to know whether objects are 
cold or hot. 

How much can we find out about a ball by touching it ? a 
piece of ice ? a pineapple ? a crayon ? the books on our desks ? 
the door ? 

Continue this exercise with familiar objects until every 
child has had an opportunity to review all that he has learned 
about the sense of touch. 

Let the children have a quiet game of blindman's buff until 
they can recognize one another by the sense of touch, and can 
also tell how they know May from Esther, or George from 
Lewis, when they cannot see them or hear them speak. Give 
each child blindfolded some article which he has seen before, 
and let him try to tell what it is from the sense of touch alone ; 
then ask him to describe it. 

Allow the children, two or three at a time, to move slowly 
about the room with eyes closed, until they can recognize the 
different articles of furniture by touch and can name the 
qualities each possesses. 

Review the work of this sense in other ways until the class 
can describe correctly the shape and surface of all familiar 



THE SENSE OF TOUCH 175 

objects, and can compare them with reference to these quali- 
ties. Give a memory drill at this point by asking the children 
to recall how fur feels to the touch, also snow, putty, molasses, 
pitch, a marble, wood, and other substances they have recently 
handled. Thorough training in work of this kind and prac- 
tice in trying to describe the different sensations felt or re- 
membered will not only make the sense of touch more delicate 
and helpful to each child, but will greatly aid in developing 
his mental powers. 

LESSON 26. — THE ORGAN OF TOUCH 

Teacher: " How can we find out that an orange is round 
and an egg oval when our eyes are closed ? Where is our 
sense of touch ? Could we tell anything about objects if we 
had no hands ? Are our feet of any use in this ? If we lay 
an object against our cheeks or on our arms can we tell any- 
thing about it? 

" Kate may stand with her eyes closed, while I tap different 
parts of her body lightly with my pencil. Which parts did I 
touch ? What parts of the body have no feeling ? " 

Experiment with the children until they know that the 
sense of feeling is in the skin, and present in every part of 
the body except the hair and tips of the nails. Let them find 
out for themselves in what part of the hand this sense is 
most delicate. Tell them the ever new story of Helen Keller, 
and how she succeeded in passing the Harvard examinations 
for entrance to Radcliffe College by cultivating her sense of 
touch to the highest possible degree, and through this sense 
her mind. They will be interested also in hearing about 
Captain Xat. Herreshoff, one of the famous boat builders of 
the world. He has been blind ever since he was a boy. and 
yet has trained his sense of touch so thoroughly that he knows 
more about boats than most people who can see, and has 



176 SECOND YEAR 

even helped to build some of the boats which have won the 
America cap in our famous yacht races. 

What a Blind Man Did 

Here is a true story about another blind man, who lived 
in Ohio. He was a carriage maker and worked at his trade 
until he was about thirty years old. One day while he was at 
work a piece of iron struck his eye and destroyed the sight. 
By and by the sight of the other eye began to be affected 
and he lost that too. 

He did not grow discouraged, because he had two dear little 
children, and the thought that he must take care of them 










made him feel that he could work even without his eyesight. 
He went back to his shop, and after a little found that he 
could do many kinds of work as well as before.. 

Both the children's birthdays came the same day, so they 
called themselves the twins, although. Helen was three years 
older than her little brother. When she was seven years old 
and Roger four, their father made them a little cart and taught 
Leo, the big black dog, to draw them up and down the road. 



THE SENSE OF TOUCH 177 

Leo had a harness made just to fit him, and he was 
very proud when he could have it on and go out with the chil- 
dren. Don't you think they must have had pretty good times 
t ( >gether ? 

" Our papa doesn't need eyes in his head/' said Helen and 
Roger one day to some of their little playmates, "because he 
can see with his fingers. Anyhow, he can make nicer things 
than other people's papas who have eyes. And we see for 
him every time he wants us to, 'cause he's the best papa in the 
world." 

Care of the Senses 

What did Helen and Roger mean when they said their 
father could see with his fingers ? Can we see with ours if we 
try as hard as he did to train them ? In what kinds of work 
do we need a delicate sense of touch ? How can we keep it 
delicate ? How shall we take care of our hands ? our nails ? 
Why do blind people usually have a finer sense of touch than 
others ? Do we need to lose our eyesight in order to give our 
sense of touch proper training ? 

MEMORY POINTS 

The sense of touch tells us the form and shape of any object. 

It tells us whether objects are rough or smooth, hot or cold, hard 
or soft. 

We can recognize objects by the sense of touch. 

The sense of touch is in every part of the body except the hair 
and nails. 

A blind man sees ivith his fingers. 

We must keep our nails and fingers clean and neat. 

We do not need to lose our eyesight in order to train our sense 
of touch. 

Alcoholic drinks or tobacco will make the sense of touch less 
delicate. 

OR. LESS. IN HY. 12 



1T8 SECOND YEAR 



EMINENT AUTHORITIES 



Careful experiments on the sense of touch, on the muscular 
sense, on sight, on hearing, on simple reaction to a given sig- 
nal, on discrimination of signals, have all shown that rapidity 
of perception, or discrimination, is invariably diminished, even 
by exceedingly small doses of alcohol. — T. Morton, M.D. 

As a result of the study of the effects of alcohol on the 
senses, it is found in each instance that the power of the sense 
diminishes. The sense of touch is obscured. In all the five 
senses a marked paralysis and diminished acuteness followed 
the use of small doses of alcohol. — C. H. Shepard, M.D. 



TOBACCO 

11 The severest test of the modern gentleman is his willingness to forego 
his pipe for the comfort and health of another." 

LESSON 27. — THE TOBACCO PLANT 

Give a general talk about plants, and what we obtain from 
them. Ask the children to name different articles of food, such 
as oatmeal, flour, Indian meal, fruit. From what plant is each 
obtained ? How is each prepared for food ? 

After some of the useful plants have been mentioned, call 
for the names of some of the harmful or poisonous ones. 
Most children have been warned against the poison ivy, wild 
parsnips, and certain weeds, and will doubtless be able to tell 
something of the results of handling such plants. 

Teacher : " Some plants do not poison the skin when we 
touch them, but their leaves contain poisonous juices, which, 
if taken into the body, may injure it. To-day we are 
going to talk about a kind of plant which men sometimes 
smoke and chew. Who can tell me what it is ? " 



TOBACCO 



170 



More than four hundred and fifty years ago there were no 
white men living in America. The Indians, who lived in small 
huts called wigwams and moved from place to place to find 
pasture for their ponies or game in the forests, were the only 
people here. 

There were no nice farms with plows and other farm 
machinery as there are now, but some of the 
Indians raised corn and a few other things. 

In the Indian family the man hunts and 
fishes, while the woman does all the work 
around the wigwam. So the women were 
really the farmers. 

This is the way they did it. They chose 
a piece of ground near their wigwams, and 
with their hands and the aid of a strong 
forked stick they scratched up the earth as 
deep as they could and made it smooth and 
mellow. Then they planted the corn and 
watched it carefully to keep the crows and 
ravens from scratching it up. 

No one in Europe had ever heard of 
Indian corn until some men came over in a 
ship to America and saw it growing around 
the wigwams of the Indians. But besides the corn they found 
another plant growing in the cultivated spots. This plant 
seemed stranger to them than the corn. The leaves were 
large and hairy ; the lower ones were sometimes two feet long, 
and the plants were from three to six feet high. The men 
looked for fruit, but there were only pretty flowers and very 
tiny seeds. This new plant was tobacco. 

The men asked the Indians what this curious plant was good 
for. Then the old Indians brought out their pipes — long pipes 
made of soft red stone with queer pictures carved on them, and 
putting some of the dried leaves of last year's crop into the 




180 SECOND YEAR 

bowls of their pipes, they began to smoke. It was all very 
new and surprising to the white men at first, but after a time, 
as often happens with tobacco unless people refuse to touch it, 
these men began to like to smoke it themselves. When they 
went back home across the ocean they took some of the dried 
leaves and also some of the seeds. They planted the seeds 
the next year, and in a few years tobacco was raised in many 
of the countries of Europe. 

In those clays, doctors and scientists did not know so much 
as they do now about disease or about the things which hurt 
the body and brain, but they soon found out that tobacco was 
not good for people. The priests and rulers opposed it, and one 
of the kings of Europe wrote a book against the use of tobacco. 
One of the popes would not allow tobacco nsers to belong 
to the Catholic Church. But still this habit had got such 
a hold on some people that they kept on rising it. That is 
one of the great dangers of touching tobacco at all. When a 
man begins to smoke or chew, he is likely to become a slave 
to the habit, and it is almost impossible to break away and 
become free from it — at least it is so hard that few ever do. 

How Tobacco hurts People 

Teacher : " Now that we know the story of the tobacco plant 
and how the white men first came to use it, who can tell — 
" Why tobacco is not good for people to smoke or chew ? " 

In tobacco there is nicotine, which is a strong poison, and 
this poison has the power to hurt people who smoke or chew. 

Teacher: " Tell me some things which you have learned 
about the ways in which tobacco may hurt those who use it." 

The following should be brought out : — 

Nicotine may hurt the bones so that boys who smoke cannot 
grow well. 



TOBACCO 181 

Cigarettes often dull the brain and make boys who smoke 
them stupid. 

Cigarette smoking hurts the eyes, and sometimes makes the 
smoker color blind. 

Tobacco hurts the heart, and sometimes people have a kind 
of heart disease caused by smoking. 

When one has used tobacco for a time, he becomes a slave 
to the habit, and it is very hard to be free again. 

The tobacco habit is a dirty one, and selfish as well, for 
people who do not smoke are often compelled to breathe the 
stale smoke from the cigarette or pipe of the smoker. 

After the pupils have been drilled upon these truths until 
even the slowest members of the class know why it is a dan- 
gerous and unwise thing to begin the use of cigarettes or of 
tobacco in any form, tell the following story : — 

How Tobacco hurts Land 

Albert and Mamie Brown lived in Massachusetts, but their 
Uncle Frank owned a large farm in the South. The children's 
father raised oats, corn, and hay on his farm, and kept several 
cows. That was the only kind of a farm the children knew 
anything about. 

One day Mrs. Brown started south to visit at her brother's 
home, taking Albert and Mamie with her. It was the first 
time the children had ever been there, and everything seemed 
strange and new to them. 

The day after they arrived, Uncle Frank asked Albert if he 
would like to go over the plantation with him. They call the 
large farms plantations in the South. Albert was delighted, 
and said he would be very glad to go. 

They passed some hayfields at first which looked very much 
like the fields at home ; then they came to fields that looked 
very queer to Albert. When they were quite a way off, Albert 



182 SECOND YEAR 

thought perhaps it was a field of corn, but when they came 
nearer, the plants did not look at all like corn. 

There were men working in the fields. 

" What is the prospect for a crop ? " asked Uncle Frank of 
a man who was working near the road. 

" Pretty poor prospect/ 7 said he. " The land is almost run 
out. Tobacco is dreadfully hard on the soil. The Colonel 
Briggs place, over east, is about as barren as a desert from 
raising tobacco." 

Uncle Frank and Albert went on toward some large sheds 
in the lower field. 

" Why, uncle," said Albert, " tobacco isn't good for anything, 
is it ? We learned at school that it is likely to injure the 
health and the minds of those who use it, and now that man 
says it ruins the land. What makes you raise such a crop as 
that ? " 

Uncle Frank looked sober. 

" That is about what it does," said he ; " but there used to 
be money in it." 

" Isn't there money in anything else which doesn't spoil the 
land it grows on, and everything else it touches ? " 

" I suppose there is, if one found the right thing," was the 
reply. 

Albert said nothing, but he was thinking hard. 

Then they entered the sheds, and Uncle Frank showed 
Albert that, when they had been cut from the stalks, the 
leaves were bound together in bunches or " hands " and hung 
in the sheds to cure, ready to be packed for the market. 

That night Uncle Frank overheard Albert telling Mamie 
what he had seen on the plantation. 

" Would you believe it, Mamie," said he, when he had told 
her w 7 hat the workman had said, "people keep on raising to- 
bacco when they know that it spoils the land, and may hurt 
everybody who uses it ? " 



TOBACCO 183 

A few days later, Uncle Frank came home from town with 
a mysterious smile on his face. After a little coaxing he told 
the family that Albert had set him thinking, and that at last 
he had made up his mind not to raise the useless tobacco any 
longer. 

" I am going to study the soil/' said he to his sister, Mrs. 
Brown, " and rind what it needs to help me raise crops which 
will be of use to people without hurting the land." 

MEMORY POINTS 

^i large part of our food comes from plants which grow in the 
earth. 

All plants are not good for food. Some are poisonous to the 
touch or taste. 

Tobacco is one of these poisonous plants. 

It is almost sure to hurt the health of any one tuho smokes or 
chews it. 

It is harmful because it contains the poison nicotine. 

Nicotine may stunt the bones and hinder growth. 

It often dulls the brain and makes the user stupid. 

It is bad for the eyes and often causes color blindness. 

It hurts the heart. 

It makes one a slave to a bad habit. 

It is a selfish, filthy practice to smoke or chew. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Physiology and observation both lead to the same conclusion, 
that cigarettes not only dwarf the boy mentally and physically, 
but make a criminal of him. Their sale to young men should 
be prohibited, and to a boy under sixteen made criminal. 
— Hox. Geo. Torraxce, General Superintendent Illinois State 
Reformatory. 



184 SECOND YEAR 

Effects of Tobacco on General Health 

An agent that is capable of such potent evil, which through 
its sedative effect upon the circulation creates a thirst for 
alcohol ; which exerts a depressing and disturbing effect upon 
the nerve centers; which determines functional diseases of the 
heart; which impairs vision, blunts memory, and interferes 
with mental effort and application, — ought, in my judgment as 
a sanitary officer, at whatever cost of vigilance, to be rigorously 
interdicted. — Philip S. Wales, Surgeon United States Army. 

The smoker is liable at any time to be wafted out into the 
deep waters of serious nervous disease, or to injure his eyes or 
sense of taste, or form a love for exciting food, or even drink, 
or he may go down on the rocks of some acute disease, because 
he has wasted his nervous force and has not vitality enough to 
resist it. — Journal of Hygiene. 



PEEK 

LESSON 28. — WHY BEER IS NOT A FOOD 

In order to give little children an intelligent idea of the 
reasons why they should not drink beer, which in too many 
localities flows almost as freely as water, it is especially need- 
ful to begin with the facts already familiar to them. This 
lesson may be introduced by a story to illustrate the first point. 
We suggest 

Pietro's Two Breakfasts 

Where was Pietro ? Dorothy and Prince had got into dis- 
grace waiting for him. When he didn't appear as usual, 
directly after breakfast, they had gone for a romp into that 
forbidden ground, the study, and Prince had torn np Mr. Gray's 
half -written sermon. 

" I s'pose I ought to sit in the corner half an hour for that," 



BEER 



185 



sighed Dorothy, who usually planned her own punishments; 
"and it's all your fault too, you careless Prince." 

" N*o 3 it wasn't either, 'cause I shouldn't have let you come 
in here, but it was such a nice place to play," went on 
Dorothy mournfully, as 
she climbed on the high 
stool to do penance. 

Prince leaned against 
her knee, a world of sor- 
rowful sympathy in his 
doggish eyes and heart. 
He felt wholly to blame. 
but how was he to know 
what papers were choice 
and not to be played 
with. He could only 
take his punishment in 
the corner too, and say 
nothing. 

Just then a mop of 
curly, black hair and two 
shining eyes appeared 
at the window. They 
belonged to Pietro, the 
hand-organ boy. 

"Me play-a for you?" he said, with his sweetest smile. 

" Oh, do," begged Dorothy, forgetting all about her punish- 
ment and running to the window. Prince ran too, barking 
loudly, for Pietro was a great friend of his. 

" Have you had any breakfast, Pietro ? " asked Dorothy. 
when the boy had played all his tunes. 

" Me had-a big mug-a beer." 

" That wasn't any breakfast, at all. My mamma'll get you 
one," said Dorothy, running to find Mrs. Gray. 




186 SECOND YEAR 

" Me big-a man some day ! Keep-a store ! " said Pietro as he 
finished the nice steak and potatoes Mrs. Gray brought him. 

" Does the monkey have beer too for his breakfast ? " asked 
Dorothy. 

"No, no; beer mak'-a monk' sick/' said Pietro, hastily. 
Mrs. Gray smiled, then looked grave. 

" Do you think beer is a good thing for boys when it is so 
bad for monkeys ? " she asked finally. 

Pietro didn't know what to say to this, so he kept still. 

" Suppose I gave Dorothy for her breakfast only a large glass 
of water, with a very little food in it, and that little spoiled 
by having a tiny bit of poison mixed with it. Do you think 
she would grow or keep well ? That's what she would have 
if I gave her beer to drink, and boys need good food as much 
as girls." 

" Beer plent'-a cheap," said Pietro, after a moment's thought. 

Mrs. Gray considered. 

" How would you like to work here for your meals ? " she 
said presently. " I will give you all the good food you can 
eat every day, if you will help me an hour or two in the 
morning." 

"Monk' plent'-a eat, too ? " said Pietro, hesitatingly. 

" Yes, your monkey shall have all he can eat too," said Mrs. 
Gray, with a smile, and so it was arranged. 

Pietro drank no more beer, and to-day he is a large strong 
man, with a fruit store all his own. 

Teacher : " Who knows why Pietro needed two breakfasts 
that morning ? Why wasn't the beer enough ? " 

If all cannot answer the question, hold up two apples, one 
sound and ripe, the other nearly all decayed. Ask why every 
one would choose the sound fruit, bringing out the facts that — 

The partly decayed apple was once good to eat. 
Only a little of the good part is left. 



BEER 187 

Its good taste and flavor are now spoiled. 
It is no longer a good food. 
It is not safe to eat. 

Then show that a glass of beer is like this apple in some 
ways because — 

It was once good barley or other grain. 

Only a very little of the good part is left when it is made 
into beer. 

Its good taste and flavor are spoiled. 

It is no longer a good food. 

It is not safe to drink. 

" Who can tell me now why Pietro was so glad to get the 
steak and potato Mrs. Gray brought him ? " 

He was hungry. 

The beer wasn't a good breakfast for a boy. 

Get the thoughts of all on this question; then ask how 
many remember what food does for us when we eat it, bring- 
ing out in review the facts learned in previous lessons, that — 

f Makes us grow. 
Food j Gives us strength. 
I Keeps us warm. 

Teacher : " Beer would make a good breakfast for us if it 
could do all these things, but it can't. 

" One of my neighbors used to give her little girl sips of 
beer at the table, to give her an appetite, she said. But that 
didn't help matters. The child was sick and fretful, and did 
not care to run and play with her little friends. 

" The doctor told the mother to give the little girl milk in- 
stead of beer, and to keep her outdoors as much as possible. 
After a little the roses began to come back to the child's pale 
cheeks, and she grew stronger. ISTow she is straight and tall 
like her brothers, but she never touches beer. 



188 SECOND YEAR 

" Some people drink beer in winter, thinking it will help 
keep them warm. Are they right ? 

" Suppose we open all the doors and windows on a very cold 
day to let the heat from our stoves and furnaces warm the 
air outside, would that give us summer weather? 

" No, indeed ; we should not feel the difference outside, but 
our houses would get so cold we could not live in them. 

" It would be just as foolish to drink beer to keep us warm, 
for it sends the heat to the surface of our bodies where it 
passes off, just as it does from the open doors and windows 
of the house, and doesn't leave enough behind to keep us 
warm. 7 ' 

What would beer do for us if we were to use it in place of 
the food we need ? 

Write these statements on the board when given, in contrast 
to the review facts already brought out regarding food. 

f Hinders our growth. 
Beer \ ]\ Takes us weak. 

I Does not keep us warm. 



LESSON 29. —WHY BEER IS A BAD DRINK 

Teacher : "Do you remember that beautiful plant T would 
not let you touch when we went to the woods last fall ? " 

Grace : " You said it was poison ivy, and would make our 
hands burn and smart if we picked it." 

Teacher : " Grace is right. Listen while I tell you what a 
poison is." 

A poison is something which can hurt us or make us sick. 

Some things are poisonous to the touch, and we have to be 
very careful to let them alone. Others are poisonous when 
we put them into our mouths, or swallow them. What is the 



BEER 189 

name of the poison in beer and other like drinks made from 
grains ? Tell me one reason why beer is harmful. 

Beer is a bad drink because there is a poison, alcohol, in it. 

If it is still difficult for all to understand why beer is a 
dangerous drink, when the grain from which it is made is good 
for food, show or tell them about other food substances which 
may be so changed as to be disagreeable or totally unfit to eat. 
Familiar instances of such changes are sour milk, moldy 
bread or cake, fruits and vegetables which have begun to 
decay. 

Do not give the children the idea that one and the same 
change has occurred in each of these instances ; that beer is 
the same as rotten grain, for instance. 

They know already, from simple lessons on the grape and 
apple, that wine and cider are made from these fruits by the 
action of tiny plants called ferments. Tell them that other 
tiny plants cause each of the changes referred to ; that we call 
one kind molds, another germs of decay, while the ferment 
which makes beer is yeast. They will readily understand 
that since there is a different result in each of these instances, 
there must be a different kind of plant in each case. 

Teacher: "There is another reason why we should never 
begin to drink beer. It is because it is so hard for people to 
give it up when they have once begun its use. Food does not 
act in that way. 

"Yesterday I was visiting my friend in her pretty home. 
While we were talking her little son came running toward the 
house as fast as he could go. He dashed up the steps and fell 
head first over a hassock on the piazza, bumping his head 
badly. 

" i Why, Ernest, what made you in such a hurry ? ' asked his 
mother, as she bathed his forehead and comforted him. i Didn't 
you see the hassock ? ' 



190 SECOND YEAR 

" ' Yes, mother ; but I was going so fast I couldn't stop.' " 
Teacher: "That's what people say sometimes when they 

get into the habit of beer drinking. C I want to stop but I 

can't; I like it too well.' How can we be sure not to get the 

beer appetite ? " 

Tell me two reasons why we should never taste this bad 

drink. 

Beer contains a poison, alcohol. 

People who drink beer may want more and more of this 
poison. 

How Beer hurts People 

Teacher: "What are some of the ways in which beer hurts 
those who drink it ? Let us see if we can find out. 

" What does a boy need to make him a good football 
player ? " 

Hugh : " He needs lots of muscle." 

Teacher: "Tell me some other people who need muscle. 
How many of you would rather have firm, strong arms and 
legs than soft, flabby ones ? You must be very careful to let 
beer alone then, for beer changes good muscle into fat, and 
makes people weak instead of strong. 

" When I was a little girl I was very much afraid of the 
blacksmith who lived near by. He didn't like children, and 
was always grumbling and finding fault with his own boys 
and girls. One day I saw him carrying a jug into the 
house. 

" ' What do you suppose, he has in it ? ' I asked my mother. 

" ' I'm afraid it's a jug of beer,' she said. Then she told me 
that this blacksmith I was so afraid of used to be kind to 
every one, but that since he began to drink beer he had grown 
cross and disagreeable." 

Why was beer a bad drink for this man ? 



BEEB 191 

Would it be any better for us ? 

Name all the ways we have found in which beer hurts 
people. 

MEMORY POINTS 

Beer is not a food. 

It hinders growth, makes people weak, and does not keep them 
warm. 

The good grain is changed into a harmful drink when it is made 
into beer. 

This change is caused by tiny plants called ferments. 

Beer is a bad drink because there is some of the poison, alcohol, 
in every glass of it. 

We should not drink beer because it is so hard for people to 
give it up when they have once begun its use. 

Beer changes muscle to fat. 

Beer makes people cross. 

Beer injures the health. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Beer contains Alcohol 

In beer the percentage of alcohol varies from two to ten per 
cent. — M. Joffrey, in Revue Scientifique. 

Beer not a Food 

So far from being an innocent and healthful article of diet, 
beer and all that class of liquors are poisonous and unwhole- 
some, with no practical food value. — Norman Kerb, M.D., 

F.L.S. 

Beer lessens Strength 

A moderate dose of beer or wine would in most cases at 
once diminish the maximum weight which a healthy person 
could lift. — William Brunton, M.D., F.R.S. 



192 SECOND YEAR 

Beer produces Fat 

The less of alcohol or of malt the better, if we would be 
thin. — London Lancet. 

Beer makes People Cross 

Our beer drinkers become besotted. Beer makes them 
cross. It makes their homes unpleasant. It prevents them 
from rising in civilization. — Johx Todd, M.D. 

Beer enslaves People 

Beer not only creates an appetite for something stronger, 
but it excites men to acts of violence, desperation, and crime. 

— Scientific American. 



LESSON 30. — REVIEW QUESTIONS 

What keeps our bodies from wearing out? 

What three things does food do for us ? 

What can we do to keep our bodies well and help them 
grow ? 

Why do we need to bathe often ? 

How do cigarettes often hurt the teeth ? 

How should the hair and nails be taken care of ? 

What kinds of foods are best in hot weather ? in cold 
weather ? 

How does the sense of taste help us in choosing our food ? 

How can we help this delicate sense organ to do its work ? 
How can we control it ? 

Why does wine hurt those who drink it ? 

How does wine differ from grape juice ? 

What parts of the eye can we see ? 

Why do we need eyelashes ? eyebrows ? tears ? 



BEER 193 

What do we learn through our eyes which we could not 
find out any other way ? 

How should we take care of our eyes ? 

Of what use is the voice ? 

How can we train our voices to be sweet and pleasant? 

Why has the outer ear many curves and wrinkles ? 

Why have we been given the sense of hearing ? 

What does the sense of smell do for us ? Why do we need 
more than one way to breathe ? Which is the better way ? 

How can we take care of the nose ? 

Why is tobacco so likely to injure those who smoke or 
chew it ? 

Why is beer not a food ? 

Why is it a bad drink ? 

How does it often hurt people ? 



OR. LESS. IN HY. 13 



TH1KD YEAR TOPICS 



I. 


Pure Air and Breathing 










195 


II. 


Drinks which Hurt . 










204 


III. 


Food 












209 


IV. 


The Stomach 












214 


V. 


The Blood . 












220 


VI. 


Brain and Nerves 












230 


VII. 


The Bones . 












245 


rai. 


The Muscles 












252 


IX. 


Beer .... 












261 


X. 


Cigarettes . 












266 


XI. 


The Skin and Cleanliness 








274 


XII. 


The Special Senses 












281 



194 



PURE AIR AND BREATHING 
LESSON 1. — MISS AYER'S SCHOOL 

It was a dull rainy day outside, and even if the teacher's 
face was twice as bright as usual to make amends for the 
external gloom, her pupils were not making much progress in 
their work. 

Homer was cross because he had a sore throat, and the 
teacher wouldn't let him wade in the little pools of water out- 
side during recess time. 

Fan couldn't get her spelling because her head ached. 

Kate's pencil was lost, and her best friend, Dora, just across 
the aisle, had refused to lend one of hers, although she had 
three long ones in her box. Kate, the careless one of the room, 
hated to call the teacher's attention to this fresh loss. She 
would be sure to say, as she had before : — 

" Another lost pencil, Kate ? I am afraid you were not at 
home when Fairy Order called at your house this morning, 
so she has been helping some other girl look after her things." 

Miss Ayer noticed the doleful faces and the general depres- 
sion, and said : " You may close your books, and Homer may 
open the windows on the south side of the room, and the door. 
We will march around the room, drawing in deep breaths of 
air as we go." 

When this was over and they w r ere seated again, she told the 
following story : — 

The Secret of a Fine Figure 

Last summer I visited a famous school, which is more than 
a hundred years old. In one of the galleries hang portraits of 

195 



196 THIRD YEAR 

many fine-looking men and women who went to this school 
when they were young. All of them have fine graceful figures. 
As the principal saw me looking at them, she said : — 

" Our school is noted for the health, ease, and grace of its 
pupils.' 7 

I asked the secret, and she said : — 

" Pure air and proper breathing help our pupils to stand and 
walk well, and to become healthy and graceful." 

"That is something for me to remember," I thought to my- 
self. "I'll find out more about it and tell my boys and girls 
when we are back in school next fall, and we'll see if they can 
be as straight, healthy, and graceful when they are through 
next year's work." 

I asked this principal many questions which she kindly 
answered, and just before I came away she told me about a 
famous breathing exercise which had been in use in that school 
ever since it started. Suppose we all take it now while I tell 
you about it, and perhaps some of our round shoulders will go 
back into place before we know it. 

Stand with heels together and toes turned out in this way at 
an angle of forty-five degrees, arms clown at the side. 

Raise arms to the level of the shoulders, with bent elbows, 
holding the arms in front of the chest so that the middle 
fingers just touch. Then draw in a deep breath, rising slowly 
meanwhile on the toes, and at the same time raise arms over 
the head with fingers still touching. 

Let arms descend back of the head, keeping fingers together 
as long as possible. At the same time bring the heels back to 
the floor and breathe out. 

That was nicely done by all. Let us try it once or twice 
more so that you will not forget how to do it when you are by 
yourselves. It will be a good exercise when you get up in the 
morning, and will give you an appetite for breakfast if you do 
it in the fresh air. Try it and see. 



PURE AIR AM) BREATHING 



191 



Now Hugh may close the windows, and I think we are ready 
for lessons again. 

Sure enough, all the frowns and cross looks had taken to 
themselves wings and flown away. 

Fan forgot her headache, and the spelling lesson was soon 
learned. 

Dora quietly laid her box of pen- 
cils on Kate's desk, and the two 
were once more firm friends. 



Even Homer looked happy. He 
had decided that it would be 
nearly as much fun to show Tim 
Rogers how to do this new trick 
in breathing as to wade in 
any more puddles — it was 
pretty cold to wade, anyhow. 




Pure air makes us feel 
brighter and more wide-awake 
than impure air. 

Miss Ayer : "It is very impor- 
tant to know why pure air makes 
us feel brighter, but before we can 
understand it we must find out where 
the air we breathe goes. 

"Harry may open the windows again. 
The class may rise. Stand straight and 
throw your shoulders back. Spread the palms of your hands 
on your chests just below your necks — so. 

" Draw in slowly a long, deep breath. Notice as you do this 
how your chest swells out, lifting your hands. Can you tell 
why ? " 



The air breathed in makes the chest swell out. 



198 



THIRD YEAH 



Miss Ayer : " Yes, it is the air we breathe in that does it ; 
but where does this air go ? Let us place the palms of our 
hands on our chests again while I tell you. 

"The parts of us to which the air goes are in our chests just 
underneath our hands. Can any one tell their names ? " 

The air we breathe in passes into our lungs. 

Tell the class that the lungs are composed of very small air 
sacs, held together by tissue, with very tiny blood vessels all 
through them. 

Call attention to the fact that when these little air sacs in 
the lungs fill with the air breathed in they become larger, and 
that is the reason the chest swells out in deep breathing. 

Show from some physiology a picture of the human lungs 
and windpipe, cr draw outline of same on the board. Call on 
some pupil to trace the journey of the air from his nostrils to 
his lungs. 

Miss Ayer : " Now we must find out why we should breathe 
pure air. 

" We should breathe pure air because it contains something 
called oxygen, which we need every minute and cannot live 
without. 

"Oxygen is a gas which is everywhere in pure air, though 
we cannot see it. 

" Why does the air which may be pure when we come into 
the schoolroom in the morning soon become unfit to breathe, 
and so make us feel dull and stupid ? " 




PUKE AIR AND BREATHING 199 

With every breath we draw in we use up oxygen, so we soon 
make the air of a closed room unfit to breathe, because there is 
not oxygen enough left in it. 

Miss Ayer: " There is another way in which we make the air 
unfit to breathe. YVe must rind out about that. You may 
rise, stand erect, with shoulders back ; put the palms of your 
hands over your lungs as before. Draw in slowly a long deep 
breath of air, and notice that after w r e have held it as long as 
we can we send out a breath." 

After a little practice the class will understand that for 
every breath of air we draw into our lungs, we send out 
another breath. 

What kind of air do we breathe out from our lungs ? 

The air we breathe out from our lungs is bad, poisonous air, 
unfit to breathe again. 

With every breath breathed out of our lungs we poison a 
half-barrel of air. 

Question the pupils until they understand that they are 
unconsciously breathing ail the time, whether sleeping or wak- 
ing, and that the value of deep breathing in pure air is that it 
enables one to take in more oxygen than ordinary breathing, 
and thus to fill all the air sacs of the lungs with good pure 
air, thereby making them stronger. 

LESSON 2. — TIGHT CLOTHING A HINDRANCE TO 
HEALTHFUL BREATHING 

Let the children rise and draw in a deep breath while hold- 
ing their hands pressed tightly against their sides. This will 
show how difficult the process becomes when the lungs are 
cramped and forced to do their work in a^ smaller room than 
mother Xature has given them. After one or two experi- 
ments in this line, they will understand that no one should 



200 THIRD YEAR 

wear tight clothing because it does not give room to breathe 
properly. 

Show pictures of some of the best Greek statues. Explain 
that these people who had such beautiful, well-developed 
forms not only lived largely out-of-doors, where they breathed 
pure air, but they never squeezed their waists, thereby reduc- 
ing their breathing capacity, as foolish people sometimes do in 
these days. 

If a spirometer can be borrowed for the occasional use of 
the class, the children will take greater pleasure in their 
breathing exercises and be more eager to practice them. If 
this is not feasible, one child after another may be called up to 




have his present chest measurements taken while inspiring, 
and again after expiration. A record of these measurements 
may be kept and compared with others taken after a week or 
month of regular practice in breathing exercises. 

Some of the children will probably be disappointed when 
the measurements are first taken, to find that their breathing 
capacity is much smaller than that of others, but they will be 
comforted to learn that this defect can be overcome by daily 
practice in deep breathing in pure air. 

Ask how one becomes a skillful player upon the piano, or what 
makes a boy the best ball player in town ? The answer will 
be, practice upon the piano, or on the ball ground. Show that 
practice is also needed to make one a good breather, and 
that the lungs need exercise just as truly as the hand or the 
muscle or any organ of the body. 



PUKE AIR AND BREATHING 201 

Emphasize the fact that there is a great abundance of pure 
air, and that all that is necessary is to have our lungs large 
enough and free enough to take it in, and to be wise enough 
to do this. 

Show that the lungs will not grow large and strong any 
more than any other organ, if the deep-breathing exercise 
taken for this purpose is not regular and systematic and in 
pure air. 

Small weak lungs will grow stronger and larger and will be 
able to take in much oxygen, if we give them every day plenty 
of pure air and practice in deep breathing. 

Strong healthy lungs make us better able to resist disease 
than weak lungs. 

Miss Ayer: " You said we cannot see the air. Do you know 
whether we can smell it ?" 

We can smell most kinds of impure air, but good pure air 
has no smell ; it simply makes us feel brighter and better as 
soon as we breathe it. 

An unpleasant smell in the air shows that it is not the 
right kind to breathe, and that we should avoid it as quickly 
as possible. 

All poisonous gases do not give off odors, so we should keep 
away from places where we have reason to think the air may 
be bad. 

Miss Ayer: "Where besides in our schoolrooms should we 
be careful to have pure air ? " 

Explain that. we need plenty of pure air in the rooms we 
live in at home and in the rooms where we sleep. 

Ask pupils how they would keep the air in their living rooms 
pure all the time. 

Help them to understand the best ways of doing this in 
cold weather. Why should windows be opened at the top 
more frequently than at the bottom ? 



202 THIRD YEAR 



How Maude keeps Pure Air in her Bedroom 

Maude cannot open her windows wide at night because when 
very cold air blows directly on her bed she is apt to take cold, 
so, in addition to her window being opened a little way, she 
leaves her door open into the hall, and has a window out there 
open, because she knows she cannot sleep well unless she has 
pure air to breathe. In the morning, when she is dressed, she 
spreads her bedclothes one at a time over the chairs. Then 
she turns up her mattress and pillows, and opens her windows 
wide for the sun and wind to come in and make everything 
fresh and sweet. 

How many think that girls' beds should be opened nicely 
and their rooms aired so that they are sweet and clean, but 
that boys should sleep in stuffy rooms and leave their beds 
just as they get out of them ? 

What a Teacher saw behind a Bush 

The teacher of a third year primary class was on her way 
to school. Near a clump of bushes by the side of the street 
she smelled a strong kind of smoke. Going arouud.to see 
what made it, she found two boys who belonged to her class. 
Each had something round, not very long, wrapped in paper, 
in his mouth. It was burning at the end, and he was drawing 
in the smoke and puffing it out again with every breath. The 
teacher looked very sorry, but only said : " Good morning, 
boys. It is almost school time, so please throw away those 
things you are smoking and walk with me to school." 

That morning these boys were dull. They did not give 
good attention. The teacher showed what may happen to any 
one who smokes as those boys were doing. 

What made these boys so inattentive ? 



PURE AIR AND BREATHING 203 

MEMORY POINTS 

Proper breathing in pure air helps us to sit and stand erect. 

The air we breathe goes to our lungs. 

Pure air contains oxygen which keeps us alive. 

We must not breathe the same air over and over because the 
oxygen in it has been used up, and because it has been poisoned 
by the air we breathe out. 

When ice draw long, deep breaths of pure air, tee take in a great 
deal of oxygen. 

We must wear loose clothing in order to give our lungs plenty 
of room to work in. 

We can enlarge the chest by constant practice in breathing 
properly. 

Strong healthy lungs help to keep us well. 

Pure air has no odor. We should keep away from cdl places 
ivh°re the odor is bad. 

We need pure air in every room in the house. 

Cigarettes are made of tobacco. 

There is a poison in tobacco ccdled nicotine. 

The boy who smokes cigarettes gets some of this poisonous 
nicotine. 

Cigarettes will make a boy sick when he begins to smoke them. 

When a boy smokes cigarettes, they make him dull and stupid. 

The smoke may make his throat sore and hurt his lungs. 

Tobacco smoke makes the air impure. We should avoid places 
ivhere smokers have filled the air with tobacco smoke. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Value of the Recess Period 

The chief use of the recess is its complete suspension of ten- 
sion of will-power and the surrender to caprice for a brief 
interval. . . . The great physical need of the pupil is relaxa- 



204 THIRD YEAR 

tion ; the pupil needs to stretch his cramped muscles, and send 
the blood in torrents through his limbs which become torpid 
with unuse. The pupil is in want of fresh air and of the deep 
inflation of the lungs that exercise in the open air gives. He 
ought to use his voice too. — Hox. W. T. Harris, LL.D., U.S. 
Commissioner of Education. 

The Danger in Tobacco 

The boy who starts out in life as the user of tobacco embarks 
on an unknown ocean from which he can never return with the 
same vigor and strength of body and mind, the same sweet 
breath and clear eye. He may keep in sight of land for a long- 
time and live to be old, but it will be only through a combina- 
tion of the most favorable circumstances over which he has no 
control, and which he cannot foresee. — Journal of Hygiene. 

As regards the respiratory system, there is increased liabil- 
ity to bronchial catarrh in those who take much alcohol. 

— E. Hixgstox Fox, M.D., M.R.C.P. 



DRIXKS WHICH HURT 

LESSON 3. — CIDER 

Teacher : " Here are four questions for you to think over and 
answer." 

Why are ripe apples good to eat ? 

How is apple juice changed when it is made into cider? 
What poison does cider contain which apples do not ? 
What will cider do to those who drink it ? 

Ask the class to tell what they can about apples as in a 
nature lesson, bringing out the facts : — 



DRINKS WHICH HURT 205 

Ripe apples are a healthful fruit. 

The juice of the ripe apple is good as we get it in eating the 
apple. 

Standing before the class, break open a ripe apple, and hold 
it up so that all can see that the juice is clear like water. 
Then, if it is obtainable, show a glass of fermenting apple juice. 
Bring out by questions some of the differences in appearance 
between the apple juice as it is in the apple, and the ferment- 
ing juice. 

The apple juice has been changed to cider by the action of 
ferments. 

A short story will help to make clear how we know that 
these tiny ferments can change apple juice to cider even though 
we cannot see them at work. 

Tom had been There 

" Hasn't Tom come home from school yet ? " asked Mrs. 
Harley of her little daughter, one crisp Xovember afternoon ; 
" it is nearly five o'clock." 

" Yes, mother," called Gertrude from the garden, where she 
was looking for the last pansies, 

" Where is he ? " continued Mrs. Harley ; " Uncle George 
will be here in a few minutes to take us all for a drive behind 
his new horses." 

'•How jolly," cried Gertrude, hurrying into the house. "But 
I don't know where Tom is. I haven't seen him at all, but I'm 
sure he is at home by the way the study looks." 

Mrs. Harley quite agreed with her when she had opened the 
door and given one glance within. Two chairs were over- 
turned, the dictionary was sprawling on the floor, and the rugs 
had been kicked into a heap. Tom had been there sure enough. 

Ask the class how Mrs. Harley and Gertrude knew that Tom 
had come home when neither of them had seen him. 



206 



THIRD YRAR 



Explain that just as they knew that Tom had been in the 
room because they saw there the kind of mischief he was in 
the habit of making, so we can tell that 
the ferments have been at work in apple 
juice whenever we see that the sort of 
mischief they do in such a place has 
r 9 been done. 
r Ask different pupils to name 

again the changes which the fer- 
ments have made in the apple 
juice, noting in the cider the 
deepening color and the bub- 




bles of gas which pass up 
through the fermenting juice 
and burst at the top. 

These bubbles show that 
a gas (carbonic acid) has 
been formed, which bub- 
bles out of the juice. 

Alcohol has been 
formed which stays in 
the juice. 

Cider contains a Poison — Alcohol 

Review briefly what the children know already of poisons, 
giving such additional points as they are ready for. 

A poison is a substance which has the power to harm those 
who take it. A little of it may hurt people, and much may 
kill them. 

Alcohol is a poison. Alcohol begins to form in pressed-out 
apple juice after it has stood a few hours in a warm place. 

Ask different pupils to name some of the things which cider 
makes people who drink it do, 



DRINKS WHICH HURT 



207 



Cider makes many who drink it cross and disagreeable and 
gives them an ugly temper. Worse than all, it may make 1 
them want more eider and stronger drinks containing more 
alcohol until thev become drunkards. 



LESSON 4.— WINE 

Find whether the previous lesson on cider has been under- 
stood thoroughly by asking similar questions in regard to 
wine. 

What is wine made from ? 

T\ nat changes grape juice to wine ? 

What poison does wine contain which grapes do not ? 

Bring grapes to the class and let each child tell by tasting 
that they are sweet. Question until all can tell that sugar 
forms in the grapes as they 
ripen, just as the seeds do, 
but w r e cannot see it because 
it is dissolved in the juice. 
Ripe grapes from which 
raisins are made contain 
more sugar than unripe 
grapes, and in raisins this 
sugar can be seen in little 
lumps, colored, of course, 
by the juice. Some peo- 
ple think that grapes are 
dried in sugar to make 
raisins. This is not so, nor 
is it necessary because there 
is enough sugar formed in the grapes themselves as they ripen 
and are dried. 

Show grapes with the bloom still on them. Rub off some on 




208 THIRD YEAR 

the fingers and review the fact that this dust contains the 
little plants called ferments, and that these live on the outside 
of the grapes. 

Why do grapes need such a tough skin ? Why do they keep 
longer when the skin is unbroken ? Why do not these little 
ferments which we take into our mouths when eating grapes 
hurt us as they hurt the grape juice ? 

Help the class to understand that the ferments are plants, 
and are not harmful themselves any more than asparagus, corn, 
or lettuce, but that they can make a poison in the grape juice 
when they get into it after it is pressed out. 

Test the pupil's knowledge of the work of the ferments, by 
asking if there would be any alcohol in wine made very care- 
fully at home where nothing but good fruit juice is used in its 
making. Explain fully that it is not necessary to put alcohol 
into fruit juice, for the ferments themselves will make the 
alcohol from the sugar in the juice, and that all homemade 
wine contains alcohol. 

MEMORY POINTS 

Apple juice is a good food as ive find it in the apple. 

When apple juice is pressed out of the apple and allowed to 
stand, its odor, taste, and color soon become changed. 

It is changed to cider by the action of the ferments. 

Ferments are tiny plants which can change sweet apple juice to 
carbonic acid gas and alcohol. 

The gas bubbles out of the juice ; the jioison, alcohol, stays in it. 

A poison is a substance having the power to hurt those tcho 
take it. 

Cider makes many people cross and disagreeable. 

It often gives an appetite for much stronger liquors. 

Good ripe grapes contain sugar, but no alcohol. 

There are ferments on the outside of grapes, but none in whole 
grapes. 



DRINKS WHICH HURT 209 

Ferments in pressed-out grape juice change its sugar. 

When the ferments change the sugar in pressed-out fruit juices 
they leave alcohol in its place. 

There is alcohol in wine even though no one puts it into the 
grape juice. 

The alcohol in wine has the power to make those who take it 
want not only more and more wine, but drinks which contain 
more alcohol. 

Wine is a dangerous drink. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Alcohol, not in strong liquors alone, but in the diluted 
kinds as beer and wine made from fruits is a poison. — August 
Forel, M.D., Zurich, Switzerland. 

The homemade wines are often stronger of alcohol than the 
imported; hence they are far from being innocent, harmless 
beverages. — William Hargreaves, M.D. 

The taking of alcohol excites a constant craving for more of 
itself, day after day. — Benjamin Ward Richardson, M.D.. 
LL.D., F.E.S. 

A very large number of people are dying day by day, poi- 
soned by alcohol, but not supposed to be poisoned by it. — Sir 
William Gull, M.D. 

FOOD 

LESSON 5. — WHAT FOOD IS FOR 

There was once a beautiful pink and white blossom which 
felt something small and hard and round growing up from her 
very heart. Ever since she had been a tiny bud, the very pret- 
tiest on the tree, this blossom had danced and played with the 
breezes, and smiled back at the sun, and had been a very gay 
little flower, but now she felt for the first time that even an 

OR. LESS. IN HY. 1-t 




210 THIRD YEAR 

apple blossom has work to do. Not a moment did she wait. 
Her pink and white holiday gown with its dainty frills and 
wide flounces was given to the wind, leaving in its place, on the 
top of the little apple, something with sharp green points that 
looked more like tiny green leaves than a blossom. The arms 
of the tree on which the little apple grew were stretched out 
so gracefully that it was quite out of the question for the sun 
and air to refuse anything they had which the apple wanted. 
Special messengers ran up and down the staircase of this tree 
home to bring to the apple things from the dark ground where 
all the roots of the tree were. You couldn't see them or what 

they brought, but the apple could. 

They brought it the right things 

every time, and it grew larger and 

larger, until by and by most won- 
£ clerful colors were painted on it. 

Here it was yellow like gold, with 
j tiny black dots, while on the other 

side it was red as the reddest 

,/' ' peach. Then the little pointed 

\T V - I | green leaves, on the top of the 

apple, turned brown, curled up, 
and went fast asleep, for their work was done. If we look at 
the big ripe apple very closely, we can see the little brown 
mother blossom still asleep in her nest. 

Show pictures of a tiny elm or oak and others of the same 
kind of tree of several years' growth; pictures of hens and 
chickens, kittens and their mothers ; or write on the board in 
one column the names of different young animals, and opposite 
these the names of their grown-up representatives. How is the 
calf unlike the cow ? the puppy unlike the dog ? Why do 
not healthy plants and animals remain the same from year to 
year ? What kinds of food are needed by animals ? Where 
do plants get their food ? 



FOOD 211 

Plants need food to make them grow, just as people do. 
Plants get the food they need from the sun, air, water, and 
earth. 

Ask each member of the class to bring to the next recitation 
an answer to the question, What is food ? Ask them to bring- 
also lists of food containing articles which they have eaten or 
would like to eat. 

Get as many individual answers as possible and put the best 
on the board : — 

Food is a substance whose nature it is to nourish the body 
and build it up without doing it harm. 

Call for the children's lists and have selections made from 
them for the board: — 

Milk Potatoes 

Eggs Sugar Salt 

Beef Bread 

Lead the pupils to see that the first column contains the 
names of animal foods ; the second, vegetable ; and the third, 
mineral. These descriptive names should then be written over 
the lists. 

Tell the class that the foods in the first column make flesh 
and bone and muscle ; those in the second enable us to do work 
and keep us warm. Salt is used to season our food. Most 
other mineral foods, as lime, for instance, we do not eat by 
themselves, but only as found in animal and vegetable foods. 
The children will then be ready for the question: — 

What does Food Do? 

Help the children to compare one of their number with a 
pupil in the high school. Which is taller, larger, weighs more, 
stronger, able to do more ? 

Referring to the story just told, ask why the little apple 
still needed food after it was grown? Lead them to see that 



212 THIRD YEAR 

without it it could not grow ripe and sweet and of a fine color. 
From this help the pupils to see that all people need food to 
keep them well and strong as well as to make them grow. 

We need food to make us grow and to repair the waste in 
our bodies so that they will not wear out. 

Eating too much food prevents the stomach from doing the 
work it ought. 

Too frequent eating may tire the stomach so that it may not 
be able to do its work. 

We should eat enough good food to nourish our bodies, but 
should not overload our stomachs just because food tastes 
good. 

We should eat at regular times and riot between meals. 

Poor food cannot make good blood or strong bodies. 

Notice the contents of the lunch baskets brought to school, 
•and give the class hints as to the proper preparation of food, 
leading the pupils to tell why fried meats, soggy bread, green 
fruit, and that which is overripe, are unhealthful and injurious. 



LESSON 6. — SOME THINGS WHICH ARE NOT FOOD 

The most frequent examples of such articles are the common 
forms of alcohol, as cider, beer, and wine. 

Cider, beer, and wine are not foods because they contain 
alcohol. 

We need food in proper quantities for three reasons : — 

To make us grow and to keep us well, i.e. food to build up 
the muscles of the body which are all the time wearing out, 
and thus to form flesh. 

Food to keep us warm. 

Food for our bones. 



FOOD 213 

Drinks which contain alcohol do not belong to the first class 
of foods, because alcohol does not build up the body nor form 
flesh. 

Drinks which contain alcohol do not belong to the second 
class, because alcohol does not keep us warm. It seems to 
warm the body because it makes red faces and causes a glow 
and a sense of warmth. But if we take the temperature of 
the body with a thermometer, we find that, after a short flash 
of warmth, the body begins to cool, and cools so much that it 
takes a long time to get warm again. The reason for this is 
that much of the inner heat of the body has come to the 
surface and passed off. 

Drinks which contain alcohol do not belong to the third 
class. The great mineral food which feeds bone is a kind of 
lime. Alcohol contains no lime or other mineral matter. Of 
all things then it is not a mineral food. 

If the roots of the apple tree had been given alcohol instead 
of water the apple would not have grown large and beautiful. 
It would have stayed small and would have withered away 
into a rough, gnarled little apple that nobody would have 
wanted. 

Which has more need of good wholesome food, little apples 
on the tree or boys and girls ? 

MEMORY POINTS 

Plants need food to make them grow, just as animals and 
people do. 

The food of plants comes from the sun, air, water, and earth. 

We get our food mainly from plants and animals. 

We need different kinds of food. 

Such foods as milk, eggs, and meat give strength and muscle. 

Such foods as potatoes, bread, and sugar form fat and keep 
the body warm. 



214 THIRD YEAR 

We need food for growth, and to repair the icaste of our bodies. 

Too much food tires the stomach and keeps it from doing its 
work properly. 

We should eat enough food, but not sq much as to overload the 
stomach. 

Wholesome food will make good blood and strong bodies. 

Alcohol is not a food because it does not build up the body or 
form flesh. 

It does not strengthen the body or keep it warm. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Alcohol does not act as a food ; it cuts short the life of 
rapidly growing cells or causes them to grow more slowly. 
— Lionel S. Beale, M.D., Professor Principles and Practice 
of Medicine, King's College, England. 

We find that those who injure their brains by tobacco, alco- 
hol, and other kinds of intoxicants, at the same time bring on 
digestive troubles which cannot be cured until the causes are 
removed. Even tea and coffee are frequent causes of indiges- 
tion. — Journal of Hygiene. 

Alcohol, taken however moderately, is not to be classed 
among nutritious substances. — Adolf Fick, M.D., Wurtzburg. 

Alcohol is a slow but sure working poison that robs men of 
their physical and mental force, the more it takes the place of 
ordinary food. — A. Baer, M.D., Roycd Sanitary Commissioner, 
Berlin. 

THE STOMACH 

LESSON 7. — THE HUMAN MILL 

Show the picture of a mill and ask those children who have 
visited mills to tell what they saw. In the East they may 
have seen a paper mill where rags are ground up and made 



THE STOMACH 



215 



into clean white paper. In the West many will have seen the 
flour mills in which kernels of wheat are put into the hopper 
and ground into tine flour, or the grist mills where corn and 



: 




"J& 

r H 



oats are made into meal for the cows 
and horses. Surely one child in 
every room will have seen a mill of 
some kind. If the description is of 
a flour or grist mill, ask about the 
hopper into which the grain is 
poured, and the big rough stones be- 
tween which the grain is crushed 
and ground. Then speak of the 
miller who keeps all the machinery oiled and in the best 
order so that it will last as long as possible and run 
easily. He watches the hopper too, and does not let any 






~3T- * 



216 



THIRD YEAR 



pieces of iron and nails which may have got mixed with the 
corn or oats get down to the grinding stones, lest they should 
hurt the stones. He takes the best kind of care of the mill- 
stones, for they do the grinding for him. 

The Grist Mill 

Teacher : " There is a part of the body which does work 
something like that done by the mill, only it is not the least 

bit like a mill. In- 
stead of being fed with 
whole wheat, or corn, 
or oats, this curious 
little mill is fed with 
potatoes, oatmeal, milk, 
bread, and vegetables. 
Who knows what we 
call it ? » 
The stomach. 
Teacher : " Yes, this 
is a picture of it. Tell me what it is shaped like." 

" I think it is shaped something like a big egg" said Albert. 
" It looks like a bag with two mouths," said Rose. 
Teacher : " It is very much like a strong fleshy bag. It is 
not at all like the hard millstones, but the strong muscles in 
the sides of the stomach squeeze the food which we put into 
it until it is as fine as a big mill could grind it. In the 
mouth the stomach has many little helpers which grind the 
food before it gets to the stomach, something as the millstones 
grind the grain. Who knows their names ? " 
The teeth. 

Teacher : " The stomach does not like to do the work of 
the teeth. It cannot talk, but it often does not take us long 
to find out when we have made the stomach do the work of 
the teeth, or when we have given it something which is not 




THE STOMACH 217 

good for it and which it cannot digest easily. What happens 
in such a case ? " 

We get sick. 

We have the stomach ache. 

Teacher : " That is usually the way we know. Harold may 
tell the story of a piece of bread in its journey from the plate 
to the stomach of the boy who eats it. A Ye will watch to 
see if he leaves out anything." 

Harold : " The boy takes the bread in his hand and carries 
it to his mouth, where he chews it with his teeth. Then he 
swallows it and it goes into his stomach." 

Teacher : " Did Harold leave out anything ? " 

Some one may know of the juice or saliva in the mouth. 

Teacher : " Yes, he forgot to tell how the food is softened 
and mixed with the saliva." 

When the food is chewed fine it becomes well moistened in 
the mouth, and that helps the stomach to do its work. 

There is a wonderful juice which comes from the walls of 
the stomach, just as the saliva comes from the walls of the 
mouth. This is called the gastric juice. 

After the food has been squeezed by the strong muscles in 
the walls of the stomach, a great deal of gastric juice will be 
mixed with it. 

By the motions of the stomach and by the gastric juice the 
food which we have eaten is changed to a thin gray substance 
something like soup or gravy, and does not look at all like the 
meat, potatoes, and other things we sw r allowed a few hours 
before. 

Who remembers why we eat ? Arthur may tell us. 
" We eat to grow," said Arthur. 

Teacher : " Is there any other reason ? Do people never eat 
unless they are growing ? " 

We eat to bnild up worn-out parts. 



218 THIRD YEAR 

Teacher : "Now we must learn how this changed food in the 
stomach gets to the different parts of the body in order to 
build up the bones, muscles, and various organs. How do we 
know that the blood goes all over the body ? " 

If necessary, suggest that we know because all parts of the 
body except the hair and nails bleed if cut. 

Teacher : " If anything gets into the blood then it would be 
carried to every part of the body. 

••Xow we must find out how the food we eat gets to the 
blood. 

" The blood is in little blood vessels or tabes which run to 
every part of the body. 

" In the walls of the stomach are tiny blood vessels which 
have very thin walls. The dissolved food soaks through these 
thin walls and gets into the blood, which carries it all over the 
body, so that every part gets what it needs.'' 

Teacher: "You will learn more about this wonderful mill 
when you are older. It seems almost like a fairy tale. But 
you can learn now how you should take care of this marvelous 
little mill to keep it strong and well, and prevent its becoming 
worn out or diseased. How did the miller take care of the 
millstones ? " 

He was careful not to let any hard thing get to them that 
would hurt them. 

Teacher : " There is another thing he sometimes does. When 
the stones get very hot from turning so fast and from crushing 
the rough grain, the miller stops the wheel and lets them rest 
and cool off. Now let us think what we can do to help keep 
our stomachs from being injured." 

LESSON 8. —HOW TO CARE FOR THIS WONDERFUL MILL 

We must chew our food so well that the stomach will not 
have to do the work of the teeth. 



THE .STOMACH 219 

We must let the stomach rest, and not eat too often. 

We must not eat or drink things which hurt the stomach. 

Teacher: "Let us try to think of some things which the 
stomach does not digest easily — things that have made some 
of us sick." 

" Green apples made me sick one time," said Bert. 

"I ate too many nuts at a party and they made me sick/' 
volunteered Joe. 

" Too much candy isn't good for us/' suggested Blanche. 

Teacher : " When we want things which we know are not 
good for the stomach, we must remember that our stomachs 
are mills and that we are the millers, and make up our minds 
to take good care not to eat what will hurt them. 

" People sometimes drink something which hurts the stom- 
ach very much. Who knows what it is ? " 

" Drinks which have alcohol in them, like wine, beer, or 
cider/' said Jack. 

Teacher: " Yes, alcoholic drinks injure the lining of the 
stomach, and when people drink much of them they may pre- 
vent the food from being digested, and make the person sick 
and unhappy. People with unhealthy stomachs are often very 
cross and disagreeable. Xow what shall we add to the list 
of ways in which we may help take care of our wonderful 
mill ? " 

Alcoholic liquors hurt the stomach, and we must never 
drink them if we want to keep well. 

MEMORY POINTS 

The stomach softens the food and helps make it ready to be 
carried all over the body. 

Hie gastric juice in the stomach helps to digest the food. 

The stomach cannot do its work well unless the food is first well 
chewed in the mouth and mixed with saliva. 



220 THIRD YEAR 

There are tiny tubes or blood vessels in the walls of the stomach 
which soak up the digested food. The blood vessels carry the food 
to every part of the body. 

We must not eat or drink anything which would hurt the 
stomach. 

Any liquor with alcohol in it will hurt the stomach and hinder 
its work. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

It has been fairly demonstrated that alcohol neither aids 
digestion, prevents diseases, nor prolongs life. It does pre- 
vent and pervert the proper action of the ferments of the 
stomach, thus interfering with the digestive and assimilating 
processes. — I. X. Quimby, M.D. 

On salivary digestion malt liquors have a very great retarding 
effect, especially when the saliva is quite dilute. — Drs. Chit- 
tenden and Mendel, Yale University. 



THE BLOOD 
LESSON 9. —THE WORK OF THE BLOOD 

Teacher: "A few days ago I visited a school just as the 
children were coming in. It was raining hard, and all the 
little tots had their umbrellas. This is the way two of them 
looked as they came along the road, 

" I didn't see a frown or a scowl although it was such a 
disagreeable day. Every little face was as bright and rosy 
as plenty of fresh air and a dash of rain could make it. 

"Why did they have rosy faces when they came indoors? 
What makes our cheeks red? All of you have seen it when 
you have been unfortunate enough to cut your fingers. 



THE BLOOD 221 

"That is right; it is the blood. It gives us rosy cheeks 
when we run because more of it comes to our faces then and 
makes them warm and red." 

How many have watched men tap maple trees to get the 
sap ? What time of year was it ? 

How does the tree change in looks after the sap begins to 
rise in the spring ? 

Bring out at this point the different stages of growth from 
bud to leaf, blossom, and fruit. 




What has the sap to do with the new leaves and blossoms ? 

"My father says the sap makes them grow/' volunteers one 
boy. 

Yes, the sap carries to every part of the tree the food and 
water it gets from the earth. If it didn't the tree would stop 
growing and die. Every part of our bodies needs food, too. 
Can you think of a way in which it can get it ? 

"The blood carries the food we eat just as the sap carries 
food for the tree," suggests some one. 

Quite right. Tell me again how food gets to every part of 
the body. 

The blood carries the food we have eaten to all parts of our 



222 THIRD YEAR 

bodies just as the sap carries the food it gets from the earth to 
the branches of the tree. 

Teacher : " How is water brought into our cities and houses ? " 
Our blood is all the time moving about in little pipes too. It 

is not loose in our bodies. These pipes we call blood vessels. 

Here is a picture of them. Tell what you see. 

A large colored chart showing the entire circulatory system 
should be hung on the board at this point, or a colored draw- 
ing of the same used, and each child asked to state what he 
notices. They should find that — 

Some of the blood vessels are red and others are blue. 

Blood vessels are found in every part of the body. 

The blood vessels are of different sizes, largest near the 
center of the body and growing smaller in the head, arms, and 
legs, and near the surface. 

Every part of the body has both red and blue blood vessels. 



LESSON 10. — THE WORK OF THE HEART 

Robert : " You said the blood was all the time moving in the 
blood vessels. What makes it move ? " 

Teacher: "Rise and put your right hands on joxxy chests 
just a little to the left. Stand very still a moment, and tell 
me what you feel." 

I feel my heart beat. 

Teacher : u Look at the chart again and see if you can find 
the heart. Tell us about it." 

The heart is shaped something like a pear. 

One side of the heart is colored blue. 

The other side of the heart is colored red. 

All the blood vessels seem to start from the heart — the red 




Circulatory System. 



223 



224 THIRD YEAR 

blood vessels from the left side and the blue blood vessels from 

the right side. 1 

Teacher: "How does a pump work? Oliver may tell us." 
Oliver : " You move the pump handle up and down, and the 

water runs out of the spout." 

Teacher : " The heart works in something the same way, so 

we may think of the heart as a kind of pump that works itself. 

When we feel it beat it squeezes together and sends the blood 

all over the body." 

The work of the heart is to send the blood to every part of 
the body through the blood vessels. 

Teacher : "We know the blood is all the time moving, be- 
cause there are several places in the body where we can feel 
it. Who can find another such place besides the heart?" 

After a little experimenting the children will find the pulse 
in the wrist, and at the sides of the neck and forehead. 

Why can't we feel the blood move in all parts of our bodies ? 

Teacher : " Many of the blood vessels are so small that 
they do not hold enough blood for any one to feel it passing 
through." 

Look at the chart and point out the blood vessels which 
you think have enough blood in them for us to feel it move. 

Most of these large blood vessels are so deeply hidden 
under the skin and muscle to protect them from injury that 
we cannot feel them. 

These that we have found are near enough to the surface 
for us to tell where they are. 

Most of the large blood vessels are covered up deep in the 
body to keep them from being hurt. 

Many of the small blood vessels lie near the skin. 

1 At some suitable point in the lesson the teacher will explain that the heart 
is not really colored red and blue, but is represented thus on the chart to show 
which side contains pure and which impure blood. 



THE BLOOD 225 



LESSON 11. — THE FOOD'S JOURNEY IN OUR BODIES 

Teacher : " This morning we are ready for another question 
about the blood vessels. 

" Why are some of the blood vessels reel and others blue ? 

"Before we try to answer, let us follow the blood as it 
carries food and air to every part of the body and see what 
happens. 

" Suppose this man on our chart has just eaten a piece of 
steak. What becomes of it ?" 

The steak is chewed in the mouth and mixed with saliva. 

It is swallowed and goes down into the stomach. 

There is a watery juice in the stomach which helps to dis- 
solve the steak and make it something like a thick soup. 

When it is fine enough part of it soaks through the sides of 
the stomach into little tubes. 

These little tubes are called blood vessels. 

Just as soon as the food which thus becomes part of the blood 
has moved along in the blood vessels from the stomach to the 
heart, the heart sends it in the blood to every part of the body. 

Teacher: "Suppose we begin with the red side of the heart 
and find where the red blood vessels and the food which they 
carry along in them go. 

" Dora may come to the chart and show how those parts of 
the steak which a man's right arm needs would get to it after 
they leave his heart." 

With the pointer Dora traces their course on the chart 
through a large red blood vessel along the shoulder, and then 
into smaller and smaller ones down the arm, and into the tiny 
blood vessels in the fingers. 

Teacher: "The bloodvessels become so very small after a 
while that we cannot see them at all unless we look at them 
through a magnifying glass." Call upon different members of 

OR. LESS. IN HY. 15 



226 THIRD YEAR 

the class to trace the course of the blood from the heart to the 
left arm, the head, and other parts of the body. 

Teacher: "How does the blood get back again from the tips 
of the fingers, or the toes, or any other part ? We have found 
that it keeps moving all the time, and it cannot go back the 
same way because more blood keeps coming right behind it." 

"Perhaps it goes back through the blue blood vessels," 
suggests Harold. 

Teacher : " That is just what it does do. Now I'll tell you 
why the blue blood vessels have this color. 

" How are your hands and face likely to look after you 
have been hard at work or play ? " 

Black, dirty, soiled. 

Teacher : " That is what has happened to the blood after it 
has gone quite a distance from the heart. It picks up so many 
worn-out parts of the body and carries them along with it that 
it becomes very dark-colored by the time it gets back to this 
blue side of the heart. What do you think it needs then ? " 

" I should think it ought to have its face washed," says 
one mischievous youngster who has often had this remedy 
suggested to him. 

Teacher : " Something of the kind really does happen. 
Thomas may come to the chart and trace the blue blood 
vessels after they leave the heart, and we'll find out where 
they get cleaned up." 

Thomas takes the pointer, and with the teacher's help traces 
the blue blood vessels from the heart to the lungs, showing 
that as they get farther from the heart they grow smaller and 
smaller, and there are more and more of them until in the 
lungs they seem to run into little bits of red blood vessels. 
What make them red ? 

Teacher: "When our rooms get close and stuffy, what do 
we do to make them sweet and fresh again ? " 

We open the windows and let in the fresh air. 



THE BLOOD 227 

Teacher: "When the door and windows are opened, fresh 
air comes in and helps to make the air in the room pure and 
fit to breathe ; so the fresh air we breathe goes into our lungs 
and thus reaches the blood. 

" Fresh air changes the impure blue blood to pure red blood. 
Then we have good fresh blood again to be sent to every part 
of the body. 

" Alice may show us on the chart how the air gets down to 
the lungs and then what becomes of the fresh red blood." 

The air passes down a tube in the throat into two other 
tubes, one on each side, which go to the lungs. 

These tubes grow smaller and smaller, until there are a great 
many of them. 

The fresh air brought by these little tubes cleans the dark 
blood and makes it bright red. 

The clean blood goes through the red blood vessels back to 
the left side of the heart ready to go out again all over the 
body. 

LESSON 12. — GOOD FOOD AND FRESH AIR MAKE GOOD 

BLOOD 

Teacher: "You remember the pictures on the board the 
other day of the little school children in the rain. This shows 
how they looked when they went home that night after the 
rain had cleared away." 

It is a good thing for children to run and play, because it 
makes their blood move faster and they take more fresh air 
into their lungs. Fresh air helps make good blood. 

Good blood will make every part of the body grow, and will 
keep us well and strong. 

Eeview this part of the lesson by drawing a circle upon the 
board, filling it in with red chalk for a head, and drawing 



228 



THIRD YEAR 



lines for the body, arms, and legs. Outline a basket in each 
hand. 

Teacher: "Let me introduce Mr. Blood to you; he is just 
starting out from the heart on a journey through the body, and 
in this left-hand basket he is carrying things which the differ- 
ent parts of the body need. 

" Tell me what some of them are while I put them into the 
basket for him." 

Remembering a previous lesson on food, the class may sug- 
gest milk, eggs, beef, to make the body grow and keep it well ; 



w» 




potatoes, sugar, and butter to keep it warm and supply the fat 
needed; whole wheat bread and vegetables to build up strong 
bones and teeth ; and plenty of water and fresh air for every 
part. 

Teacher : " Can any one think what Mr. Blood's other basket 
is for?" 

He needs the right-hand basket to carry away worn-out parts 
of the body. 

Teacher: "Then we will leave it empty and let him fill it 
himself." 



THE BLOOD 229 

Alcohol and Tobacco poison the Blood 

I knew a boy once, not larger than some of you, who 
thought it would make him manly to smoke cigarettes and 
drink beer. Instead, it kept him so small and thin he was not 
much more than half a boy. Do you know why he did not 
grow any more ? 

Boys and girls need good blood and strong hearts to make 
them grow. 

There is a poison in all drinks like beer and in cigarettes 
which hurts the blood and weakens the heart. 

When this poison gets into the blood it must go where the 
blood goes, and that is all over the body ; so every part may 
be injured. That is what had happened to this boy, and 
that is the reason why he did not grow as he ought. 

Teacher: "We found a little while ago that we must have 
two things in order to make good blood — good food and fresh 
air. Tell me two other things that may hurt our blood and 
keep us from growing." 

Which shall we choose for ourselves ? 

MEMORY POINTS 

The heart pumps the red blood all over the body. 

Wlien the red blood leaves the heart it is carried in blood 
vessels about as large around as a finger. 

The blood vessels grow smaller and smaller the farther away 
from the heart they are, until they get so small we cannot see them 
without a microscope. 

The red blood takes food and air to cdl parts of the body. 

The small blood vessels take up tuaste matter from the body. 
This makes the blood very dark-colored. 

TJie dark blood goes back to the heart, which sends it to the 
lungs to be made fresh and clean and bright red again. 



230 THIRD YEAR 

The fresh blood goes back to the heart and is ready to be sent 
to all parts of the body. 

Beer and all such drinks hurt the blood and may keep boys and 
girls from growing as they ought. 

There is a poison in cigarettes and other kinds of tobacco which 
hurts those who use it. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Alcohol deranges and oftentimes destroys the blood corpus- 
cles. It coagulates the albumen and fibrin of the blood. It 
paralyzes the organic nerve distribution to the blood capillaries, 
and produces congestion and stagnation. It is a poison. — 
Professor Delos Fall. 

Experiments show that the real vital force of the heart is 
diminished by the use of alcohol. — T. D. Crothers, M.D. 



BEAIN AND NERVES 
LESSON 13. — THE BRAIN 

Place a live, healthy plant and a dead and shriveled one 
side by side. 

Call attention to the two. What is the difference ? 

Question until all understand that the live plant can grow 
and put out more leaves and branches, and that the dead one 
cannot. ISTame other things besides plants which are alive. 

Teacher : " There is a great difference between live plants 
and live children. We must find what it is, and what makes 
it: You have told me this plant is alive. All who think 
Mary is alive, raise their hands. 

" Mary, will you show that you are alive by bowing to the 
class ? 

" Mary is alive. She heard what I said, and when I asked 



BRAIN AND NERVES 231 

her to bow to you she did. The plant you said was alive. 
Will it do the same thing I asked Mary to do ? 

"No, the plant cannot hear or obey, but there is something 
inside our heads which helps us think and decide what we will 
do." 

The brain is that part of us with which we think and decide 
what we will do or will not do. 

The brain is inside the head. 

Teacher: " Tap your heads lightly just above your right 
ears with the ends of your fingers. Do your heads feel hard 
or soft ? " 

The brain is soft, softer than the flesh of your cheeks. It 
is covered on the outside with hard, thin bone to protect it 
from being hurt. 

The head feels hard because the bone that covers the brain 
is hard. 

The bone covering the brain is called the skull. 

Make sure that the children understand that the skull which 
they feel is hollow and that the brain is inside. Ask the shape 
of the skull and the shape of the head. Show that while it is 
much like a ball, it is not quite so round as a ball. Hold a 
ball by the side of the head that all may see the difference. 
Dwell on the danger that might come to the soft and delicate 
brain, how easily it might be hurt, if the hard bony skull did 
not protect it. 

The brain is the most important part of us. The plant has 
no brain. If we had no brain we could not think any more 
than the plant. We could not see. Neither our eyes nor our 
ears would be of any use if we had no brain, for the eyes and 
ears tell the brain what they see and hear. 

Teacher: "We must find how the eyes and ears can tell 
the brain what they see and hear. They do not speak to the 
brain with the voice, as I talk to you. There are fine white 



232 



THIRD YEAR 



cords that run to all parts of our bodies. Some of them go 
from the eyes and ears to the brain. They carry to the brain 
the message of what the eyes see and what the ears hear." 

Show an outline picture of the nervous system or reproduce 
it on the board. Point out the little cords running up to the 
brain and ask the class to trace them. 

The little white cords that carry messages to and from the 
brain are called nerves. 



LESSON 14. — DICK AND THE CARVING KNIFE 

Dick was a little boy who was very fond of doing whatever 
he saw older people do. He liked to dress up in his papa's 




coat and hat. He liked to go riding as he saw his big brother 
do. He made a chair take the place of his brother's prancing 
pony. He used to get down from his make-believe horse, stride 



BRAIN AND NERVES 233 

around, and talk to his sister Rose as though she were a big 
grown-up lady. 

Their mamma had given Rose a tiny dinner table and a set 
of pretty little dishes. Rose and Dick were playing with them 
for the first time and pretending to give a dinner party. The 
jointed dolls were the guests. Dick made them sit in the little 
chairs around the table. 

."Now, Rose," he said, " I am going to be the papa and carve. 
You haven't any carving knife, and I am going to get the big 
one in the dining room." 

" Dick, don't ! I don't think mamma would want you 
to. She told us to be good and play here while she was gone 
to see grandma. It isn't good to get the carving knife; I know 
it isn't. Don't, Dick." 

But Dick paid no attention to what Rose said, and as there 
was no one in the dining room to stop him, he soon appeared 
with the large, sharp carving knife and fork he had often seen 
his papa use, and began to flourish the knife over the bread, 
oranges, and cake that the cook had given them for their 
party. Dick tried to be very polite to the dolls, and asked 
them, as he had heard his papa do, what part of the chicken 
they liked best. But he was too small to manage such a knife, 
and all at once he brought its sharp edge against the side of 
his hand and cut a deep gash. The blood spurted out, and 
Dick dropped the knife and screamed so loudly that his mamma, 
who had just come into the front hall, heard him and rushed 
up to the playroom, where he was crying, " Oh, my hand, my 
hand ! How it hurts ! " 

It was a bad cut. The doctor came and helped Dick's mamma 
bind up the hand; but it was very sore and ached for many 
days before it was well again. After that, Dick liked to play 
doctor and come to see make-believe cuts in the hands of the 
dollies, but he never again wanted the real carving knife to 
play with. 



234 THIRD YEAR 

One day Rose cut the hand of one of her dolls so that Dick 
might have a real patient. 

" It won't hurt her," Dick said, when he asked her to do it. 

That afternoon Dick's mamma took him to the barber, who 
cut his hair. " It didn't hurt when the barber cut my hair/' 
Dick told Rose, after he came home. 

Teacher : " There are three things about this story to find 
out. 

" First, why did it hurt Dick to cut his hand ? 

" I will tell you. There are so many little nerves all through 
our bodies, that we cannot prick ourselves without a nerve 
feeling the prick and sending a message up to the brain that 
it is hurt." 

The knife cut and hurt the nerves in Dick's hand, and 
they sent a message of pain to his brain. 

Why did it not hurt Dick when the barber cut his hair ? 

Help the children to understand that it does not hurt to cut 
the hair because there are no nerves in the hair. 

It hurts to pull the hair, because there are nerves in the 
roots of the hair. 

It did not hurt the doll when Rose cut its hand, because the 
doll has no brain and no nerves. 



LESSON 15.— WORK OF THE NERVES 

The nerves of our eyes tell the brain what we see. 

The nerves in the nose tell the brain what we smell. 

The nerves in our ears tell the brain what we hear. 

The nerves in the mouth tell the brain what we taste. 

The nerves in the skin tell the brain what we touch. 

There are nerves in almost every part of the body except 
the hair, the nails, and the outside parts of the teeth and 
skin. 



BRAIN AND NERVES 235 

Teacher: "Suppose you take hold of anything that burns 
you, what makes you drop it at once ? " 

We drop it because it is hot. 

Teacher : " Let us think how we know it is hot. These little 
nerves in our fingers, which we have been talking about, carry 
the message to the brain that they are being burned, and the 
brain quickly sends back the answer by another set of nerves 
to the muscles, ' Drop it at once ! ' and we let go the hot thing. 

"Messages go very quickly over these little nerves, — quicker 
than over telegraph or telephone wires, and they have to be 
quick because we cannot know anything or do anything with- 
out their aid. Think of some message which you want your 
nerves to carry to your brain, and tell about it." 

Call upon different pupils to mention any simple act, such 
as smelling a rose, pinching one's finger, or hearing the dinner 
bell ring, while others tell whether a pleasant or painful mes- 
sage has been carried to the brain, and what nerves have 
carried it. 

Our nerves help us to know about things. 

The nerves tell the brain when we are hurt, when we are 
warm or cold, what we see and hear and smell, and when 
things are pleasant or disagreeable. 

We could not move or take a step without nerves because 
all parts of the body are moved by their aid. 

What Nerves Need 

Teacher: "Name some part of your body which grows and 
is larger and stronger this year than last." 

Before the list is complete some child will probably hazard 
the statement that all parts of the body grow. If not, tell 
them that this is true, and also that because nerves are a part 
of the body they too must grow. 

What does the body need to make it grow ? What do the 



236 THIRD YEAR 

nerves need in order to increase their size and strength, and to 
keep them healthy ? 

To have good, healthy nerves, we need — 

Plenty of good food to eat. 

Much exercise in the open air and sunshine. 

Pure air to breathe when we are awake and asleep. 

Plenty of sleep, especially in the early part of the night. 

LESSON 16. — WHAT WILL HURT THE NERVES 

Teacher: "We have found out some of the things we must 
have if we want to help our nerves to grow strong and healthy. 
There are other things which always hurt these delicate parts 
of the body and keep them from growing as they ought, and 
these we must be just as careful to avoid using. We will have 
two of them written on the board to remind us that they are 
poisons and that we must not use them in any form." 

One or more pupils may be asked to write on the board 
the names of these substances as they are given by others. 
Some of the effects of each upon the nerves may then be taken 
up more in detail. 

Alcohol and tobacco are powerful narcotic poisons. 
A narcotic is a substance which can make people stupid and 
put them to sleep. 

Ask the class to give the name of the narcotic poison found 
in beer ; in cider ; in wine. 

Alcoholic liquors have the power to hurt the nerves which 
tell us about things, and to prevent them from carrying right 
messages to the brain, because they contain some of the nar- 
cotic poison, alcohol. 

Alcoholic liquors have the power to hurt the nerves which 
move our bodies, so that those who use them cannot walk 
steadily. 



BRAIN AM) NERVES 237 

Alcoholic liquors have the power to keep the nerves from 
telling us when we are cold or tired. 

Alcoholic liquors have the power to make us so dull and 
stupid that we can neither study well nor play well. 

Alcoholic liquors have the power to make us think bad 
thoughts. 

Alcoholic liquors have the power to keep us from doing 
right and to make us do wrong. 

Jack's First Cigarette 

Jack Hunter thought himself almost a man. He had just 
had a birthday, and that made him feel much older than the 
twins, Amy and Ned, who would not have a like celebration 
until the next summer. Then, too, he went to school and had 
lessons to learn, while they played all clay. 

One night he came home much excited. a We are going 
to have a vacation next week/' he told the twins, "and I'll 
not have to go to school. Miss Lake says that everybody who 
works hard at lessons needs a vacation to rest his brain and 
nerves. 

"The brain is what we think with, you know, and the 
nerves are little teenty white cords almost all over your body 
on the inside. They're so close together you can't stick a pin 
into you without touching them somewhere, and then they tell 
the brain about it right off. That's how yon know you're hurt. 
Our last lesson in physiology was about the nerves, but I don't 
suppose I can make you understand about them. You're not 
old enough." 

"We want a 'cation, too," demanded Xed and Amy, who 
always longed for just what Jack had. 

" You can't have a vacation, of course," explained Jack with 
much superior wisdom. " Nobody does who isn't in school. 
Now don't cry," he added, at sight of the twins' doleful faces, 



238 



THIRD YEAR 



" you'll be big enough to go to school next year, and then yon 
can have a vacation every time I do." 

That seemed to Ned and Amy a long time to wait, and there 
were symptoms of an outcry when Jack thought of something 
else. 

" What do you suppose I've got in my pocket ? " he said. 
" Sit down here and I'll tell you, but you mustn't tell anybody. 
"Will you promise ? 

" One of the fellows gave it to me this afternoon, and I'm 
going to try it after dinner, clown behind the barn. You may 

come along if you like. 
It's a cigarette. Some 
of the boys of my age 
smoke 'em. You'll be 
big enough to by and by, 
Ned, but Amy can't ever 
because she's a girl." 

"I don't want to," 
said Amy, in strong dis- 
gust. " I don't like 
boys who smoke. They 
are cross and horrid and 
smelly. I wish I hadn't promised not to tell." 

About four o'clock that day Ned came running to the house. 
Amy was there alone. 

" Where's mother ? " he asked. 

" She's gone away for two hours, and we're to be good until 
she gets back," said Amy, who was rocking her doll to sleep 
on the doorstep. " What do you want ? " 

" Jack's awful sick," wailed Ned. " I'm afraid he's going to 
die. Do come quick." 

They found Jack under the apple tree, too sick to speak. 
Amy was so distressed at Jack's forlorn condition that she 
forgot to feel glad that his first cigarette had made him ill. 




BRAIN AND NERVES 



239 




She and Ned helped him into the house and on the big 
conch. " Now I'll be the nurse and take care of yon/' she 
said, and when Mrs. 
Hunter came home, a 
little later, she found 
a cool wet cloth on 
poor Jack's aching 
head, and Amy bend- 
ing anxiously over him. 

When Jack was bet- 
ter he told his mother 
the whole story, and 
she explained why the 
cigarette made him 
sick. 

There is a poison called nicotine in cigarettes, and all other 
kinds of tobacco, which always hurts those who use it and some- 
times makes them very sick. 

This poison makes people nervous and cross. It so deadens 
the nerves that they cannot tell the brain quickly what to do. 

It hurts the nerves of sight. 

It keeps those who use it from being quick and bright at 
their lessons or on the playground. 

It makes those who use it like it so well that it is very hard 
for them to give it up even when they know it hurts them. 

" Do you think now there is fun enough in smoking to pay 
for all the harm it does ? " asked Mrs. Hunter. 

"There isn't any fun in it at all," said Jack, "and I'm never 
going to smoke again." 

"Neither am I," chimed in Ned, who always agreed with 
Jack. 

Amy clapped her hands. " Then you'll be just as good as 
girls," she said. 



240 



THIRD YEAR 



LESSON 17. — KINDNESS AND MERCY 

Teacher : " We have learned that because we have nerves 
and brains, we feel pain if we are hurt. Any child who has a 
dog may raise his hand. When you whistle to your dog or 
call him by name does he hear and come to you ? 

"How can the dog hear and do what you tell him? The 
plant could not." 

The dog hears because he has ears and nerves and a brain. 

Teacher: "If the dog has nerves and a brain he can feel 
pain. Then how should we treat him ? " 







mm : :Mmm. 



&Hf\ 



"~\" ' j /" L *~\ We must be good to 
°' : ::1| the clog, and not hurt 
- * him or give him pain. 
Bring out the fact that animals, as well as children and peo- 
ple, can feel pain because they too have brains and nerves. 
Bring out also the cruelty and great wrong of not being kind 
to all living things, to their own playmates and younger 
children, and especially to the lame, the sick, the poor and 
the neglected. 

Forming Habits 

Teacher: "Tell me again the name of that part of us with 
which we think and decide what we will do or not do. 



BRAIN AND NERVES 



241 



" Every time we decide to do a thing, and do it, the easier it 
will be for us to do it the next time. If we have decided a 
great many times to do the same thing, we do it almost without 
thinking. When we do a thing in that way we call it a habit. 
I will tell you a story about this." 

The Cousins 

Harry was a bright boy, but it was easy for him to get angry 
and strike if he did not like anything. His mother was a wise 
woman, and she knew that this hasty temper might make her 
little son a great deal of trouble ; and every time he raised his 
hand to strike because he was angry, it would make it easier 
for him to do it again, until he would have the habit and 
would strike without thinking. She talked 
very earnestly and lovingly with him about 
it, and taught him, when he began to feel 
angry, to clasp both hands together and 
hold them so, and to shut his mouth tight 
and keep it shut until he was not angry any 
more. The little fellow had a hard time 
doing it at first, but his mother watched 
and helped him to remember by saying, 
" Quick ! clasped hands and shut mouth ! " 
when Harry was getting angry. Finally 
it became as much a habit to do this as 
it was once a habit to strike. His mother 
was greatly delighted, and used to call 
him, " Harry the Conqueror." 

A conqueror makes some one do what he wants. Harry had 
conquered himself. 

Harry's cousin Sam came to visit him. For a while they 

played together with Harry's playthings very pleasantly. Sam 

liked playing horse best if he could ride all the time in the cart, 

with Harry harnessed as the horse to draw him. In this way 

or. less, m hy. — 16 




242 THIRD YEAK 

they went round and round the garden walks, Sam shouting, 
" Get up ! go on ! " and snapping the whip as he had seen men 
do who were driving real horses, while Harry cantered and 
pranced, making believe horse. 

But the day was warm, and Harry, after a time, was tired 
of drawing his cousin; he wanted Sam to be horse. Sam 
would not, but went off and sat down on the grass, pouting 
and looking very cross. Harry's mamma came out and told 
them that if one boy wanted to have all the pleasure and to 
let the other boy do all the work, he was selfish ; that a selfish 
child or person always wants the best of everything himself. 
She told them how bad and unlovely selfishness is. The boys 
were interested, and Sam did not look cross now, for his aunt, 
Harry's mamma, talked so lovingly to them, and told them 
stories of boys who were not selfish but generous, and wanted 
others to share in the best, that Sam began to be ashamed of 
wanting always to ride. His aunt told him that every time 
he acted in a selfish way it would be easier to be selfish the 
next time, until it would become a habit always to be selfish; 
and that if, every time when he wanted the best of anything 
himself, he would divide with some one else, it would be easier 
to do it the next time, until he would get in the habit of being 
generous, because his brain would get more used to thinking 
generous thoughts than selfish ones. 

"Then he would be Sam the Conqueror, wouldn't he, 
mamma ? " asked Harry. 

Sam wanted to know what that meant, and Harry told him 
how he got the name of " Harry the Conqueror." Sam said, 
" That is a good story ; now let's play again and I'll be the 
horse." 

Teacher : " Why had Sam begun to be a conqueror ? " 

We are learning how important it is for us to decide, up 
in our brains, to do right every time, and thus form good 
habits; but if we have a bad habit, as Harry had of strik- 



BRAIN AND NERVES 243 

ing, and as Sam had of selfishness, what must we do about 
it? 

Explain that we must begin at once to overcome the bad 
and thus become conquerors. Strive to have each child think 
of what he or she needs to conquer, rather than of the faults 
of others. 

The most valuable lesson you can teach your pupils is that 
of self-control. A very wise mother of a large family of chil- 
dren of various dispositions named each one after the special 
grace of character which that child most lacked. The hot- 
headed little fellow, who was the fighter of the family, she 
called the peacemaker, and met his most irascible outbreaks 
with the reminder that he was Tom the Peacemaker, and 
must keep the peace for the family. 

The most irritable child of the whole flock was called " Susie 
the Sunbeam ; " and the little fellow whose vivid imagination 
led him to embellish everything he told was called " Jack the 
Truthful," and so on. This led each child to feel that he or 
she must sustain the character ascribed to him. This is hold- 
ing up the ideal, and will be as effective in school as in the 
home. 

MEMORY POINTS 

We think and decide ivhat ice will do, icith the brain. 

TJie brain is soft and delicate, and is shut up in a bony box 
called the skull to protect it from harm. 

The nerves are tiny white cords that carry messages to the brain 
from all parts of the body, and also from the brain to every part. 

We see, hear, feel, smell, and taste because the nerves carry 
messages from these senses to the brain. 

There are no nerves in the hair and the outside of the teeth and 
skin. 

Our nerves tell us what is going on in the world. 



244 THIRD YEAR 

Through them we know when we are warm or cold; what we 
see, hear, smell, and taste; and what things are pleasant or 
harmful. 

We could not move any part of our bodies if we had no nerves. 

To have strong, healthy nerves we must eat good food, live much 
in the fresh air and sunshine, and take plenty of sleep. 

Alcoholic drinks put the nerves to sleep and dull the brain. 

They have the power to make us think bad thoughts and do 
wrong things. 

The nicotine in tobacco often makes people cross and nervous. 

It deadens the nerves and keeps them from carrying right 
messages. 

It puts a boy behind in his classes and keeps him from getting 
on in the world. 

Animals have nerves and brains, and feel happy or suffer pain 
just as tee do. 

We must form right habits when we are young. 

We must be kind to every living thing. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

The Power of Habit 

There is no more miserable being than one in whom nothing 
is habitual but indecision. Could the young but realize how 
soon they will become mere walking bundles of habits, they 
would give more heed to their conduct while in the plastic 
state. Every smallest stroke of virtue or of vice leaves its 
never so little scar. — William James, in Principles of Psy- 
chology. 

Alcohol injures the Entire Nervous System 

The nervous system cannot escape injury from the use of 
alcoholic drinks. It fails to receive correct impressions; it 
fails to send out correct orders ; it fails to receive proper rest. 
— George H. McMichael, M.D. 



THE BONES 245 

Alcohol impairs Nerve Force 

Alcohol diminishes nerve force in direct proportion to the 
quantity present in the system. — 1ST. S. Davis, M.D., LL.D. 

Alcohol blunts Perception 

Alcohol blunts the power of enjoying all other things — 
paralyzes it. — August Fokel, M.D., University of Zurich. 

Alcohol paralyzes the bodies of men and destroys their will 
power. — Adolf Baer, M.D., Royal Sanitary Comm., Berlin. 

Nicotine paralyzes Nerve Activity 

Nicotine paralyzes the activity of the nervous tissues. — 
Michael Foster, M.D., F.K.S. 



THE BONES 
LESSON 18.— USE OF THE SKELETON 

Have ready as large a picture of the skeleton as possible, 
several small bones from the market washed perfectly clean, 
the backbone of a fish, and an oyster with its shell. 

Teacher: "How many in the room have seen a tiny baby? 
Could it sit or stand or walk ? Why not ? It is alive, and has 
legs and feet just as we have. What is it that holds our bodies 
upright when we sit or move about ? w 

Describe a bone. Tell how it looks ; how it feels. Suggest 
that each feel the bones in his own arm, in his wrist, hand, 
fingers, or head, and then try to draw one or more of these 
bones. Show the chart of the skeleton, and let each find for 
himself how nearly correct he has made his drawing. 

Teacher: "All our bones taken together make up the skele- 
ton. Our skeletons are inside our bodies, and so they are in 
cats, and horses, and dogs, and most other animals, but not in 




The Skeleton. 



246 



THE BOXES 247 

every living thing. Who can think of something alive which 
has its skeleton on the outside ? " 

Give the class time enough to think out answers for them- 
selves ; then show them a snail, mud turtle, oyster, or clam. 

Why is it better to have one's skeleton on the inside of the 
body rather than on the outside ? 

Teacher: "Look at this picture of the skeleton and think 
what our bodies would be like if we had no bones at all." 

Ralph: "We couldn't stand up anymore than a jellyfish. 
I saw one at the seashore last summer, and it was all soft and 
squashy when I touched it. I'm glad I have some bones." 

Teacher: "You have seen a new house going up; w r hat do 
the carpenters erect first on the foundation ? " 

Tom: "They put up the frame first to fasten the rest of the 
house to. Is that what our bones are for ? " 

Teacher: "Yes; bones are the framework of our bodies. 
Many of our muscles are fastened to them, and these move the 
different parts. 

" Look at the oyster I have here, and think of the jellyfish 
Ralph saw last summer; then tell me another use for our 
bones." 

Sarah: " They help to keep the shape of the body." 

Teacher: "What does a snail do when you pick it up? 
What would become of the snail and the oyster if they had 
^no shells to protect themselves ? " 

Clara : " They would get hurt. Some large creature would 
eat them up." 

Teacher: "That is another reason why snails and clams and 
oysters have shells, and why we have bones. It is because 
these protect the soft parts and keep them from harm. 

"Place your hands on your sides and feel the bones there. 
What do we call them? What do they protect? What is the 
use of the bones in the head ? 

" Look at the bones below the knee on this chart, and 



248 THIRD YEAR 

compare them with those above the knee. What are the 
differences ? " 

There is only one bone above the knee, and there are two 
below. 

The bone above the knee is longer and larger than those below. 

Teacher : " Do you see the same thing anywhere else ? " 

Marion: " It's just the same in the arms." 

Bring out the reasons for these differences by asking which 
part of the leg is moved more frequently, that above the knee 
or below. Which part of the arm is more in use, the upper 
part or the lower ? AVhen we want strength merely, as in the 
upper parts of the leg and arm, do we find large or small bones ? 
When skill and great variety of motion are needed, as in the 
lower arm and leg, and still more in the foot and hand, what 
kind of bones is to be fonnd ? 

A lesson on the manifold uses of the hand and the marvel- 
ous skill of which it is capable may be introduced at this 
point, and the thought suggested that the training of the hand 
and brain must always go together. 

Ask each child to name an animal that can run very fast, or 
is especially quick in its movements ; then one that is strong 
and powerful. Ask them to tell what they can about the dif- 
ferences between the bones of these animals. Which have 
long slender bones ? Which have bones that are thick and 
stout ? 

Send one after another to the chart to point out as many 
bones of different shapes as they can find. Explain the rea- 
sons for the different shapes and sizes. 

Have the class notice the human spine as shown on the 
chart. Then show the backbone of a small fish and let them 
examine this closely. When they notice that it is composed 
of a number of small bones strung on an elastic cord, get their 
opinions as to the reason for this. 



THE BOXES 249 

Bring into class a small stick about the same length and size 
as the backbone and ask some boy or girl to try to bend it. 
Then have all rise and bend their bodies forward and back- 
ward, and notice the greater ease with which the spine can be 
moved because it is not made in one straight stiff piece. 



LESSON 19. —PROPER CARE OF THE BONES 

Review all points about position learned previously. 

Why does not a baby walk at once ? What will make his 
bones strong enough to support his body ? Show one differ- 
ence between the bones of a child and those of an old person, 
by bringing into class a bone which has lain in acid until it is 
soft enough to bend easily, and another which has been in a 
clear fire until all the soft parts have been burned away. 

Let the children find by handling both, that the soft bone 
will take any position, while the other, instead of bending, 
is brittle and easily crumbled or snapped in pieces. 

Why is it worse for a child to stand or sit badly than for an 
older person ? Why will one shoulder grow higher than the 
other if a child always carries everything in the same hand ? 
Why will sitting bent over at study cause rounded shoul- 
ders ? Why will standing crookedly by and by twist the 
spine ? Why should not children do the same thing long at a 
time ? Why is it easy for a child to correct these faults and 
almost impossible for an old person to do so ? 

Write on the board the question : — 

What will help a child grow and give him a tall, straight 
body? 

Frequent change in position and plenty of exercise aid 
growth. 

Sunshine and fresh air make rosy cheeks and strong 
bodies. 



250 



THIRD YEAR 



Standing and sitting erect will help to give one a graceful 
figure. 

The growing child needs plenty of good simple food. 



Two Things which stunt Growth 

Teacher : " You remember the strange things that befell 
Alice in Wonderland. What happened to her after she had 
taken a drink from the little bottle on the table ? w 

Esther: " She shut all 
up like a telescope, and 
kept growing smaller 
and smaller until she 
was only about ten 
inches high." 

Teacher: "You 
thought that was very 
wonderful until you 
found it was only a 
fairy story. But some- 
thing quite as bad as 
that really happens to 
people, now and then, 
Fm sorry to say. Let 
me tell you what I mean. 
" A little German boy 
lived near me last win- 
ter. His name was 
Hugo, and we got to be 
great friends. One day 
I asked him how old he 
was, and he told me he 
was nearly fifteen. I 
could hardly believe 




THE BOXES 251 

him, for he was no larger than some of you. Some weeks 
afterward I learned that Hugo drank beer every day, and that 
he had been in the habit of smoking cigarettes ever since he 
was five years old. 

" Then I knew why he was so small and puny. The beer 
and tobacco had poisoned him. We found that growing chil- 
dren need plenty of food every day, and beer and tobacco are 
not foods. Children need to be kept warm and comfortable, 
and the alcohol in beer sends the heat to the surface of the 
body, where the air cools it. They need to get rid of waste 
matter from their lungs and skins and bodies, and these poisons 
prevent this work from being done as it ought. 

" Poor little Hugo was much worse off than Alice in Won- 
derland, because nothing he could eat or drink would make 
him so tall as he ought to have been. He will have to stay 
undersized all his life, because he did not know in time what 
these poisons have the power to do to children. 

" Perhaps some of us would like to be Alice, and grow tall 
or short whenever w r e please ; but is there any one who would 
care to be like Hugo, and always have to stay smaller than 
other people ? What is the best way to prevent such a thing 
happening to us ? " 

MEMORY POINTS 

We need bones to give shape to the body. 

Bones protect the brain and chest and other delicate parts. 

Bones hold our bodies together and help make them strong. 

Without our bones ice could not move about or do what ice wish. 

Large bones are for strength; many small bones icorking 
together are for skill. 

Wlwlesome food and pure water help give strong erect bodies. 

Work and play in the open air and sunshine give us rosy cheeks 
and healthy bodies. 



252 THIRD YEAR 

We must sit and stand erect, if ice want to have graceful figures. 

Children need frequent change in work and play, and plenty of 
time for sleep. 

We must take good care of our bodies. 

We must lei beer and tobacco and all other poisons entirely 
alone. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Alcohol keeps the Body from being Nourished 

The effect of alcohol on the system is to paralyze and im- 
poverish the nutritive system. Conditions of practical starva- 
tion supervene, affecting all growth. Hence degenerate teeth 
and gums are the natural outcome. It is a fact that inebri- 
ates, as a rule, suffer from early disease and death of the teeth. 

— T. D. Crothers, M.D. 

Alcohol poisons the Body- 
Alcohol is a functional tissue poison. — Fraxk Payne, M.D., 
Vice President London Pathological Society. 

Tobacco retards Development 

Tobacco retards both physical and mental development of 
boys and youth. This effect is so fully proved that all intelli- 
gent writers agree in prohibiting the use of this narcotic until 
maturity of growth has been attained. — N. S. Davis, M.D., 
LL.D., F.E.S. 



THE MUSCLES 

LESSON 20. — WHAT MUSCLE DOES 

Have ready on the platform a weight of some kind, about as 
heavy as the average child in the room, and ask some of the 
strongest children to try to lift it. See that no one strains 



THE MUSCLES 253 

himself in the attempt, which should last but a moment ami 
is intended only to show how heavy it is. Tell the class that 
each one of them is really lifting as much every time he runs 
or jumps. 

Teacher: "This morning we are to talk about the parts of 
our bodies which are strong enough to do all this work. You 
may stand while we find what they are. 

"First let us see what moves the arm. Take hold of your 
right arm below the shoulder. Bend the elbow as far as you 
can and tell what you feel." 

This experiment may be repeated several times with the 
class, until all find that however slowly the arm is lifted the 
fleshy part always swells up and then stretches out again as it 
moves back and forth. 

Teacher: "Find the part of you that moves your fingers, 
your toes, the upper leg, the lower. Watch me as I turn my 
head from side to side. Where is the part which does the 
work for me ? " 

The muscles are those parts of the body which help it move. 

Teacher : " We have learned that muscles help to move the 
parts of the body. What different motions can we make ? 
George may come to the platform and move his head in 
as many ways as he can. Do this very slowly while the rest 
notice the motions you make." 

Others may be asked to illustrate the different movements 
of the face, arm, hand, leg, foot, and body, while the class 
either write what they see or describe each motion orally. 

Show that every action has its own set of muscles, and that 
the muscles usually work in pairs, one stretching out while the 
other contracts. 

Teacher : " Here is a picture which shows many of the mus- 
cles. Tell the different shapes you see, and to what each 
muscle is fastened." 




The Muscular System. 



254 



THE MUSCLES 255 

Ask each member of the class to select a muscle from the 
chart, describe its shape, and show its points of attachment. 

What Muscle is 

Teacher: "We know how the outside parts of the body 
look, and what some parts of the inside look like, such as the 
blood and bones. Who has seen a muscle and can tell about 
it?" 

Muscle is lean meat. 

Have ready a piece of boiled corned beef. With a large 
needle separate it into small fibers and pass it about for all 
to examine. If a microscope can be had, let the class look 
through this at a piece of the meat, and describe what they 
see. 

Muscle is made up of many little fibers. 

Each fiber is wrapped up in a thin skin or membrane. 

These fibers are very strong. 

Teacher: " What else do you see in this piece of meat 
besides muscle ? Tell me about some animal which has more 
fat than muscle." 

Bring out some of the differences between swine and dogs. 
Which has more fat ? more muscle ? Which can run faster and 
has more strength and power of endurance ? What muscles are 
very strong in birds ? in the race horse ? why ? 

Show that some fat is necessary to protect the body and keep 
it warm, but that muscle is needed to give strength. 

We need plenty of good hard muscle to make us strong for 
work and play. 

LESSON 21.— WHAT MAKES GOOD MUSCLE? 

Teacher: "How do we get this kind of muscle? A baby's 
arm is weak and has almost none at first. How does he get 



256 



THIRD YEAR 



strength enough as he grows older to row a boat or chop down 
trees ? " 

Show a picture of swallows and ask how the young birds 

learn to fly and what develops 
their muscles. 

Ask each one to name a strong 
bird or animal. What 
^ „. makes it strong ? 

Teacher : " Ralph, is 

the muscle in your right 

arm hard or soft ? Try the 

muscle of every right arm 

in the class. What do 

you find ? " 

Ralph: "Only a 

few of the girls 

have hard 

muscles, but 

most of the 

boys have. Why 

do they?" 

Teacher:" What 

do boys do outside 

of school ? What 

do girls do ? Try 

to answer your own question." 

Ralph : "Boys have more muscle 

than girls because they exercise more. 

Girls sit in the house too much." 

Nelly's Doctors 

"Nelly isn't well enough to be in school," her mother told 
me when I first saw her ; " she does not get up until ten o'clock 
and she has no appetite, 




THE MUSCLES 



257 



" She eats nothing- for breakfast but hot rolls and coffee, and 
she cares little about dinner except dessert.'' 

" What time does she go to bed ? " I asked. 

"Usually between ten and eleven; she can't sleep early in 
the evening.'' 

Just then Xelly came in. She was pale and listless. 

" Let's go skating/'' said her big rosy-cheeked brother. 

" dear, no/' Xelly answered, with a shiver; "it's too cold." 

"Who wants to wipe the dishes for me ?" called mother's 
cheery voice. 

" ]\Iy head aches," whined Nelly. So she spent the after- 
noon on the sofa or in a rocking-chair by the window, reading 
stories and nibbling choc- 
olates, instead of working 
and playing like other 
children. 

It was a long time be- 
fore I saw Xelly again, but 
last summer, when I was 
going through a bit of 
woodland, I heard two or 
three quick barks. Then 
a frisky little dog sprang 
into view, followed by a 
young girl holding a bunch 
of flowers just beyond his 
reach. She was bare- 
headed, and looked the 
picture of health with 
her fresh clear com- 
plexion, and her fluffy yellow hair floating on the wind. 

" Why, it's Xelly," I said, when she came a little nearer. 
" How well you look, my dear. What have you been doing to 
yourself ? " 

OR. LESS. I>- HY. — 17 




258 THIRD YEAR 

She gave a merry little laugh, and said, " Father has been 
trying some new doctors this summer. Shall I tell you who 
they are ? " 

" Please do," I said. So she began : 

"The first one is Doctor Sunshine, and I have him four 
hours a day. Then there is Doctor Fresh Air, who stays 
with me all the time ; Doctor Three Meals, who comes every 
day and brings his pellets with him ; Doctor Housework, who 
helps me do lots of things ; Doctor Exercise, who cures my 
headaches ; and ever so many others who never charge a cent. 
But Doctor Spring is the very best of all. Here, Spring, shake 
hands with Miss Carey." And the dainty brown and white 
dog, who had been dancing all about us, and who wanted to 
speak but couldn't, gravely sat up and put out his paw. 

" But, Nelly, where are all the aches and pains and the pale 
face you used to have ? " 

" Oh, my doctors have cured them. That's what doctors are 
for, isn't it ? " she said, with a roguish little laugh. " Just 
feel my muscle. Hal says it's almost as hard as his," and a 
well-rounded little arm, with more than a suspicion of tan on 
it ; was held out for my inspection. 

"Well, well," I said, " this is truly w r onderful. I shall have 
to tell my boys and girls about your doctors when I go back 
to school. I'm afraid some of them need the same prescrip- 
tions." 

Teacher: "Write the names of Nelly's doctors. What do 
you think each prescribed ? 

" How many other doctors can you think of who cure weak 
muscles ? Each one may find a set of muscles on the chart 
and name a good doctor for them. Write the doctors' names 
on the board. I move that we adopt them all as our family 
physicians. It will not do to take one or two and leave the 
rest out, because they do not like to do each other's work, and 
some of our muscles might not get any care at all." 



THE MUSCLES 259 

What hurts Muscle 

There are two things that hurt our muscles so much that 
even these good doctors cannot always cure them. Do you 
know what they are ? 

Tell the class some of the effects of alcoholic drinks and 
tobacco upon the muscle without giving the names of these 
substances. Write them on the board in this way : — 

makes the muscles weak and flabby. 

changes muscle into fat. 

■ lessens or destroys the power of motion. 

stunts the growth of the muscles. 

makes the muscles unsteady in their movements. 

Ask the class to fill in the blank spaces. 

Why are not men in training for football or other contests 
allowed to drink beer or to smoke ? 

If the muscles of an athlete are injured by the use of beer 
and tobacco, how will these poisons be likely to affect the 
muscles of growing girls and boys? 

MEMORY POINTS 

Muscles are of many different shapes and sizes because each has 
a different work to do. 

The muscles of the arms and legs are long and rather slender, 
those of the back are broad and flat, the muscles of the mouth are 
round. 

Most of the muscles are fastened at the ends to bones. Wlien 
they move they pull the bones toward each other. 

The muscles that move the eyes and those ice use ivhen ice 
ivhistle are not fastened to bones. 

The muscles in the face help us to smile, laugh, icink, frown, 
and to look cross or pleasant. 

No part of the body can move without muscles. 

Muscle is lean meat. 



260 THIRD YEAR 

It is made up of many little fibers, each wrapped in thin 
membrane. 

The body needs firm, hard muscles to do its work. 

The best doctors for iveak muscle are sunshine, fresh air, good 
food, and rest. 

Beer and tobacco weaken the muscles, change them into fat, 
make them unsteady, and hurt their growth. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 
How to strengthen Muscle 

Exercise develops and tones up muscle, thus increasing the 
heart's action. and causing the lungs to expand and send' richer 
food to the brain. Manual labor and exercise should be wisely 
interspersed with study. Physical culture will give our boys 
and girls more grace and finer physiques. Twelve of the dull- 
est boys in a school, after a course of physical training, increased 
their class rank from 41 per cent to 74 per cent. — Charles E. 
Wlnslow, M.D. 

Alcohol changes Muscle to Fat 

The heart and other organs are injured by alcohol. . . . The 
muscular fiber of the heart is replaced by fatty cells. . . . There 
is always danger of the heart failing to do its work, for alcohol 
has made it inefficient. — G. H. McMichael, M.D. 

Alcohol stunts Growth 

No one who is addicted to the chronic use of alcohol pos- 
sesses a healthy body. — H. J. Hall, M.D. 

Alcohol induces Idleness 

Alcohol makes men indolent, indisposed to any exertion. 

— G. Bunge, M,D., .Basel 



BEER 261 

Alcohol relaxes Nerve Control 

Alcohol is a paralyzer of all the vital functions. In the con- 
centration which the strong wines possess it even kills the 
lower forms of life. — J. Gaule, M.D., Zurich. 

Alcohol lowers Working Power 

Alcohol has an injurious effect on an unwearied muscle, and 
manifestly diminishes the quantity of work produced. On the 
other hand the sensation of fatigue is lessened by the use of 
alcohol and work consequently appears easier. — Professor 
E. Destree, M.D., Brussels. 



BEER 
LESSON 22. — THE STORY OF BREAD 

It was time for the physiology lesson, and Miss Laird opened 
the treasure cupboard, as her class called it, out of which 
was sure to come new and fascinating material for each day's 
work. 

Eorty pairs of eyes sparkled in eager anticipation, as she 
laid on her desk a large slice of bread, some wheat stalks, and 
two small boxes, one containing dry starch, and the other grains 
of wheat which had been kept in warm water until they had 
begun to sprout. 

" The first thing we are going to do to-day," said Miss Laird, 
" is to have a tasting class. Who want to be tasters ? " 

Everybody was eager to act in this capacity, so all formed 
in line and marched past their teacher's desk. 

When they were seated again, and each had a bit of bread, 
some starch, a head of wheat, and a few kernels of sprouted 
grain, Miss Laird began : — 



262 



THIRD YEAR 



"Eat your piece of bread first, very slowly, and be ready to 
write a story about it. 

" I'll put on the board the questions I want you to answer 
in your story, and you may draw just as many pictures to go 
with it as you like." 

Here are the questions : — 

What is bread made from ? 
How is wheat made into bread ? 
Why is bread a good food ? 

The children went to work with a will; it was 
great fun to illustrate their own stories. 
Here is one of the stories told : — 

Bread 

Bread is made from wheat. This is the 
way it looks when it is growing : — 

Wheat is run through a mill and ground up 

into flour. This 
is a bag filled 
with the flour : — 

Flour is made 
which is 
good to eat. 
A loaf of 
bread looks 
like this : — 

Good bread makes boys and 
girls strong and gives them 
lots of muscle. 

This is a boy who thought 
he had more muscle than any 
other boy in school : — 






into bread 




BEER 263 

LESSON 23. — THE STORY OF BEER 

After all the stories had been talked over, Miss Laird 
asked : — 

"How many know how starch tastes ? 

"Taste some of the starch you had given you. 

" Now we are ready to taste our wheat. 

" Suppose we begin with the dry grains. I will cut open 
some of them so that you may see how they look on the 
inside. Chew some of the kernels you have, and tell me if 
they taste at first like the starch." 

There is starch in wheat and other grains. 

" What about the wheat which has begun to sprout ? See 
if it tastes like the other." 

" Mine tastes sweeter than the dry grains did at first," vol- 
unteered one of the most observing pupils. 

" So does mine," said another. All were agreed upon this 
point. 

" I shall have to tell you about that," said Miss Laird. 

" The farmers sow wheat in their fields so that there will be 
grain to be made into bread. After the grains of wheat have 
been in the ground a little while they begin to sprout and grow 
just like these sprouted kernels we have here. These sprouts 
just peeping out of the grain are little new wheat plants that 
must have their food made ready for them until they are large 
enough to throw out leaves which can take what the plant 
needs from the air, and roots that will go down and get what 
it wants from the earth. 

" These tiny little plants could not live on starch, but they 
can live on sugar, so when they begin to grow some of the 
starch you see here in the dry grains turns to sugar. 

"Who knows now why the sprouted grains taste sweeter 
than those which are dry ? " 



264 THIRD YEAR 

When grain sprouts its starch changes to sugar. 

Miss Laird: "We have found two ways in which grain may 
be used." 

Wheat can be ground into flour to make bread. 
It can be sown in the ground to make new plants that will 
produce more grain. 

These are both right uses, but sometimes people spoil good 
grain by making it into a drink which is called beer. Let us 
find out if this is a wise use to make of it. 

First, large quantities of grain, usually barley are kept in 
a warm moist place until it begins to sprout. What change 
will that make in the grain ? 

The starch will change into sugar. 

Next, this sprouted grain is crushed and put into a huge 
tank of water where the sugar soaks out, and then yeast, which 
is a kind of ferment, is added. 

What did we find out about ferments when we had a lesson 
on the grape ? w 

Ferments are tiny plants which can change the sugar 
in pressed-out grape juice and other sweet fruit juices to 
alcohol. 

The yeast ferments do just the same kind of work when 
they are put into this liquid made sweet because it has soaked 
the sugar out of the sprouted grain. 

The ferments go right to work to take the sugar to pieces, 
and alcohol is left in its place. 

What is yeast and what can it do ? 

Yeast is a ferment that can so change the sugar in a sweet 
liquid that alcohol will be formed. 

When alcohol is formed in a sweet liquid made by soaking 
sprouted barley in water, such a liquid is called beer. 



BEEB 265 

Alcohol is a poison which is always dangerous to take 
because a little may make one want enough to ruin him. 

" If alcohol is a poison, and there is alcohol in beer, can peo- 
ple drink it without hurting themselves ? n was Miss Laird's 
next question. 

Beer always hurts those who drink it, even if they feel all 
right for a time. 

MEMORY POINTS 

TJiere is starch in wheat and other grains. 

This starch changes to sugar when the grain sprouts. 

When yeast is added to water in which sprouted grain has 
been soaked, part of this sugar is changed to alcohol. 

Yeast is a hind of ferment. 

Beer is made by adding yeast to the water in which sprouted 
barley has been soaked. 

There is alcohol in beer. 

Beer makes people weak. 

Beer takes away one's appetite for good food. 

Beer makes people cross and disagreeable. 

Beer makes people fat instead of strong. 

Beer makes those who drink it want more and more. 

Beer has led many people to commit crime. 



EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

One can accustom himself more readily to the drinking of 
beer than of any other intoxicant, and no other so rapidly 
destroys the appetite for normal food and nourishment. — 
Gustav Buxge, M.D., Professor of Physiological Chemistry at 

University of Basel, Switzerland. 
Beer is not so intoxicating, but it is demoralizing. Our beer 



266 THIRD YEAR 

drinkers become besotted. Beer makes them cross. It makes 
their homes unpleasant. It prevents them from rising in civ- 
ilization. — Journal of Hygiene. 



CIGARETTES 
LESSON 24. — THE DANGER IN CIGARETTES 

Review the story of tobacco, its cultivation by the Indians, 
and its introduction into England by those who came over here 
to colonize Virginia. 

Tell the story of Sir Walter Raleigh and his servant, then 
write on the board the question : — 

Is tobacco good for food ? 

Some boy, whose father chews tobacco, will be ready to say 
that people never eat it, that chewers are very careful not to 
swallow even the juice, and that is one of the reasons why they 
spit so frequently. 

Then draw out the fact that tobacco does not make muscle, 
or bone, or blood ; that it does not help a boy grow as milk, 
vegetables, and meat do. It is plain then that : — 

Tobacco is not a food and does not in any way help to make 
us strong. 

Ask what it is in the tobacco that makes its use injurious, 
and in some cases fatal. 

Tobacco contains nicotine which is an active narcotic poison. 

Do not give the pupils an exaggerated idea. The truth is 
sufficiently strong. Tell them that, like many other poisons, 
nicotine, taken in very small quantities, as for instance in 
smoking one cigar or cigarette, does not often kill a person 
outright, but may be injurious. 



CIGARETTES 267 

The following outline may be used in taking up this topic : — 

Materials of which cigarettes are made. 
Natural appetite and tobacco appetite. 
Smoking may lead to drinking. 
Effects on a boy's health. 

Effect on growth. 
Cigarettes { Effect on brain. 

Effect on the heart. 

Effect on the nervous system. 
Selfishness of the habit. 
Effect on business prospects. 
Cost of the tobacco habit. 

The class should be told of what cigarettes are made, for 
nicotine is not the only poison which lurks in these tiny rolls. 
Some cigarettes are said to contain opium or other narcotic 
drugs. 

What is the effect when one first smokes ? Does the natural 
appetite crave tobacco ? Assure the class that the only true 
test of the natural appetite is that of one who has never been 
accustomed to the smell of tobacco, or whose parents have 
not used it. Such an one usually dislikes the smell of the 
smoke from cigar or pipe, and is made very sick by his first 
attempt to learn to smoke. After a time the system becomes 
accustomed to the nicotine, and the person does not feel so sick 
when smoking, but the health may be injured by the tobacco 
whether the smoker is conscious of it or not. 

What could one eat, if milk or eggs should disagree with 
him ? Do people ordinarily so crave any one article of food that 
they are wretched and unable to work if they are denied it ? 

Bring out plainly the distinction between the natural appe- 
tite for food, which may be satisfied with any wholesome, pala- 
table article of diet, and the unnatural appetite for tobacco, 
which so enslaves a man that nothing else will satisfy him. 



268 THIRD YEAR 

The use of tobacco may create an appetite for itself which, 
no food will satisfy and which may enslave the user. 

In connection with the last topic, bring out the fact that the 
use of tobacco may lead to the drinking of alcoholic liquors. 

Horace Greeley said, " Show me a drunkard that doesn't use 
tobacco, and I will show you a white blackbird." 

Do not give the class the idea that all smokers drink, but 
the fact that so large a proportion of the drinkers smoke, and 
that, in so many instances, the tobacco habit has led to the 
drink habit is one good reason for shunning cigarettes. 

Cigarette smoking dries the membranes of the mouth and 
throat, and tends to create a thirst which may lead to the use 
of alcoholic drinks. 

Teacher : " Suppose that one of the boys in this class owns 
a colt. He wants some day to have a large strong horse to 
draw heavy loads and help him with his w r ork. He knows 
that if he gives the colt good food and lets it exercise in the 
pasture and takes good care of it, it will grow to be just the 
kind of a horse he wants ; but, instead of doing this, he feeds 
it something which hinders its growth and makes it nervous 
and unmanageable. What would you think of such a boy ? 
Would he be showing good sense to treat the colt in such a 
way ? " 

Is a boy sensible or wise who begins the use of something 
which doctors and learned men know will hurt his growth, dull 
his brain, and injure his heart and nerves ? 

Some boys think that tobacco does not hurt them, because 
they cannot see the daily injury to growth and health. It 
would be as reasonable to say they did not grow, because they 
could not see one day that they were larger, than they were the 
day before. 

Cigarette smoking will hinder a child's growth, dull his 
brain, and injure his health. 



CIGARETTES 269 

Ask the class if it is right or fair that people who dislike 
the smell of tobacco or who are made sick by it, as many are, 
should be compelled to inhale the smoke of cigarette, cigar, or 
pipe used by others. Lead the pupils to see the selfishness of 
a habit which inconveniences and annoys hundreds of people 
every day, on the street, in cars, in public parks where many 
people resort hoping to get fresh air, on steamer decks and 
other public conveyances, and in other places. 

The fact that sometimes the home is made unpleasant and 
unhealthful through the agency of tobacco should also be 
brought out. Young children and babies are sometimes made 
ill by being obliged to breathe the air of rooms filled with 
tobacco smoke. 

It is neither fair nor right to smoke tobacco where those 
who do not use it are obliged to breathe the smoke, 

Most boys have some ambition or dream of the future. 
They hope and intend to succeed in life when they become 
men. Such boys will find, when they enter the business world, 
that the cigarette habit will be of no help to them. Many 
business men will not employ boys who smoke. Many cor- 
porations do not allow their employees to smoke while on duty ; 
others do not want their men to smoke at all. The number of 
firms taking this position is yearly increasing. 

Cigarette smoking can be of no advantage to a boy in 
his life work, and may seriously interfere with his business 
chances. 

LESSON 25. — COST OF THE CIGARETTE HABIT 

Although the desire to accumulate great wealth is not the 
noblest aspiration of which the human mind is capable, it is 
right that all should plan to acquire a competence and to pro- 
vide themselves and those who may be dependent upon them 
with the comforts of. life. Children should be inspired with 



270 THIRD YEAR 

the idea that no matter how much or how little wealth their 
parents may have, they should prepare themselves to make 
the world better by doing useful work of some kind, that 
wastefulness is wrong, and that those who have their own 
way to win and their own fortune to earn should carefully 
guard against useless and unnecessary expenditures. Ask the 
pupils to name some of the unnecessary expenditures which 
may be done away with. 

Cigarettes will doubtless be named among other things. 
Then write upon the board the following problem for the 
class to solve : — 

A boy begins at the age of ten to spend five cents a day for 
cigarettes, and continues to do so until he is twenty-one. Had 
he put the same sum in the savings bank each day, how much 
money, without interest, would he have saved when he reached 
his twenty-first birthday ? 

Which is the more sensible and profitable way of using the 
money, to burn it up in cigarettes, or to place it at interest in 
the savings bank ? 

Cigarette smoking is an expensive habit which no boy or 
young man should afford. 

The Twins' Lost Trip 

Leslie had a twin sister, Alice. He was very fond of her. 
Every day they went to school together, and they were in the 
same class. 

They had many nice books to read at home; some of them 
were full of stories about other countries, England, France, 
Switzerland, and Germany. Leslie thought he should be the 
happiest boy in the world if be could only visit those countries 
and see the wonderful sights that were pictured in his books. 

Papa told the children that if they tried to do well at school, 
and nothing prevented, he would take them with their mamma 
on a delightful trip to see these very countries that had inter- 



CIGARETTES 



271 



. 



ested them. He said they would take the trip during their 
summer vacation, when they were twelve years old. 

"Of course we shall do well at school, and nothing will 
keep us at home/' said Leslie. But something did happen. 

A few months after Leslie and Alice had had their eleventh 
birthday, mamma asked them to count the pennies they had 
saved in their banks. She said that each of them might 
send one half of the money 
to the charity box at the .' 

church, to help buy cloth- 
ing for poor children. It 
seemed very strange to 
mamma that Alice should 
happen to have at least a 
dollar more than her 
brother. They had had 
the same amount only two 
weeks before, when it was 
counted. Leslie said he 
didn't know anything about 
it — nobody did. Mamma 
was unhappy. 

The next week nearly 
every night Leslie was 
awakened by dreadful 
dreams. He became so 

nervous that he did not like to go to bed at all. He cared 
nothing for his nice breakfast in the morning, and left it un- 
tasted upon his plate. Papa got a big bottle of medicine from 
the doctor, and Leslie had to take it three times a day. He 
did not like it a bit, and it did not seem to help his appetite. 

Every morning Leslie had a bad headache. He felt sleepy, 
and could not put his mind upon his lessons. He made his 
sister promise not to tell their mamma about the lessons he 





272 THIRD YEAR 

failed in. He told her he would make her sorry for it if she 
did. This frightened Alice, for Leslie had never been cross to 
her before. Kow he seemed cross all the time. Alice no 
longer cared to study with him, or to share with him her 
pleasures. 

One morning papa said: "My boy, have you been using your 
toothbrush lately ? Your teeth are beginning to look dark." 
Leslie declared that he had forgotten to use his toothbrush, 
but would be more careful hereafter. 

As time went on matters grew worse. Leslie felt sick and 
ill-tempered most of the time ; what seemed worst of all, at 
the end of his school term his teacher sent word that Alice 
had been promoted, but that her brother had fallen far below 
his class. Papa felt very badly about it, but told mamma that 
he thought it wise to take Leslie out of school, for he knew 
the boy had been really ill for some time. 

He was put to bed and the doctor sent for. The doctor 
very quickly discovered the cause of all the trouble. What do 
you suppose it was ? Cigarettes ! For some time Leslie had 
been spending many hours playing with older boys of bad 
character who had influenced him to smoke, until the habit 
was firmly fixed. Where do you suppose he got the money to 
buy the cigarettes ? I see you know ; from his bank. What 
do you suppose was the real cause of Leslie's deceiving his 
mother ? 

What had caused his bad dreams ? his headaches ? What 
had taken away his appetite ? Why was he so unkind to his 
sister ? Why was he sleepy in school and unable to think 
about his lessons ? What had made his teeth discolored ? 

Did Leslie go to Europe that summer ? No ; how could he ? 
He had grown very weak and thin and had to lie clown much 
of the time. The doctor said it might be a year before he was 
quite himself again. Poor Alice was heartbroken over her 
brother's behavior, but she was a forgiving sister, and never 



Cigarettes 273 

reproached him for being unkind to her, and for depriving her 
of that much longed-for trip. 

Leslie was a long time getting well ; and he found it very 
hard to give up the cigarettes. But he did at last. He is a 
man now, and he tells his mother that he hates the very sight 
and smell of a cigarette. He declares that he will do all he 
can to keep boys from smoking them. 

MEMORY POINTS 

Cigarettes hinder the growth and hurt the nerves and health. 

Cigarettes may make one a slave to the tobacco habit. 

Smoking may lead to drinking. 

TJie cigarette habit does not help a boy in his icork, and may 
prevent his obtaining a desirable position in business. 

It is a selfish habit which may injure others besides the smoker. 

It costs more than boys can afford to pay to have their health 
and nerves ruined. 

It tends to make one lie and deceive. 

It dulls the mind and conscience. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Tobacco is a powerful poison. — Medical Record. 

The smoker cannot escape the poison of tobacco. — Mar- 
shall Hall, M.D. 

Xo smoker can be a well man. — London Lancet. 

Youths who before the habit of smoking was contracted 
were resolute, manly, and vigorous in mental fiber, become, 
after indulgence in tobacco, timid, fearful, hesitating, and 
irresolute. — Journal of Hygiene. 

Tobacco is one of the slowest and one of the surest poisons 
to the human race. Some of its effects are great weakness 
of the heart's action, lessened respiration, and impaired intel- 
lect. — C. H. Powell, M.D. 

OR. LESS. IN HY. 18 



274 THIRD YEAR 

Stunted growth, impaired digestion, palpitation, and other 
evidences of nerve exhaustion and irritability have again and 
again impressed a lesson of abstinence from tobacco which has 
hitherto been far too little regarded. — London Lancet. 



THE SKIN AND CLEANLINESS 
LESSON 26. — THE BODY COVERING 

Tell your pupils you will let them find out for themselves 
the subject of their next physiology lesson. Then step to the 
board and write this question : — 

What garment have we which always fits us and which 
lasts as long as we live ? 

Some boy or girl will doubtless guess the answer at once. 
If not, place these questions on the board also, and let all think 
about them until the next day : — 

Why does not this garment wear out like others ? 
What different styles of such garments have you seen? 
Describe one kind. 

What are the uses of this garment ? 

How should it be taken care of to keep it in good repair ? 

What will injure it and make it of less service to us ? 

The Skin repairs Itself 

Hold up a pair of gloves and let the class decide how long 
these would last if you were to put them on and wear them all 
the time in doing every sort of work. Pass them about for 
examination. What are they made of? How long would 
they probably have remained in good condition upon the ani- 
mal which first wore them ? 

Why do we not wear holes in our fingers or our toes when 
we use them almost constantly ? 



THE SKIN AND CLEANLINESS 275 

In addition to the probable answer — that a person's hand or 
foot is alive, and thus does not easily wear out — call for rea- 
sons why we are alive and what keeps us so. 

Some will remember that the food we eat is one thing neces- 
sary to keep us alive and to prevent any part of our bodies 
from wearing out. 

Pat drawings upon the board in colored chalk to represent 
the circulatory and digestive systems. 

Tell the story of the cars loaded with food which our 
Western states sent to the starving people in India, and ask 
the children to imagine that something of the same kind is 
taking place when the food we eat starts on its journey through 
the body. They may think of the mouth, throat, and stomach 
as different stations through which this food must pass before 
it is ready for its ride with the blood to every part of the 
body which needs it. They should be able also to name these 
stations in their proper order. 

The skin does not wear out because the blood is all the time 
bringing it just the food it needs to keep it in good repair. 

The Skin of Different Animals 

So far as possible, give each pupil an opportunity to describe 
fully the skin of some animal with which he is very familiar. 
Suggest that the color and texture be spoken of, the general 
appearance of the hair and nails, where these grow, and how 
they are connected with the rest of the skin. Then suggest 
that each one compare, as well as he can, the skin of birds 
with that of animals, reptiles, fishes, and insects. Others may 
listen and be ready to correct false statements or add further 
information. Children can easily be trained to be close ob- 
servers, and very few evident facts should be left for the 
teacher to bring out. 



276 THIRD YEAR 

The Appearance of the Skin 

In most schools a fairly good microscope will be available. 
If possible, secure one and permit the class to look through it 
at the skin on the hand or arm, and notice what can be seen in 
this way. After such an observation exercise tell them about 
the sweat glands and oil glands, and how each is useful and 
necessary to the skin. 

Let them look also at a hair and a finger nail under the micro- 
scope. Put on the board a drawing of the former, showing 
the oil glands beneath the skin, which keep it soft and smooth, 
and ask how the hair must be taken care of in order to keep^ it 
in good condition. 

Show from some physiology or a large chart the position of 
the nerves of the skin ; then ask why a slight blow or scratch 
on the surface of the body does not hurt one, and explain that 
the skin is made up of two distinct layers. 

Bring out the relation between a clear fresh skin and per- 
sonal beauty, and the duty as well as the privilege of every 
one to take such care of this part of the body as shall render 
him attractive to others. 



LESSON 27. — CLEANLINESS HELPS MAKE US BEAUTIFUL 

One of the first requisites to a beautiful skin is cleanliness. 
Ask the class to describe the drainage pipes in a house, and 
explain what happens when these become filled with refuse ; 
then ask if the microscope showed them anything in the skin 
which corresponds to such pipes, if they can think of any rea- 
son why these tiny tubes need always to be kept open, and 
what would be the best way to do this. 

Your pupils may be inclined to resent as personal any hints 
regarding cleanliness and think that their own skin is kept 
in fairly good condition. If any feeling of this kind shows 



THE SKIN AND CLEAN LI XESS 277 

itself, ask all to try this experiment at night just before 
retiring — to wash their faces and hands in warm water and 
a little soap, and notice how much the water is changed in 
color during the process. It is safe to say that even the most 
skeptical will be convinced that the exposed parts of the skin 
cannot be kept clean without frequent bathing. 

The next time the sun shines brightly into the room, call 
attention to the dust which it reveals and which is always 
present, as one reason why people need to bathe often. Ask 
if a desk or chair needs washing every day and why people's 
hands and faces get soiled more easily than furniture. If no 
one thinks of a reason, show the class once more a picture of 
the oil glands of the skin and call upon some one to describe 
again their use. Ask if the skin would get soiled as quickly 
if it had no such glands, and the reason why. 

Some one may raise the question, Why does the skin need 
oiling ? Ask how many have ever had rough chapped hands 
and faces. Call attention to the fact that such skin heals 
more readily when an oily substance is applied to it. This 
will suggest a use for the oil glands found in the skin. 

Cleanliness helps to keep us Well 

In bringing out another important reason for cleanliness, tell 
the class of the dreadful plagues which swept over Europe 
during the Middle Ages. Then describe briefly how people 
lived in those times, huddled together in poor mean huts 
with little or no ventilation, eating badly cooked food, seldom 
or never taking baths or changing their clothes until obliged 
to do so. Why are people healthier to-day ? How many 
think our different ways of living have anything to do 
with it? 

One of the most dreaded diseases is yellow fever. In 1853 
it killed one out of every ten people in Xew Orleans. Tell 
your pupils how General Butler kept this fever away from 



278 THIRD YEAR 

that city during the Civil War by insisting that all houses as 
well as the people should be kept thoroughly clean, and that 
all decaying animal or vegetable matter should be effectually 
disposed of at once. 

Frequent bathing will help keep the skin in good condition. 

Cleanliness prevents disease. 

Very rich food will hurt the blood and spoil the complexion. 

Tea and coffee often keep people from having a clear beauti- 
ful skin. 

Any drink which has alcohol in it may hurt the skin. 

Cigars and cigarettes clog up the pores of the skin and give 
it a strong, bad odor. 

How Alcohol hurts the Skin 

Call attention to the harm done the skin by such poisons as 
alcohol and tobacco, by asking the question: — 

Why do people who use alcoholic drinks seldom have good 
complexions ? 

Call for volunteers to trace the alcohol in a glass of liquor 
from the mouth to the skin. As the different organs through 
which it passes are named, the class may tell in what ways the 
alcohol injures each and keeps it from doing its work as it 
ought. 

Alcohol deadens the nerves which keep the heart from 
beating too fast. 

Too much blood is thus pumped out of the heart into the 
blood vessels of the skin. 

These tiny blood vessels are stretched too much by this extra 
blood. This makes the skin look red and bloated. 

The alcohol so poisons the blood that it does not bring 
enough good food to the skin nor carry away all the waste 
matter it ought. 

This makes pimples and blotches on the skin and spoils the 
complexion. 



THE SKIN AND CLEANLINESS 279 

Alcohol reduces Bodily Temperature 

It is more than likely that some of the pupils in your room 
have been told that people should drink rum or some other 
alcoholic liquor to keep them warm in winter, or when start- 
ing upon a long cold journey. Every young person should be 
taught that this is a false idea, and that instead of keeping 
people warm alcohol really makes them colder. 

To show how this is true, ask what keeps the body warm. 
If no one suggests the blood as the chief source of warmth, 
bring this to their minds by asking why they feel hot after a 
hard run or frolic. Ask whether the blood will cool off faster 
when it is close to the surface where the air can get at it, or deep 
in the body away from the air. They have just learned that 
alcohol sends the blood in large quantities to the surface of 
the body, and a few moments' thought will show them that 
when this happens it will be cooled much faster than when 
it comes more slowly to the surface. 

When all understand that alcohol really makes people cold, 
ask why it is that those who have taken such liquors think them- 
selves warmer than before. 

People who have taken alcoholic drinks think themselves 
warmer than before because alcohol deadens the nerves of feel- 
ing and keeps them from knowing how cold they really are. 

MEMORY POINTS 

TJie skin covers and protects the body. 

The blood keeps the skin supplied with food, thus repairing it 
as fast as it wears out. 

The oil glands in the skin keep it soft and smooth. 

TJie skin needs frequent bathing to keep it clean and healthy. 

We must eat plain simple food and drink pure water if we 
want clear complexions. 



280 THIRD YEAR 

Tobacco often turns the skin a dirty yellow and gives it a strong 
bad odor. 

Alcohol poisons the blood and keeps it from bringing to the skin 
the food it needs. 

It hinders the work of the blood in carrying away waste matter, 
and thus causes pimples and a bad complexion. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 

Cleanliness prevents Disease 

The essential step in fighting infections diseases, snch as 
yellow fever, plague, typhoid fever, and many others, is the 
enforcement of cleanliness ; cleanliness of person, of house, of 
food and drink, of drainage and sewage disposal, and in 
water supply ; always and everywhere cleanliness. — Dietetic 
and Hygienic Gazette. 

Alcohol clogs the Pores of the Skin 

In cold weather alcohol gives the skin a dull leaden hue. 
In hot weather, when the blood circulates more freely and 
purely, it gives the skin a red hue and often a deep red 
blotch. The scarf skin is imperfectly thrown off and the 
dead debris accumulates. Eruptions often occur upon the 
skin in consequence. — Sir B. W. Richardson, M.D., LL.D., 
F.R.S. 

Alcohol causes Skin Disease 

The skin disease called acne rosacea is common among 
drinkers of middle age. — G. H. McMichael, M.D. 

Alcohol lessens Bodily Heat 

Alcohol warms a man up in cold weather by benumbing the 
sense of temperature, while it really lessens the body heat. — - 
1ST. S. Davis, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S, 



THE SPECIAL SENSES 281 

The Effect of Tobacco 

Tobacco lodges itself in the tissues ; hence tobacco users 
emit a decided tobacco odor from the skin. — J. C. Jackson, 
M.D. 

THE SPECIAL SENSES 
LESSON 28. — TOBACCO INJURES THE SENSE ORGANS 

Before taking up in class the points brought out in this 
lesson, the teacher should review all work on the special 
senses done during the first two school years, making sure 
that her pupils know what these organs are for, something of 
their uses, and of the ways in which each should be taken 
care of to insure the best work. Special training should also 
be given at frequent intervals to quicken each sense and ren- 
der it alive to impressions. The class are now ready to learn 
how the use of tobacco affects the organs of special sense. 

Teacher : " The last time I was on a railway train I got into 
the wrong car. The air was blue with smoke and, although I 
hurried out, my eyes and throat smarted for some time. I 
didn't see any fire. Where do you think the smoke came 
from ? 

" You are right. I had gone into the smoking car, where 
nearly every man had his pipe or cigar or cigarette. Is tobacco 
smoke better for people than other kinds of smoke ? Why 
not ? " 

Review the facts about tobacco learned in their first and 
second years' work until all remember that : — 

Tobacco contains the poison nicotine. 

W T hen tobacco is smoked or chewed some of this poison gets 
into the body and hurts it. 

Teacher: " There are hurtful substances in all kinds of 
smoke which are bad for our eyes and throat, but tobacco 



282 



THIRD YEAR 



smoke is worst of all because it contains these and nicotine 
too ; just as it hurts us more to burn both hands than to burn 
one. 

" This morning we must find out some of the ways in which 
tobacco hurts those parts of our bodies which help us find 
out about things. 

" Who knows the names of these parts ? " 



Eyes that cannot See 




" Bedtime, 
Ethel/' said her 
father. "And it's 
story night, you 
know, so hurry 
up." 

"Just as soon 
as I've said good 
night to Tick- 
tock," answered 
Ethel, flitting 
across the hall 
for a last look at 
the long brass 
pendulum sway- 
ing solemnly back 
and forth at the 
foot of the stairs. 

" Good night, 
old Tick - tock ; 
wake me up in 
the morning." 

"What time is 
it ? " said her fa- 



THE SPECIAL SENSES 283 

ther, when Ethel was cuddled up in his lap for the good- 
night story. " Your eyes are younger than mine and can see 
better." 

" Can't I see the figures on Tick-tock, when I'm as old as 
you ? " asked Ethel, as she told the time. 

" I hope so, my dear, if you are more careful of your eyes 
than I've been. Shall I tell you the reason I can't see any 
better ? " 

" Oh, do," said Ethel. 

So father began : " The doctor says it's because I've smoked 
too many cigars. I'm trying to stop, but it's hard work, and 
I'm afraid it's too late to make my eyesight as good as it was 
once." 

" Is that what makes your eyes red ? " asked Ethel. 

"Yes, dear, I suppose so. You know how very delicate the 
eyes are. We can't touch them without pain, as we can our 
arms or feet. Smoke seems to be particularly bad for them." 

" It makes my eyes ache when you smoke in the house. 
I'm glad you aren't going to any more," said Ethel, with a 
little sigh of relief. 

"The doctor told me several things about tobacco, that I 
didn't know before," her father continued. " He said there 
is a poison in it that often hurts the nose and throat as well as 
the eyes, and makes them raw and sore. Perhaps that is why 
I have had so much trouble with my throat, though I never 
thought of it before. It's been sore a great deal of the time 
lately, and my hearing isn't so good as it used to be either. 

" The doctor tells me that children are learning these things 
in school now. If I'd been taught them when I was a boy, I 
might have saved my eyes, and my other senses would have 
done me more good, too." 

Then it was time for Ethel to go to sleep, so father left her 
in her little white bed, for old Tick-tock to wake up in the 
morning. 



284 THIRD YEAR 

Tobacco makes the eyes red and bloodshot. 
Tobacco irritates the lining of the throat and nose. 
Tobacco often makes the throat sore. 

Tobacco hinders the Work of the Sense Organs 

In showing how the use of tobacco makes the senses dull 
and stupid, begin by reviewing briefly some of the things 
which each sense ought to do for us. 

Let the class go in turn to the window or door, then return 
and name all the objects they have noticed in this one glance. 
Ask each to name some pleasure he enjoys every day because 
he has eyes and can see with them. Continue this exercise 
until many such pleasures have been thought of and given, and 
until every child realizes in some degree how much he owes to 
his eyes, and what care he should take of them that they may 
last as long as he lives. 

How did the use of tobacco affect the eyes of Ethel's father ? 
Has tobacco the power to hurt other people's eyes, in the same 
way ? What gives it this power ? What pleasures would we 
have to do without if we should lose our eyesight ? 

Talk with the class in a similar way about each of the senses, 
helping them to name the pleasures we receive through each 
when it is well trained and able to do its best work. Then let 
the children tell what they would have to get along without if 
they could not hear, or taste, or smell, or feel any object. 

Tobacco hurts the eyesight and may destroy it. 
Tobacco sometimes hurts the hearing. 
Tobacco may injure the senses of taste and smell. 
Tobacco makes all our senses dull and stupid. 

LESSON 29. — GENERAL EFFECT OF TOBACCO 

When your class have a good idea of the way in which tobacco 
dulls the different senses, they need to connect with this the 



THE SPECIAL SENSES 



285 



injury to the person as a whole, and to all his interests, whether 
work or play. 

Uncle Mason's Toad 

Johnnie Eaton was helping the gardener, picking up stones 
and bits of sticks and carrying them off in his little cart, when 




an old toad hopped out of the bushes and sat blinking solemnly 
at him. 

" Hallo, old fellow, where did you come from ? " said John- 
nie, stopping all operations to look at the intruder. 



286 THIRD YEAR 

"Here's a toad, Uncle Mason/' lie called to the gardener. 
" Shall I put him out ? " 

The old man hobbled up. "Xo, no, my boy, let him be. 
He catches bugs and flies, and helps to keep away the insects 
that would spoil our plants. See him run out his tongue and 
snap up that fly ? He never fails to get him, and the first time 
trying, too. Suppose we sit down on this bank awhile and 
watch the little fellow, and I'll tell you how a toad made me 
stop using tobacco." 

" Why, Uncle Mason, how could a toad do that ? " asked 
Johnnie, with wide-open eyes. 

"Well, I'll tell you. I used to smoke and chew, but I've 
stopped for good now, and this is how I came to do it. 

" One day I came across something a great doctor had writ- 
ten, that there was enough nicotine in one cigarette to kill two 
toads. I didn't know what nicotine was, but it set me think- 
ing, and I kept asking 'round until I found out that it was a 
poison that's in all kinds of tobacco. That sounded kind 
o' scary, and I got out my pencil and did a little figuring. A 
good-sized toad weighs about half a pound, and I weigh one 
hundred and sixty pounds. According to weight, it would 
take just one hundred and sixty cigarettes to kill me, to say 
nothing of chewing tobacco, ancf I'd get them smoked up in 
about a week. When I looked at it that way, I said to myself, 
i Mason, it's time to quit; ' and I did quit, then and there, 

"Of course I knew there were men that used tobacco and 
yet lived to be older than I was, and I'd used it a good many 
years myself and hadn't died yet. But then I thought, 
6 Maybe there are toads that it takes more to kill than it does 
others, and anyhow, it isn't safe to take chances with that 
sort, of thing.'. . . - - .... 

" Then I got to wondering whether a toad that was stuffed 
half full of tobacco poison would be much use killing flies, and 
I said: — ... ....... 



THE SPECIAL SENSES 287 

"'Mason, that's just what's been the matter with yon. 
When you went to school, you were always at the foot of your 
class. You weren't quick at seeing things, or hearing wind 
was said, and you didn't seem to be more than half awake any 
of the time. The boys that didn't smoke could run faster and 
play better, and they were always ahead of you.' 

"After I left school, it was just the same. The other boys 
got good places to work, and I didn't get much of anything, 
and when I did, I couldn't keep up with the other men. It 
was tobacco that did it all. Xow I've stopped, I can see better 
and hear better and work better. I've got this good job and 
I'm doing well at it, and it's all on account of a toad, so you 
see I'm fond of the creatures and like to see them around."' 

Uncle Mason hobbled off to work again, and Johnnie went 
too, but he smiled at the toad under the bushes and decided 
he would never begin the use of tobacco. 

Tell the story slowly, then let the children try to give it in 
their own words. As the different ways in which tobacco 
hurts people by dulling their senses and thus hindering their 
chance of success in life are brought out, have these written on 
the board and read aloud by the class. 

MEMORY POINTS 

Tobacco makes the eyes red and bloodshot. 

It hurts the lining of the nose and throat and often makes them 
sore. 

It often dulls the hearing. 

It injures the sense of smell. 

It blunts the sense of taste. 

It iceakens .all the senses and keeps them from doing good 
work. 

It keeps us from learning our lessons quickly. 

It prevents our being quick and active at work or />l<'!/. 



288 THIRD YEAR 

It keeps us from enjoying life as we should. 
It makes us poor workmen. 
It keeps us out of many good positions. 
It is always a hindrance ; never a help. 

EMINENT AUTHORITIES 
Tobacco irritates the Sense Organs 

When tobacco is smoked there are developed certain acrid 
vapors which have an irritant action on the mouth and throat. 
The effects of smoking are in part due to irritant matters in 
the smoke. 

The habitual smoker usually suffers eventually from what 
is known to medical men as smoker's sore throat. The 
inflammation may spread up the Eustachian tubes and im- 
pair the hearing. Cigarettes are especially apt to cause these 
symptoms. — H. Newell Martin, M.D., F.R.S. 

Tobacco impairs the Functions of the Senses 

Tobacco frequently causes disturbances of the special senses. 
Owing to the irritation of the nasal mucous membrane the ol- 
factory sensibility is impaired; and probably owing to the 
irritation and congestion set up in the nose and throat, together 
with central nerve disturbance, the hearing is sometimes low- 
ered. 

But of all the special senses the sight is most seriously 
affected, and tobacco amaurosis or amblyopia is a not infre- 
quent result of the excessive use of the drug. — E. Stuyek, 
M.D., Ph.D. 

Tobacco dulls the Intellect 

The habit of cigarette smoking is increasing, even among 
boys of not six years of age. It prevents development mentally, 
morally, and physically. — C. T. Cranfield, M.D., Ph.D. 



THE SPECIAL SENSES 289 

LESSON 30. — REVIEW QUESTIONS 

Why do we need pure air to breathe? What does it do 
for us ? 

How is the air we breathe out different from what we 
breathe in ? 

Why should we wear loose clothing ? 

How can we enlarge our lungs ? 

How do cigarettes hurt the boy who uses them ? 

Why are all alcoholic drinks dangerous ? 

How may cider hurt those who drink it ? wine ? beer ? 

Why does alcohol form in pressed-out fruit juices ? 

What is food ? What does it do for us ? 

How do we know that alcoholic drinks cannot be used as 
foods ? 

Where is food prepared for use in the body ? 

How does it get to every part ? 

Describe the work of the heart. 

Why clo we need two sets of blood vessels in the body ? 

What is the work of the brain ? of the nerves ? 

Why does it hurt to cut the foot or the hand ? 

Why do we feel no pain when the hair is cut ? 

Why do we need special senses? What work does each do ? 

How does tobacco injure the sense organs ? 

How can we keep our nerves strong and healthy ? 

How do alcoholic drinks hurt the brain and nerves ? 

What is a habit ? How can we form right habits ? 

What are the uses of the bones in our bodies ? 

How should the bones be taken care of ? 

How is the proper growth of the bones sometimes hindered 
or stopped ? 

What will make good muscle ? 

Why do we need muscles ? 

Why do boys usually have stronger muscles than girls ? 

OR. LESS. IN HT. — 19 



290 THIRD YEAR 

Why are boys in training for athletic contests not allowed 
to drink or smoke ? 

How can we train to become strong, well men and women ? 

Why is beer such a dangerous drink ? 

How is beer made ? 

Why do we need a covering of skin on our bodies ? 

How does cleanliness improve our looks ? How does it help 
to keep us well ? 

How is tobacco always a hindrance to a person ? 



INDEX 



Abdomen, 94, 95. 
Alcohol. 
A Poison, 88, 100, 206, 236, 265. 
Effects on 
Blood, 278. 

Body Temperature, 279. 
Growth, 251, 252. 
Nerves, 236, 237, 278. 
Senses, 111-115, 165. 
Skin, 278-280. 
In Beer, 88, 100, 236, 264, 265. 
Cider, 46, 47, 50, 206, 207, 236. 
Rum, 88. 

Whisky, 88, 99, 100. 
Wine, 145, 236. 
Alcoholic Appetite, 46, 47, 100, 144, 

146, 189-191, 207-209, 265. 
Alcoholic Drinks, 99-101, 125, 212-214, 
219, 264, 265. 
Beer and other Drinks made from 
Grains, 85-89, 125, 184, 191, 
192, 261-266. 
Contain a Poison, 188-191, 229, 

230. 
Effects, 85-89, 190-192, 264-266. 
Destroy Appetite for Food, 265. 
Diminish Strength, 191. 
Dull the Mind, 87-89. 
Hinder Growth, 187, 188, 251. 
Hurt the Blood, 229, 230. 
Lower the Temperature, 88, 89, 

188. 
Make Fat, 87-89, 190-192. 
Weaken the Body, 99-101, 190, 
192. 
How made, 186, 187, 264, 265. 
Lead to Stronger Liquors, 192. 
Not a Food, 184-191, 212-214. 



Cider, 45-50, 204-207. 

Effect on Individual, 46-50, 206, 
207. 

How made, 45-50, 205, 206. 

Not a Food, 212-214. 

Why Dangerous, 45-50, 206,207. 
Effects of Alcoholic Drinks on 

Blood, 72, 229, 230. 

Brain and Nerves, 236, 237. 

Breathing, 172. 

Feeling, 111. 

Growth, 250, 251. 

Hearing, 113-115. 

Muscle, 259-261. 

Nerve Control, 80. 

Sight, 115, 157. 

Smelling, 114, 115. 

Stomach, 219, 220. 

Structure, 134. 

Taste, 112-115, 138, 139, 141. 
Wine, 144-146, 207-209. 

Effects on Individual, 144-146, 208, 
209. 

How made, 144-146, 208, 209. 

Not a Food, 212-214. 
Ankle, 98, 101. 
Apple, 43-50, 204, 205. 
A Nature Study, 43-45, 204, 205. 
Color, Growth, Locality, Texture, 

Shape, 43-45, 204, 205. 
Healthfulness, 44, 205. 
Parts, 45. 
Arms, 67-74. 
Care, 70-74. 
Parts, 67-74. 



Back, 90-92. 
Backbone, 90. 



291 



292 



INDEX 



Blood, 218, 220-230, 275. 
Care, 227-230. 
Function, 220-230. 
Blood vessels, 218, 222. 
Body as a Whole, 117-129. 
Care, 118-120. 
Parts, 50-54, 117, 118, 128. 
Arms, 53, 54, 67-72. 
Feet, 52-54, 102-108. 
Hair, 127, 128. 
Hands, 53, 54, 74-80. 
Head, 53-60. 
Legs, 52-54, 96-101. 
Lower Limbs, 52-54. 
Teeth, 125-128. 
Trunk, 50-54, 89-96. 
Upper Limbs, 52-54. 
Bones, 75, 97, 98, 245-252. 
Care, 249-252. 
Function, 75, 245-249. 
Structure, 249. 
Brain, 161-168, 230-245. 
Function, 230, 231. 
How protected, 231. 
Bread, 262. 

Breathing, 16, 169, 170. 
* How to breathe, 16, 169, 170. 
What to breathe, 16. 
Why we breathe, 16. 
Breathing Exercises, 171, 196, 197. 

Calf of the Leg, 97, 101. 
Chest, 13, 16, 90-92, 197-200. 
Cider, 45-50, 204-207. 
Cigarettes, 29-31, 183, 202, 266-274, 
281-288. 
Contain a Poison, 229, 230, 266, 267. 
Cost, 269, 270. 
Effect on 
Growth, 29-31, 36-37, 267-269. 
Health, 29-31, 36, 37, 59-60, 267- 

274. 
Mental Ability, 29-31, 36, 37, 59- 
60, 181, 183, 202, 203, 239, 268, 
269. 
Senses, 110, 155-157, 181, 183, 239, 

281-288. 
Teeth, 126-128, 272. 



Throat, 159. 

Will Power, 30, 31, 181, 183,268, 
269. 
Cleanliness, 122-124, 276-278, 280. 
Clothing, 39-40, 72. 
Kinds, 40. 
Need, 39-40. 
Coffee, 23-24, 74, 214. 
Color, 153. 
Condiments, 138-141. 

Ear, 160-168. 
Earache, 164, 165. 
Ear Wax, 165. 
Eminent Authorities. 
Alcohol. 
A Narcotic, 95. 
A Poison, 50, 89, 146, 209, 214, 230, 

252. 
Effects on 
Blood, 172, 230. 
Bodily Heat, 280. 
Brain, 214. 

Development, 61, 95, 128. 
Digestion, 214, 220. 
Excretion, 172. 
Growth, 61, 95, 128, 134, 252, 

260. 
Health, 74, 108, 129. 
Heart, 230, 260. 
Muscle, 74, 133, 134, 260-261. 
Nervous System, 115, 133, 134, 

244, 245, 261. 
Nutrition, 95, 133, 134, 220, 252. 
Respiratory System, 172, 204. 
Senses, 115, 141, 157, 167, 168, 

178, 245. 
Skin, 280, 281. 
Strength, 43, 74, 80, 101, 108, 

129, 191, 261. 
Structure, 95, 133, 134. 
Teeth, 252. 
Tissue, 252. 
Will Power, 245. 
In Beer, 209. 
In Cider, 49-50. 
In Wine, 146, 261. 
Not a Food, 43, 133, 134, 191, 214. 



INDEX 



293 



Eminent Authorities. 
Alcoholic Appetite, 80, 209. 
Alcoholic Liquors, 61, 89, 146. 
Beer, 89, 191, 192. 
Contains a Poison, 191. 
Destroys Appetite for Food, 265. 
Diminishes Strength, 191. 
Leads to Stronger Liquors, 192. 
Makes Fat, 191, 192. 
Is degrading, 192, 265, 266. 
Breathing, 171, 172. 
Cider, 49, 50, 209. 
Cigarettes, 31, 183. 
Cause Disease, 31. 
Effects on 
Health, 31. 
Heart, 31. 
Morals, 31. 
Nerves, 31. 

Respiratory System, 31. 
Strength, 31. 
Cleanliness, 128, 280. 
Coffee, 74, 214. 
Exercise, 37, 74, 260. 
Face, 67. 

Fermentation, 146. 
Ferments, 49-50. 
Food, 43, 80. 
Good Health, 67, 74. 
Good Temper, 67. 
Growth, 74, 128. 
Habit, Power of, 244. 
Hand, 80. 
Health, 67, 74. 
Nutrition, 74, 80. 
Nicotine, 101,245. 
Pure Air, 37, 43, 80, 204. 
Recess, Value of, 203, 204. 
Rest, 43. 
Sleep, 37. 
Tea, 74, 214. 
Tobacco. 

Contains a Poison, 96, 101, 273. 
Effects on 
Digestion, 274. 
Development, 37, 61, 95, 252, 

288. 
Growth, Height, and Weight, 61, 



74, 95-96, 108, 134, 184, 252, 
273, 288. 
Health, 74, 129, 183, 184, 204, 

273. 
Heart, 184, 273, 274. 
Mental Power, 30-31, 37, 95, 129, 

184, 204, 273, 288. 
Muscular Power, 74, 101, 273. 
Morals, 30, 31, 129, 265, 266, 273, 

288. 
Nerve Tissue, 141, 1$4, 245, 273. 
Nutrition, 37, 61, 95, 134. 
Respiration, 172, 204, 273. 
Senses, 115, 141, 157, 167, 168, 

184, 204, 288. 
Strength, 61, 74, 80, 101, 108, 

183, 184, 204. 
Throat, 168, 172, 288. 
Water, 27. 

Wine, 89, 115, 146, 191, 209, 261. 
Essentials to Child's Comfort, 10, 

11. 
Exercise, 14, 70-74, 94, 95, 99, 101, 120- 

122, 200, 201, 236,249,256. 
Eye, 109-114, 146-157. 
Eyebrows, 65, 67. 
Eyelashes, 65, 67. 
Eyesight, 154-157. 

Face, 61-67. 
Care, 65-67. 
Parts, 62-65. 
Shape, 61-62. 
Uses, 65-67. 
Feeling, Sense of, 110, 111, 114, 115. 
Care, 111, 114. 
Uses, 110, 111, 114. 
Feet, 102-108. 
Care, 103-105, 108. 
Parts, 102, 103, 108. 
Fermentation, 146. 
Ferments, 49, 50, 144-146, 189, 205-209, 

264, 265. 
Food, 34-35, 38-43, 87, 99, 119-121, 
129-134, 136-140, 187, 209-214, 
225, 228, 250, 275. 
Need of, 38-40, 119-120, 136-137, 
209-212. 



294 



IXDEX 



Food. 
Proper Kinds, 34-35, 41-43, 83, 84, 

119, 130-133, 210-212. 
Right Amount, 132, 133, 212. 
Uses, 40-43, 87, 99, 120, 129-130, 187, 

211-212, 275. 
When to eat, 132, 133, 212. 

Gastric Juice, 217. 

Grains, 81-89. 

Kinds used for Food, 81-84. 

Right Uses, 81-84, 88. 

Wrong Uses, 84-89. 
Grapes, 141-146. 

Description, 142. 

Uses, 142-146. 
Growth, Height, and Weight, 10, 29-40, 
98, 99, 101. 

Aids, 23, 34, 35, 91-95, 99, 101. 

Hindrances, 34-37, 91-95, 99-101, 125. 

Result, 32-35. 

Habit, 240-243. 

Hair, 57-58, 122, 127-128, 276. 

Hands, 74-80. 

Care, 77-80. 

Parts, 74-77, 80. 
Head, 53-60. 

Care, 57, 58. 

Parts, 54-56. 
Hearing, 113-115, 160-168, 283-288. 

Care, 162-168, 284-288. 

How we hear, 160-163. 

Training, 162-164. 
Heart, 87, 90-94, 222-230. 
Heel, 102, 108. 

Instep, 102, 103, 108. 
Introduction, 9. 
Iris, 148, 149. 

Joints, 69, 70, 76, 77, 97, 98, 101, 117. 

Kindness and Mercy, 240. 

Legs, 96-101. 

Parts, 96-98, 101. 

Uses, 98-101. 
Lungs, 16, 90, 94, 197-203, 226-227. 



Memory, 30, 60, 167. 

Effects of Alcohol on, 30. 

Effects of Tobacco on, 60. 
Memory Points. 

Apple, 47. 

Arms, 72. 

Beer, 191,265. 

Blood, 229, 230. 

Body as a Whole, 54, 128. 

Bones, 251, 252. 

Brain and Nerves, 243, 244. 

Cider, 47, 208. 

Cigarettes, 30, 273. 

Ears, 167. 

Eyes, 156, 157. 

Face, 67. 

Feet, 108. 

Food, 42, 133, 213, 214. 

Grains, 88. 

Grapes, 145, 146. 

Growth, Height, and Weight, 37. 

Hands, 80. 

Head, 60. 

Legs, 101. 

Muscles, 259, 260. 

Nose, 170, 171. 

Position, 20. 

Pure Air and Breathing, 203. 

Senses, 114, 287, 288. 

Skin, 279, 280. 

Stomach, 219, 220. 

Taste, 140, 141, 

Thumb, 80. 

Tobacco, 183, 273, 287, 288. 

Touch, 177. 

Trunk, 94, 95. 

Voice, 159. 

Water, 27. 

Wine, 145, 146, 208, 209. 
Muscles, 252-261. 

Care, 256-261. 

Function, 252-255. 

Structure, 255. 



Nails, 105, 108, 122, 124, 276. 
Narcotics, 236. 
Neck, 89, 90. 



TXDEX 



i>:»:> 



Nerves, 231-245. 

Care, 235, 236. 

Function, 231-235. 
Nicotine. 

A Poison, 06, 180, 239. 286-288. 
An Ingredient of Tobacco, 96, 239, 
28(3. 

Observation, Training in, 152, 153. 

Parts of the Body, 50-54, 117, 118, 128. 

Perspiration, 05, 67. 

Poems. 

Beautiful Hands, 74. 

Little Children, 66. 

The Maple's Fingers, 53. 

The Snarlies, 127. 
Position, 13-20, 249, 250. 

Marching, 18-20. 

Sitting, 15-17, 250. 

Standing, 16, 18, 20, 250. 
Pupil of the Eye, 147, 148. 
Pure Air, 14, 122, 195-204, 226-228, 249, 
258. 

Effect, 195-199, 258. 

Need, 198, 199. 

Rest, 71-74, 120-122, 128. 

Need, 72, 120-122, 128. 

Result, 72, 120-122, 128. 
Review Questions. 

First Year, 115. 

Second Year, 192, 193. 

Third Year, 289, 290. 

Saliva, 217, 225. 
Seeing, 109, 110, 114, 115. 
Care, 109, 110, 114. 
Training, 152-154. 
Uses, 109, 110, 114. 173. 
Self-Control, 112, 139, 158, 243. 
Sense Organs. 
Ear, 160-168, 281-288. 
Care, 164-168. 
Parts, 161, 162, 167-168. 
Training, 162-164, 167, 168. 
Use, 160-162. 
Eye, 109, 110, 146-157, 281-288. . 
Care, 110, 154. . . . 



Parts, 146-149. 
Training, 152-154. 

Use, 109, 110, 153. 
Nose, 114, 168-172, 281-288. 
Care, 170. 

Parts, 114, 169, 170. 
Use, 114, 168. 
Skin, 172-176, 274-281. 
Appearance, 276. 
Care, 276-281. 
Uses 

As Sense Organ, 172-176. 
As Protecting Organ, 274, 275. 
Tongue, 111-115, 134-141. 
Care, 112-114, 137-141. 
Uses, 111-114, 134. 
Shin, 97, 98, 101. 
Shoulders, 91-95, 98. 
Skeleton, 245-252. 
Skin, 172-176. 274-281. 
Smelling, 114-115, 168-172, 287, 288. 
Care, 114, 170-172. 
Organ of, 168. 
Uses, 114, 168-170. 
Songs. 
Apple Song, 48. 
Clap ; Clap ; Hurrah, 73. 
Spine, 90. 

Stomach, 42, 132, 137, 214-220. 
Care, 42, 218-220. 
Description, 216-218. 
Work, 218-220. 
Stories. 
A Cause of Earache, 164. 
A Fourth of July Story, 19. 
Agnes's Fancy Shoes, 103. 
A Noisy School, 17. 
Arthur and his Mother, 126. 
A Visit to the Vineyard, 142. 
Beautiful Eyes, 151. 
Bessie, 14. 

Bob and the Cherry Tree. 32. 
Dick and the Carving Knife, 232. 
Early to Bed, 120. 
Elsie and Karl, 99. 
Eyes that cannot see. 282. 
Feet which s;ot into Mischief, 106". 
Field of Gold, 81. 



296 



INDEX 



Stories. 
Freddy in No-Hand Land, 77. 
Harold's Maple Sugar, 135. 
How Dan got his Cherries, 122. 
How Dan hurt his Eyes, 154. 
How Maude keeps Pure Air in her 

Bedroom, 202. 
How Tohacco hurts Land, 181. 
How Tom learned to see, 153. 
Jack's First Cigarette, 237. 
Mabel and her Umbrella, 149. 
Marjory's Waist, 92. 
Miss Ayer's School, 195. 
Miss Cloud and Miss Sunbeam, 66. 
Nelly's Doctors, 256. 
Our Likeness to Trees, 50. 
Paul and Bert, 33. 
Pietro's Two Breakfasts, 184. 
Poor Horace, 46. 
Secret of a Fine Figure, 195. 
Story of Bread, 261. 
Susie and the Dark, 150. 
The Bird's Nest, 68. 
The Boy who broke his Arm, 72. 
The Boy who stopped Growing, 

250. 
The Cousins, 241. 
The Cross Blacksmith, 190. 
The Good Painter, 54. 
The Human Mill, 214. 
The Little Apple Blossom, 209. 
Tom and his Ball, 45. 
Tom had been there, 205. 
Toothbrush Brigade, 125. 
Twins' Lost Trip, 270. 
Two Heads of Rye, 84. 
Uncle Mason's Toad, 285. 
Water better than Tea or Coffee, 

23. - 
Wliat a Blind Man did, 176. 
What a Teacher saw behind a Bush, 

202. 
What Cigarettes may do to the 

Head, 58. 
What made Olga Sleepy, 86. 
What made Tom Sick, 24. 
Who had the Best Ears, 165. 
Why Eddy stopped Growing, 36. 



Why Helen did not eat her Candy, 
137. 

W T hy we need Water to drink, 21. 

Willie and Harry, 28. 
Strong Drink, 86-88. 
Sunshine, 249, 251, 258, 260. 

Table Manners, 139-141. 
Tasting, 111-115, 134-141. 
Care, 112-114, 137-141. 
Uses, 111-114, 134, 135. 
Tea, 23, 24, 74, 214. 
Tears, 150. 
Teeth, 125-128,272. 
Care, 125-127. 
Shape, 125. 
Uses, 125. 
Thigh, 97-98, 101. 
Throat, 158-159, 281, 282. 
Tight Clothing, 92-95, 199-201. 
Tight Shoes, 103-105, 108. 
Tobacco, 178-184, 266-274. 
Contains a Poison, 180-184, 236, 266, 

273. 
Effects on 
Land, 181-183. 
User, 180, 181, 183-184. 
Blood, 229, 230. 
Bones, 180, 183. 
Brain and Nerves, 237-239, 

268. 
Breathing Organs, 172, 283-288. 
Feeling, 111, 115. 
Growth, 94-95, 108, 251, 252, 268, 

273, 274. 
Health, 182-183, 268-274. 
Hearing, 113-115, 165, 167-168, 

283-288. 
Heart, 181, 183, 184. 
Muscle, 259, 260. 
Nerve Control, 80. 
Sight, 110, 115, 155-157, 281-288. 
Smell, 114-115, 281-288. 
Taste, 111-115, 138, 139, 141. 
Teeth, 126, 128, 272. 
Throat, 159. 
Leads to Drinking, 268, 273. 
The Plant, 178-180. 



INDEX 



297 



Toes, 102-108. 
Topics for 

First Year, 12. 

Second Year, 116. 

Third Year, 194. 
Touch, 172-178. 

Care, 177. 

Organ of, 175-178. 

Use, 172-178. 
Trunk, 50-54, 89-95. 

Back, 91, 92. 

Care, 91-95. 

Lower Parts, 94, 95. 

Upper Parts, 89-92, 94 3 95. 



Voice, 157-159. 
Care, 158, 159. 
Use, 157, 158. 

Waist, 94, 95. 
Water, 21-27, 124. 

Danger in Impure Water, 24, 25. 

Forms, 23, 24. 

Kind to drink, 24. 

Uses, 21-27. 
Wet Feet, 105, 108. 
Winking, 150. 

Yeast, 263-265. 



TYPOGRAPHY BY J. S. CU3HING & CO., NORWOOD, MASS. 



Page's Theory and Practice of Teaching 

Edited by E. C. BRANSON, A.M. 
Professor of Pedagogy, Georgia State Normal School. 

Cloth, 12mo, 385 pages Price, $1.00 



For more than half a century Page's Theory and Prac- 
tice of Teaching has been the recognized standard and 
accepted mentor of the teachers' profession. Since its 
first publication in 1847 ^ nas passed through more 
editions, has been more largely read, and has exerted a 
deeper influence upon successive generations of teachers 
than any other work ever published. Its usefulness and 
popularity remain undiminished; it is still the first book 
recommended for the young teacher's reading and guid- 
ance, and still continues a never failing source of 
instruction and inspiration in the teacher's work. 

In the present edition the publishers have given the 
original work the most attractive form and dress in which 
it has ever been presented to the public. The chapters 
are introduced by apposite quotations and are followed by 
topical outlines, subjects for discussions or papers, refer- 
ences to pedagogical works, bibliographies of teachers' 
books, and such other aids as will serve to heighten the 
value of the original work for private students, for 
classrooms, and for reading circles. 



Copies sent, prepaid, to any address 011 receipt of the price, 

_ -American Boo k Co m pany 

New York ♦ Cincinnati •♦• Chicago 

(198) 



Important Pedagogical Works 

By RURIC N. ROARK 

Dean of the Department of Pedagogy, Kentucky State College 



ROARK'S PSYCHOLOGY IN EDUCATION 

Cloth, 12mo, 312 pages Price $1.00 

This new work is designed for use as a text-book in 
Secondary and Normal Schools, Teachers' Training Classes, 
and Reading Circles. The general purpose of the book is 
to give teachers a logical and scientific basis for their daily- 
work in the schoolroom. It makes a distinct departure 
from the methods heretofore in vogue in the treatment of 
Psychology, and is justly regarded as the most important 
contribution to pedagogical science and literature in 
recent years. 

ROARK'S METHOD IN EDUCATION 

Cloth, 12mo, 349 pages Price $1.00 

The second book of Roark's Pedagogical Series is 
designed for Normal Schools, Teachers' Reading Circles, 
and for private reading by every teacher who seeks a key 
to the solution of the problems that present themselves in 
the schoolroom. By its practical application and illustra- 
tion of sound pedagogical principles, it presents a working 
manual of great helpfulness to all teachers, both to the 
experienced and the inexperienced. 



Copies of either of the above books will be sent, prepaid, to any address 
on receipt of the price. 

American Book Company 

New York • ♦ Cincinnati ♦ Chicago 

(199) 



Books for Teachers 



FOR THE STUDY OF PEDAGOGY 
Aiken's Methods of Mind-Training 
Aiken's Exercises in Mind-Training- . 
Alling-Aber's Experiment in Education 
Hailmann's History of Pedagogy 
Hewett's Pedagogy for Young Teachers 
Hinsdale's The Art of Study 
King's School Interests and Duties 
Mann's School Recreations and Amusements 
Page's Theory and Practice of Teaching . 
Palmer's Science of Education . 
Payne's School Supervision 
Roark's Method in Education 
Roark's Psychology in Education 
Seeley's History of Education . 
Shoup's History and Science of Education 
Swett's American Public Schools 
White's Elements of Pedagogy . 
White's School Management 







. $1.00 






1.00 






1.25 






.60 






.85 






1.00 






1.00 






1.00 






1 00 






1.00 






1.00 






1.00 






1 00 






1.25 






1.00 






1.00 






1.00 






1.00 



FOR THE STUDY OF PSYCHOLOGY 

Dewey's Psychology .... 
Halleck's Psychology and Psychic Culture 
Hewett's Psychology for Young Teachers 
Putnam's Elementary Psychology 



1.25 

1.25 
.85 
.90 



Copies sent, prepaid, to any address on receipt of 

American Book Company 



New York 
(197) 



Cincinnati 



Chicago 



The Natural Geographies 



NATURAL ELEMENTARY GEOGRAPHY 

Linen Binding, Quarto, 144 pages . . . Price 60 cents 

NATURAL ADVANCED GEOGRAPHY 

Linen Binding, Large Quarto, 160 pages . . . Price $1.25 

By Jacques W. Redway, F.R.G.S., and Russell Hinman, 
Author of the Eclectic Physical Geography. 

The publication of The Natural Geographies marks a new era in the 
study and teaching of geography. Some of the distinctive features which 
characterize this new series are : 

1. A Natural Plan of Development, based on physical geography and 

leading in a natural manner to the study of historical, industrial, 
and commercial geography. 

2. Clear and distinct political maps showing correctly the comparative 

size of different countries, and physical maps showing relief by 
contour lines and different colors, as in the best government maps. 

Inductive and comparative treatment of subjects according to the 
most approved pedagogical principles. 

Frequent exercises and reviews leading to the correlation and com- 
parison of the parts of the subject already studied. 



Topical outlines for the language work required by the Courses of 
Study of the best schools. 

Supplementary Exercises including laboratory work and references 
for collateral reading. 

Numerous original and appropriate pictures and graphic diagrams 
to illustrate the text. 

Clear explanations of each necessary term where it first occurs, and 
omission of formal definitions at the beginning of the book. 

Strict accordance, in method and treatment, with the recommenda- 
tions of the Committee of Fifteen. 



Illustrated Circulars describing the plan and method of The A"attiral 
Geographies will be sent free to any address on application. 

Copies of The Natural Geographies will be sent, prepaid, to any address 
on receipt of the price by the Publishers : 

American Book Company 

New York ♦ Cincinnati ♦ Chicago 

(XOQ) 



Eclectic School Readings 

A Collection of Choice, Interesting-, and Instructive Books, Handsomely 
Bound in Cloth. 



$0 25 
.35 
.35 
.45 
.45 
.45 
.40 



.60 
.50 
.50 
.50 
.50 
.50 



Folk Stories 

Lane's Stories for Children 
Baldwin's Fairy Stories and Fables . 
Baldwin's Fifty Famous Stories Retold 
Baldwin's Old Stories of the East . 
Baldwin's Old Greek Stories 
Bradish's Old Norse Stories 
Pyle's Prose and Verse for Children 

Famous Stories 

Clarke's Stories from the Arabian Nights 
Defoe's Robinson Crusoe (Stephens) 
Dickens's Tale of Two Cities (Kirk) 
Scott's Kenilworth (Norris) . 
Scott's Quentin Durward (Norris) 
Scott's Talisman (Dewey) 

Geographical Stories 

Krout's Alice's Visit to the Hawaiian Islands 
Shaw's Big People and Little People of Other Lands 
Shaw's Discoverers and Explorers .... 

Historical Stories 

Eggleston's Stories of Great Americans . 
Eggleston's Stories of American Life and Adventure 
Guerber's Story of the Thirteen Colonies 
Guerber's Story of the Great Republic . 

Guerber's Story of the English 

Guerber's Story of the Chosen People 

Guerber's Story of the Greeks . . . . . .60 

Guerber's Story of the Romans 60 

Classical Stories 

Clarke's Story of Troy 60 

Clarke's Story of Ulysses . . . . . . .60 

.45 

.45 



.45 
.30 
.35 

.40 
.50 
.65 
.65 
.65 
.60 



Clarke's Story of Aeneas . . . . , 
Clarke's Story of Caesar . . . . , 

Natural History Stories 

Holder's Stories of Animal Life . . • . 
Kelly's Short Stories of Our Shy Neighbors , 
Dana's Plants and Their Children . 
Needham's Outdoor Studies . 

Patriotic and Moral Readings 

Markwick and Smith's True Citizen . 
-Persons's Our Country in Poem and Prose 



.60 

.50 
.65 
.40 



60 
.50 



Copies sent, prepaid, on receipt of the price, 

American Book Company 



New York 
(ii) 



Cincinnati 



.Chicago 



Webster's School Dictionaries 



REVISED EDITIONS 



WEBSTER'S SCHOOL DICTIONARIES in their revised form con- 
stitute a progressive series, carefully graded and especially adapted for 
Primary Schools, Common Schools, High Schools, Academies, and pri- 
vate students. These Dictionaries have all been thoroughly revised, 
entirely reset, and made to conform in all essential respects to that great 
standard authority in English, — Webster's International Dictionary. 

WEBSTER'S PRIMARY SCHOOL DICTIONARY . . . $0.48 
Containing over 20,000 words and meanings, with over 400 
illustrations. 



. $0.72 
over 500 



WEBSTER'S COMMON SCHOOL DICTIONARY . 

Containing over 25,000 words and meanings, with 
illustrations. 

WEBSTER'S HIGH SCHOOL DICTIONARY .... $0.98 

Containing about 37,000 words and definitions, and an appendix 

giving a pronouncing vocabulary of Biblical, Classical, Mythological, 

Historical, and Geographical proper names, with over 800 illustrations. 

WEBSTER'S ACADEMIC DICTIONARY. Cloth, $1.50; Indexed, $1.80 
The Same .... Half Calf, $2.75; Indexed, $3.00 
Abridged directly from the International Dictionary, and giving the 
orthography, pronunciations, definitions, and synonyms of the large 
vocabulary of words in common use, with an appendix containing 
various useful tables, with over 800 illustrations. 

SPECIAL EDITIONS 

Webster's Countinghouse Dictionary . 
Webster's Condensed Dictionary . Cloth, 

The Same . . . Half Calf 

Webster's Handy Dictionary 
Webster's Pocket Dictionary. Cloth . 

The Same. Roan Flexible . 

The Same. Roan Tucks 

The Same. Morocco, Indexed . 
Webster's American People's Dictionary and Manual 
Webster's Practical Dictionary .... 



Sheep, Indexed, $2.40 
$1.44; Indexed, 1.75 
$2.75; Indexed, 3.00 
.15 
.57 
.69 
.78 
.90 
.48 
.80 



Copies of any of Webster s Dictionaries will be sent, prepaid, to any 
address on receipt of the price by the Publishers ; 



New York 

(IC4> 



American Book Company 

♦ Cincinnati ♦ 



Chicago 



Spelling and Word Study 



RICE'S RATIONAL SPELLING BOOK. By Dr. J. M. Rice. 

Part I. For use in the first three grades. Boards . .15 cents 
The Same. Cloth 17 cents 

Part II. For use in all grades above the third. Boards. 20 cents 
The Same. Cloth 22 cents 

This is a spelling book pure and simple, designed for use in all the 
grades or years of school work. It has been arranged on a definite 
psychological plan, based upon an examination of the schools of nearly 
all the large cities of the country and upon a careful study of the actual 
spelling of many thousand pupils. 

PATTERSON'S AMERICAN WORD BOOK 

Graded Lessons in Spelling, Defining, Punctuation, and Dictation. 

By Calvin Patterson, M.A 25 cents 

This new spelling book embodies a carefully developed and pro- 
gressive plan for teaching the forms and values of English words in 
common use. It begins with words illustrating the primary sounds, the 
words being printed both in Roman letters and in vertical script. Then 
follow graded lessons on different classes and uses of words. 

HARRINGTON'S SPELLING BOOK. Complete . . . 20 cents 
Part I. — separate. For Primary Grades . . . .15 cents 
Part II. — separate. For Higher Grades . . . .15 cents 
A complete course in spelling for graded and common schools. 

McGUFFEY'S REVISED ECLECTIC SPELLING BOOK . 17 cents 
Conforming in orthography, pronunciation, syllabication, and 
diacritical marks to the Websterian standard. 

NATURAL SPELLER AND WORD BOOK .... 20 cents 

SWINTON'S WORD BOOK OF ENGLISH SPELLING . 18 cents 



Copies of any of the above books will be sent, prepaid, to any address on 
receipt of the price by the Publishers : 

American Book Company 

New York ♦ Cincinnati ♦ Chicago 

(32) 



FEB 19 1901 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 





i mil ii 



005 526 157 A f 



